PLM400 - Quality Management
May 8, 2017 | Author: Víctor Tsuchida Kiyan | Category: N/A
Short Description
Quality Management...
Description
PLM400 Partner
Use
Date Training Center Instructors
SAP
Education Website
Partner
Participant Handbook Course Version: 2005 Q2 Course Duration: 5 Day(s) Material Number: 50073347
An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work
Only
Internal
Use
SAP
mySAP Product Lifecycle Management
Internal
Only
Quality Management
Copyright Copyright © 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.
Partner SAP Use
•
ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.
•
INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.
•
UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
•
Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®, VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
•
HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
•
JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
•
JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.
•
SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Disclaimer THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE, INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS CONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.
Only
Internal
IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.
Partner
•
SAP
Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Use
•
Internal
Only
Trademarks
About This Handbook This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.
American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used.
Partner
Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths, and options.
Example text
SAP
Description
Example text
Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics, and tables
EXAMPLE TEXT
Names of elements in the system. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and individual key words of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, for example SELECT and INCLUDE.
Example text
Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, and passages of the source text of a program.
Example text
Exact user entry. These are words and characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.
Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries.
iii
Internal
Only
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
2005/Q2
SAP
Use
Also used for cross-references to other documentation both internal (in this documentation) and external (in other locations, such as SAPNet).
Use
Type Style
Internal
Only
Typographic Conventions
About This Handbook
PLM400
Icons in Body Text The following icons are used in this handbook. Icon
Meaning
Only
Exception or caution
Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor’s presentation.
Use
Procedures
Internal
Note or further explanation of previous point
Partner
For more information, tips, or background
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
iv
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Contents Course Overview ............................................................................. vii
Logon and Screen Design ................................................................... 2 Calling Functions ........................................................................... 12 Getting Help ................................................................................. 21 Personalizing the User Interface.......................................................... 28
Unit 2: Basics.................................................................................. 39 Overview of Processes and Available Solutions........................................ 40 Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio ........................... 54
SAP Use
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement .......................................... 97 QM Tasks in Procurement ................................................................. 98
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production ............................................131 QM Tasks in Production................................................................... 132
Partner
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service .............159 QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution ..................................................... 160
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning ........................................183 Logistics Master Data in Quality Planning.............................................. 184 Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data ............................................... 192
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection ......................................221 The Inspection Lot ......................................................................... 222 Inspection Lot Creation ................................................................... 228
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
v
Only
Internal
QM in Company Processes ............................................................... 74 QM Processes in the Logistics Supply Chain ........................................... 85
SAP
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain .............................. 73
Use
Partner
Unit 1: Navigation ..............................................................................1
Internal
Only
Course Goals.................................................................................vii Course Objectives ...........................................................................vii
Contents
PLM400
Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion ............................................. 236 Sample Management ..................................................................... 268
Unit 9: Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates .....................................291 Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue................................................ 292
General Notification Processing ......................................................... 314 Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain.................................... 321
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control .........................................341
Partner
Unit 14: Enterprise Portals ................................................................453 Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution ................................ 454
Unit 15: Implementing QM.................................................................471 Planning and Project Preparation ....................................................... 472 Business Blueprint......................................................................... 481 Realization and Start of Productive Use ................................................ 487
...................................................................507
Glossary .......................................................................................513 Index ............................................................................................517
vi
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Appendix 1: Appendix
Partner
Internal
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study .........................................401
SAP
Use
Stability Study Process Flow ............................................................. 402 Objects in the Stability Study............................................................. 413
Overview of Test Equipment Management ............................................. 382
Use
Unit 12: Functions in Detail - Test Equipment Management ......................381
SAP
Dynamic Modification and Statistical Process Control................................ 342 Quality Scores and Costs................................................................. 349 Evaluations in Quality Management..................................................... 356
Internal
Only
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications ..................................313
Course Overview This course is designed to give you an overview of mySAP PLM Quality Management (QM). Examples are used to illustrate the QM functions in the system. This course is a prerequisite for the subsequent detailed courses in the area of mySAP PLM Quality Management.
Only
Internal
Target Audience This course is intended for the following audiences:
Partner
• •
Members of the project team Employees who are familiar with QM tasks
Use
Course Prerequisites Required Knowledge Basic knowledge of business processes
SAP
SAP
•
Recommended Knowledge
Use
SAPPLM SAP01
Partner
• •
Course Goals • • •
Recognize the possibilities for use of mySAP PLM Quality Management Understand how QM is integrated with the other SAP applications Explain the detailed functions of QM
Only
Internal
This course will prepare you to:
Course Objectives After completing this course, you will be able to: • • • •
2005/Q2
Understand business processes from a QM standpoint Understand QM integration Give an overview of QM functions List the basic conditions involved in implementing QM
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
vii
Course Overview
PLM400
SAP Software Component Information The information in this course pertains to the following SAP Software Components and releases: •
ECC 5.0
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
viii
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 1 Internal
Only
Navigation Unit Overview
Partner
In this unit, you learn how to use the SAP GUI to navigate in SAP systems. It also contains information on personalization and other information that will be useful to you in your work with SAP systems.
Use
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP Use
Partner
Unit Contents Lesson: Logon and Screen Design.................................................. 2 Exercise 1: Logon and Screen Design ......................................... 9 Lesson: Calling Functions .......................................................... 12 Exercise 2: Calling Functions .................................................. 17 Lesson: Getting Help ................................................................ 21 Exercise 3: Getting Help........................................................ 25 Lesson: Personalizing the User Interface ........................................ 28 Exercise 4: Personalizing the User Interface ................................ 31
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
1
Only
Internal
Log on to the system successfully Name and use elements of a SAP GUI screen Use various methods to call SAP system functions Describe the standard menus System and Help. Use the basic functions of the F1 help Use the F4 help Display the information in the online documentation Use the various options for personalizing the SAP system
SAP
• • • • • • • •
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
Lesson: Logon and Screen Design Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn about logging on to the system and about the significance of the various SAP GUI screen elements.
Only
Log on to the system successfully Name and use elements of a SAP GUI screen
How do I log on to SAP systems and what are the uses of various SAP GUI screen elements?
Logging on to the System
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
SAP Use Internal
Only
2
Partner
The SAP GUI program connects the front-end computer with a specific SAP system. Theoretically you can specify the SAP system required at the command-line level when calling the SAP GUI program; in practice, you never need to do this. For starting SAP GUI, SAP provides another program: SAP Logon. When you call up SAP Logon, it displays a list of SAP systems for which you can start the logon process. This list derives from a file on the front-end computer: saplogon.ini. This file is normally preconfigured centrally and made available to end users. During logon, the SAP Logon program also enables logon load distribution using the resources available for the system selected.
SAP
You can access SAP systems using front-end programs with a variety of designs; for example, the front end for the SAP Business Information Warehouse (SAP BW) is the Business Explorer (BEx). All SAP solutions are, however, accessible using a general front-end program, the SAP GUI (Graphical User Interface). The SAP GUI is the standard program for accessing almost all SAP solutions. Several variants of the SAP GUI are available; these variants are all graphically equivalent, but adapted for use in different environments. For the sake of simplicity, further descriptions refer to the SAP GUI for the Windows environment.
Use
Business Example
• •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
Lesson Objectives
Lesson: Logon and Screen Design
Internal
Only
PLM400
Partner
Figure 1: The SAP Logon program
Use
When logging on to an SAP system, you will be prompted to enter the following information: user and password. If you have implemented a SingleSignOn (SSO) solution, you may not need to enter this information. You also have the option of specifying a client when logging on; the client field usually already contains an appropriate default value.
SAP Use
Only
Internal
Partner
When logging on, you can select a logon language supported by that system. SAP systems can support a large number of languages, the minimum being English and one other selected language. The number of installed languages determines which languages your system supports. On the logon screen, you also have the option of
SAP
Hint: A client usually represents a company in an SAP system.This means that if an SAP system has several clients, then several companies can be represented and simultaneously active in that system. The client has a corresponding key field in the tables of the database used by that SAP system. If you are in a client, you can only access data for that specific client. Clients therefore correspond to independent business entities.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
3
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
using the New password pushbutton to change your password, at the most once per day. Your system administrator can add additional text to your logon screen. To do this, see SAP Note 205487.
Use
Partner
Hint: In the course of one logon to a system, you can work in several sessions (processing windows of an SAP system) simultaneously. Your system administrator can use a system parameter to define how many sessions are permissible for each logon to the SAP system. This parameter (rdisp/max_alt_modes) is valid for all users of that system and can be set to any value between 2 and 6.
Internal
Only
Note: SAP Notes contain detailed information on certain functions or corrections for known errors in SAP products. You can access SAP Notes through, for example, the SAP Service Marketplace on the Internet, using a valid user and password: http://service.sap.com/notes
SAP
SAP
User data is stored in the system by client, that is, you can, for instance, log on to client 100 in your system, but you will not have a user for client 200, even if your system has a client 200. The data for a particular user within a client is called the user master record.
4
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 2: The logon screen for an SAP system
PLM400
Lesson: Logon and Screen Design
Multiple logons are logged as of SAP R/3 4.6. This is for reasons of both security and licensing. If the same user logs on more than once, then for each subsequent logon, the system displays a warning message that offers the user the following three options: • • •
Continue with this logon and end any other logons in the system Continue with this logon without ending any other logons in the system (this is logged) Terminate this logon
Only
Screen Structure
Partner
Use
The SAP Easy Access screen is the default initial screen in SAP systems. The left side of the screen contains a tree hierarchy of the menus available to you in the SAP system; you can use the right side of the screen to display your company logo. This graphic is made available centrally by your system administrator and cannot be customized by individual users.
Internal
Once you have logged on successfully, the initial screen of the SAP system appears; this screen is also known as the SAP Easy Access screen.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 3: SAP Easy Access
You can find a detailed description of how to configure the graphic in SAP Easy Access under Extras → Administration information (if you have the correct authorization). Please note that the graphic is stored in the system and transported to the front end every time a user logs on. Although it is transported in compressed form, the graphic
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
5
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
should not exceed 20 KB. You can also prevent the graphic from being displayed by either choosing the setting Low Speed Connection in the SAP Logon program (see SAP Note 161053), or by using Extras → Settings in the SAP Easy Access screen. You can display a typical screen (with various elements) by, for example, choosing System → User profile → Own data, followed by the Defaults tab page. You will then see this screen with the data for your own user:
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner Only
Internal
Figure 4: Maintaining your user profile
6
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Logon and Screen Design
An SAP screen can contain the following simple screen elements: •
• •
Use
Only
Internal
Other elements include, for example, input fields and pushbuttons.
Partner
• • •
SAP
SAP
•
Use
Partner
•
Internal
Only
•
Command field: you can start applications directly by entering their transaction code in the command field (this is hidden as default). You can find the transaction code for an application either in the overview menu on the SAP Easy Access screen, in the status bar (see below), or in the application itself under System → Status. Menu bar: the menu bar is the top line of any primary window in the SAP system. The menus shown here depend on which application you are in. These menus may also contain cascading menus. Standard toolbar: The pushbuttons in the standard toolbar are shown on every SAP screen. If they are not available in an application, pushbuttons that you cannot use on that screen are deactivated. If you place the cursor over a pushbutton for a short time, the system displays a flag with the name or function of the pushbutton. If appropriate, the corresponding function key setting is also displayed. Title bar: the title bar names the function that you are currently in. Application toolbar: this shows the pushbuttons available in the application that you are currently in. Checkboxes: checkboxes allow you to select several options from a group of fields. Radio buttons: you can only select one option. Tab: this allows you to organize several screen areas to improve clarity. Status bar: the status bar displays information on the current system status, such as warnings and errors. You can also change the display variant to show, for example, the transaction code of the transaction you are currently in.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
7
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
8
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Logon and Screen Design
Exercise 1: Logon and Screen Design Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • To learn how to log on to an SAP system
Internal
Only
Business Example You want to work in an SAP system.
Task: Logging on to the System and Initial Tasks
1.
Start the SAP Logon program and choose the entry for the SAP system specified by your instructor. Choose the Logon pushbutton.
SAP Use
3.
What is the name of the function you reach if you choose Tools → Administration → Monitor → System Monitoring → User Overview? What transaction code could you use to call this transaction instead of the menu?
Only
Internal
What is the maximum number of parallel sessions (windows of the SAP system) that you can open using System → Create session?
Partner
2.
SAP
Enter the client, user name, initial password, and the logon language specified by the instructor. When you log on for the first time, enter a new password of your choice twice in the window that appears.
Use
Partner
Log on to the training system and carry out some basic exercises in the system. The menu paths refer to the SAP standard menu.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
9
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
Solution 1: Logon and Screen Design Task: Logging on to the System and Initial Tasks Log on to the training system and carry out some basic exercises in the system. The menu paths refer to the SAP standard menu. 1.
Start the SAP Logon program and choose the entry for the SAP system specified by your instructor. Choose the Logon pushbutton.
Only
2.
What is the maximum number of parallel sessions (windows of the SAP system) that you can open using System → Create session? a)
What is the name of the function you reach if you choose Tools → Administration → Monitor → System Monitoring → User Overview? What transaction code could you use to call this transaction instead of the menu? a)
Only
Internal
The function is called User List (see the entry in the title bar). You can find the relevant transaction code using System → Status; in this case, the code is SM04. You can also choose to display the transaction code for an active transaction in the status bar.
Partner
Use
Depending on the relevant system parameter setting, you can open between 2 and 6 sessions. This training system allows you to open up to 6 sessions.
SAP
SAP
3.
Follow the instructions in the exercise.
Use
Partner
a)
Internal
Enter the client, user name, initial password, and the logon language specified by the instructor. When you log on for the first time, enter a new password of your choice twice in the window that appears.
10
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Logon and Screen Design
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Log on to the system successfully • Name and use elements of a SAP GUI screen
Related Information You can find additional information in the online documentation under Help → SAP Library → Getting Started.
Use
Partner
Internal
Only
•
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
11
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
Lesson: Calling Functions Lesson Overview During this lesson you will learn about various ways of calling functions in SAP systems.
Only
Business Example
• •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
Lesson Objectives Use various methods to call SAP system functions Describe the standard menus System and Help.
None
Use
Favorites List and User Menu
SAP
• •
The user-defined favorites list The role-based user menu or the SAP menu
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
The favorites listcontains SAP system functions or links to Internet content or to files on the end user's front-end computer. The favorites list, which is initially empty, can be edited by each end user in accordance with their preferences; you can only view your own favorites list. Since data on the favorites is stored within the SAP system, each user might have different collections of favorites in different systems. Favorites can be organized into folders. You can edit your favorites in the SAP Easy Access screen using the Favorites menu.
SAP
Once you have logged on, on the left side of screen you have two overview trees at your disposal for selecting functions:
12
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Lesson: Calling Functions
Internal
Figure 5: Favorites list and user menu
SAP Use Internal
The role-based user menu is created according to the role(s) assigned to the userand is transferred to the front end. This means that it makes sense to keep roles as small as possible because large roles could take a long time to transfer to the front end in certain circumstances. If a user has several roles assigned, then some functions can
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
13
Only
Hint: System administrators can use table USERS_SSM to determine whether or not users are allowed to switch between the SAP menu and their user menus. If both menus are disallowed, then the user menu is still displayed. The availability of the user or SAP menu does not affect a user's authorizations. In other words, users can always use the transaction code (see below) to call transactions that they have authorization for.
Partner
The end user can switch from the role-based user menu to the SAP standard menu (if the system settings allow this).
SAP
The Favorites menu gives you the option of adding a function from the user (or SAP) menu to your personal favorites list by selecting the function and choosing Favorites → Add. You also have the option of using the mouse to drag & drop. You can add URLs or links to files to your list of favorites by choosing Favorites → Add other objects. Click on the triangle symbol to the left of the file symbol to expand or collapse the list of favorites.
Use
Partner
Only
PLM400
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
be repeated in different parts of the role-based user menu. If you want to prevent this, please see SAP Note 357693 (and the other SAP Notes to which it refers) for information on finding and deleting duplicates, and on other related matters.
Internal
Only
Hint: As long as you have the appropriate authorization, you can also display user menus other than the ones assigned to you in your user master record. To do this, choose Other menu. Use Create role to start the role maintenance transaction — transaction PFCG.
Calling Functions You have several options for navigating in an SAP system: By entering transaction codes in the command field By choosing items from menus in the menu bar By choosing items from the favorites list or from the user or SAP menus
You can use the keyboard to get to the SAP Easy Access screen or the command field and call system functions from there.
SAP
•
TAB: goes to the next field element within a field group Ctrl + TAB: goes from one field group to the first element of the next field group Ctrl + /: goes directly to the command field
When the command field is active, you can use the F1 key to display possible entries for this important field. The following entries are possible: • • • • • • •
14
/n to cancel the current transaction /n#### to call transaction #### directly from another transaction. Without the prefix you can only call #### from the SAP Easy Access screen /o to display an overview of sessions /o#### to call transaction #### in a new session directly from another transaction /nend to end the logon session with a confirmation dialog box /nex to end the logon session without a confirmation dialog box /i to delete the session you are currently using
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
You can find further shortcuts using the pushbutton Customizing of local layout (Alt+F12)→ Sapgui Help.
Partner
Use
• •
SAP
Hint: Use the following keys to navigate using the keyboard:
Use
Partner
• • •
PLM400
Lesson: Calling Functions
Note: The command field is an exception in that choosing the F4 key does not display the input help. The F4 key in the command field lists the last 15 different entries in the command field. This list is stored in the registry on the front end and is valid for all sessions on the front end (regardless of the system used).
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
You can navigate to the menus in the menu bar using the key combination Alt + .
The System and Help Menus The System and Help menus are always available with the same options on every screen in an SAP system.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
15
Only
Internal
Hint: By entering search_sap_menu or search_user_menu in the command field, you can search either the SAP standard menu or your user menu for a string or transaction code of your choice. The result of such a search is a list of hits that shows you how to navigate to the functions found using either menus or transaction codes.
Partner
Use
Figure 6: Various navigation options
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
The System menu allows you to access various system functions. This menu also contains functions that you can only access using this menu (and not in any other way). You can log off using System → Log off, and display useful information on your system and the function you are currently using, such as the transaction code, by choosing System → Status.
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
You can use the Help menu to access the online documentation. You can also display the Release Notes and configure the standard settings for your F4 Help. You will probably find that the most useful option for you here is the context-sensitive link to the section of the online documentation relevant to the function you are using. The context-sensitive help is also called Application Help. The tool for accessing the online documentation as a whole is the SAP Library.
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 7: The System and Help menus
16
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Calling Functions
Exercise 2: Calling Functions Exercise Objectives
Only
Task 1: : Various Ways of Calling Up the User Overview 1.
Call the transaction for displaying a list of users who are logged on. To do this, follow Tools → Administration → Monitor → System Monitoring → User Overview (in the SAP standard menu!).
SAP
Quit the user overview by using either the F3 key or the Back button in the standard toolbar. Now enter sm04 in the command field on the SAP Easy Access screen. This takes you directly to the user overview.
SAP
2.
Use
Which of the following are valid entries in the command field?
Internal
Entry
Result
SU3 SM04 /nsm04 /nend /nex
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
17
Only
Start this exercise in the SAP Easy Access screen. Make the following entries in the command field without returning to the SAP Easy Access screen in between. Make a note of your observations (you need not make any other entries on each screen that appears other than after you have entered /nend: please choose No here):
Partner
Task 2: : Some Possible Entries in the Command Field 1.
Use
Who is currently logged on to the training system?
None
Internal
Business Example
Partner
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Familiarize yourself with various ways of calling functions and navigating in the system
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
Solution 2: Calling Functions Task 1: : Various Ways of Calling Up the User Overview Who is currently logged on to the training system? 1.
Call the transaction for displaying a list of users who are logged on. To do this, follow
Only
a)
Quit the user overview by using either the F3 key or the Back button in the standard toolbar. Now enter sm04 in the command field on the SAP Easy Access screen. This takes you directly to the user overview. a)
See exercise for solution
Task 2: : Some Possible Entries in the Command Field Which of the following are valid entries in the command field?
SAP Use
Entry
Result
Internal
SU3 SM04
Partner
Start this exercise in the SAP Easy Access screen. Make the following entries in the command field without returning to the SAP Easy Access screen in between. Make a note of your observations (you need not make any other entries on each screen that appears other than after you have entered /nend: please choose No here):
SAP
1.
Use
Partner
2.
See exercise for solution
Internal
Tools → Administration → Monitor → System Monitoring → User Overview (in the SAP standard menu!).
Only
Continued on next page
18
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Calling Functions
/nsm04 /nend /nex
Only
SU3
Calls the screen for maintaining your own user settings.
SM04
Fails to call the user overview. A transaction can only be started directly (that is, without a prefix) from the SAP Easy Access screen.
/nsm04
Calls the user overview successfully. /n first ends the active transaction and then calls up the specified transaction.
/nend
A logoff confirmation dialog box appears. You could now exit the system.
/nex
No logoff confirmation dialog box appears and your session is simply terminated.
Use
Result
Internal
Entry
Partner
a)
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
19
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use various methods to call SAP system functions • Describe the standard menus System and Help.
Related Information
Use
Partner
Online documentation: extended help on SAP Easy Access. To display this documentation, choose Help → Application help on the SAP Easy Access screen
Internal
Only
•
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
20
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Getting Help
Lesson: Getting Help Lesson Overview This lesson covers the help options provided by the F1 and F4 keys.
Lesson Objectives
Only
Internal
Use
F1 Help
Partner
You can use the F1 key to display an explanation of fields, menus, functions and messages. The F1 help also displays technical information on the relevant field. This information includes, for example, the parameter ID that you need for setting user-specific default values for input fields that are also linked to the parameter ID. You can also display interesting information by, for example, calling the F1 help for the command field.
You need more information on fields that are ready for input (for example, what the purpose of the field is, or what values you can enter).
SAP
Business Example
Use
Partner
Use the basic functions of the F1 help Use the F4 help Display the information in the online documentation
SAP
• • •
Internal
Only
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
21
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Use
F4 Help You can use the F4 key to display information on possible input values. You can also call up the F4 help for a field using the button immediately to the right of the selected field. If a field contains a tick symbol, you can only proceed to the next step in that application after entering a permitted value (required entry). You can use transaction or screen variants, or Customizing to mark fields as mandatory or optional, hidden or filled with hidden standard values.
22
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Note: You may need to activate the Performance Assistant first using the menu Help → Settings... → F1 Help.
Partner
You can also use other buttons in the Performance Assistant dialog box to display information on the selected field. One of the most important pieces of information, besides the link to the context-sensitive Application Help, is the link to the Technical Information. Use Technical Information to display detailed information, such as the parameter ID assigned to the field. Parameter IDs are not covered in detail at this point.
SAP
SAP
Figure 8: The F1 help
PLM400
Lesson: Getting Help
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP Use
The SAP Library is a useful aid to getting to know system functions. It allows you to access the online documentation. The information stored here does not simply describe how to use system functions, it also explains system architecture concepts, gives examples of how you can configure various processes, and warns you about possible user errors and their consequences. The online documentation also contains several tips and tricks to help you carry out common tasks more easily and quickly.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
23
Only
Internal
SAP Library (Online Documentation)
Partner
The F4 help displays a list of possible entries for a field. If there are a large number of possible entries, a separate selection screen is displayed. If there is a long hit list, the F4 help only displays as many entries as the user has specified on the F4 Help tab page under Help → Settings... . The default value for the maximum number of displayed hits is 500. Take the time to familiarize yourself with the other settings you can make here.
SAP
Figure 9: The F4 help
PLM400
Internal
Figure 10: The SAP Library
SAP
SAP
Hint: You can also access the SAP Library on the Internet. To do so, go to http://help.sap.com, or look under http://www.sap.com → Education → SAP Help Portal. You can access the full product documentation for all releases here; a user-friendly full-text search by solution is also available.
Use
Partner
Only
Unit 1: Navigation
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
24
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Getting Help
Exercise 3: Getting Help Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Learning to use the F1 help and the F4 help
You need more information about a field on your screen.
Task: Using the F1 Help and the F4 Help
2.
Call the F4 help for the Logon language field. What is the language code for Ukrainian?
SAP
Use either the system menu or transaction code SU3 to call the function for maintaining your own user data. Call the F1 help for various input fields. Find the parameter ID for the Logon language field using Technical Information. To do this you need to use the Performance Assistant display.
SAP
1.
Use
Partner
In transaction SU3, call the F1 help and the F4 help.
Internal
Only
Business Example
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
25
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
Solution 3: Getting Help Task: Using the F1 Help and the F4 Help In transaction SU3, call the F1 help and the F4 help. Use either the system menu or transaction code SU3 to call the function for maintaining your own user data. Call the F1 help for various input fields. Find the parameter ID for the Logon language field using Technical Information. To do this you need to use the Performance Assistant display. a)
Partner
2.
The Logon language field is on the Defaults tab page. The Technical Information shows that the parameter ID for this field isSPR.
Call the F4 help for the Logon language field. What is the language code for Ukrainian? a)
Carry out the exercise as described. The language code for Ukrainian isUK.
Internal
Only
1.
Use
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
26
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Getting Help
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use the basic functions of the F1 help • Use the F4 help • Display the information in the online documentation
You can find additional information at http://www.sap.com → Education → SAP Help Portal.
Use
Partner
•
Internal
Only
Related Information
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
27
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
Lesson: Personalizing the User Interface Lesson Overview During this lesson, you will learn about various options for personalizing the appearance of your SAP GUI.
Lesson Objectives
Only
•
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Use the various options for personalizing the SAP system
You want to personalize your access to SAP systems.
Methods for Personalizing the SAP GUI
SAP
Figure 11:
Internal
28
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Options available through the Customizing of local layout pushbutton include, under Options... → Local Data, administration options for input history. When the input history is active, it builds a small front-end database that contains the last n number of entries made in input fields in transactions. You can define the value of n yourself. These entries are then provided as input help for fields that are appropriately declared. There is a slight time delay on the input history, which you can minimize by choosing Options... → Local Data → History → Immediately.
Partner
Use
Use this button for Customizing of local layout:
SAP
End users have several personalization options at their disposal. Some are described here. You can use Extras → Settings to change the appearance of the initial screen, for example, by turning off the graphics display on the right side of the screen, or by displaying technical names (transaction codes) on the SAP Easy Access screen.
Use
Partner
Business Example
PLM400
Lesson: Personalizing the User Interface
The Options... also enable you to set the speed of quick info, and to display system messages in dialog boxes (Options... → Messages). Various other aids and settings are available here, for instance, you can choose a color scheme for your GUI. Note: In Customizing of local layout, under New Visual Design... → General, you also have the option of changing the font size on your SAP GUI screen. However, you will need to close the SAP Logon program, call it up and log on to the system again before your changes to the settings take effect.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner Only
Internal
Figure 12: Two of the many personalization options
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
29
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
You can set personal standard values using System → User profile → Own data. You can do this on the tab pages Address, Defaults, and Parameters.
Only SAP
SAP
Hint: Use the information displayed in the status bar on the bottom right edge of the GUI window. For example, use it to permanently display the transaction code of the active transaction.
Use
Partner
The favorites list on the SAP Easy Access screen and the status bar display variants provide additional personalization options.
Internal
Hint: Use parameters to fill frequently-used input fields with default values. The prerequisite for you to be able to do this is that the input field has been assigned a parameter ID. To find the parameter ID, select the input field for which you want to define a default value and choose the F1 help, followed by the Technical Information pushbutton. This calls up a dialog box that displays the corresponding parameter ID under Field data (as long as a parameter ID is assigned to the field). Enter this parameter ID, for example, XUS, in the Parameters tab page in your user data, and assign a value to it, in this case, your user name. The result of this is that all fields with XUS as their parameter ID now have the value you entered as a default.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
30
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Personalizing the User Interface
Exercise 4: Personalizing the User Interface Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Learn to use easy personalization options.
You would like to personalize your front end, that is, adapt it to your requirements.
Task: Easy Personalization Options 1.
Choose the Customizing of local layout pushbutton and activate Quick Cut and Paste. Now test this function on some fields in your User Profile (SU3). You can then use the same method to deactivate this function.
2.
Display the transaction code of the active transaction on the status bar.
Use
Partner
Carry out some simple adaptations to your front end.
Internal
Only
Business Example
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
31
Unit 1: Navigation
PLM400
Solution 4: Personalizing the User Interface Task: Easy Personalization Options Carry out some simple adaptations to your front end. 1.
Choose the Customizing of local layout pushbutton and activate Quick Cut and Paste. Now test this function on some fields in your User Profile (SU3). You can then use the same method to deactivate this function.
Only
Display the transaction code of the active transaction on the status bar. a)
Choose the button for selecting the display variant in the status bar and select Transaction. The transaction code of every transaction that you now call is displayed in the status bar of this session.
Use
Partner
2.
Choose the Customizing of local layout pushbutton and select the item Quick Cut and Paste from the menu. An explanation of how to use this function appears in the status bar.
Internal
a)
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
32
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Personalizing the User Interface
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use the various options for personalizing the SAP system
Related Information •
You can find additional information in the online documentation, in the Getting Started section.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
33
Unit Summary
PLM400
Unit Summary
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
You should now be able to: • Log on to the system successfully • Name and use elements of a SAP GUI screen • Use various methods to call SAP system functions • Describe the standard menus System and Help. • Use the basic functions of the F1 help • Use the F4 help • Display the information in the online documentation • Use the various options for personalizing the SAP system
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
34
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
You can only work in one window (session) at a time in an SAP system. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Only
Which of the following statements accurately describe a client in an SAP system? Choose the correct answer(s).
3.
A B C D
A client represents a completely independent business entity. A client has its own database. A client corresponds to a customer. A client may represent an entire company.
The following strings are valid entries in the command field:
Use
Partner
□ □ □ □
Choose the correct answer(s).
SAP Use
/nend /nex ?SM04 /nsm04 From SAP Easy Access: SM04 From SAP Easy Access: search_sap_menu
Partner
4.
A B C D E F
SAP
□ □ □ □ □ □
You can use the F1 key to:
2005/Q2
A B C D E
Display an explanation of a field’s uses Display a list of possible input values Change your user data (for example, the logon language) End the session you are in Display detailed technical information on a field
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Only
Internal
Choose the correct answer(s).
□ □ □ □ □
Internal
2.
True False
35
Test Your Knowledge
5.
PLM400
You can use the F4 key to: Choose the correct answer(s).
6.
A B C D E
Start another session Display detailed technical information on a program Call the SAP Library Display possible entries for an input field Create a print request of the screen currently displayed
Internal
Only
□ □ □ □ □
You can also call the context-sensitive SAP Library using the F1 key. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
7.
True False
The following personalization options are available in the SAP GUI:
Use
□
F
You can change the font size (within limits) in the SAP GUI You can have system messages displayed in a dialog box You can change the size of input fields You can suppress the display of pictures in the SAP GUI Every user can display a picture of their choice on the SAP Easy Access screen You can use a personal input history on your front end
Only
Internal
A B C D E
Partner
□ □ □ □ □
SAP
SAP
Choose the correct answer(s).
Use
Partner
□ □
36
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Answers 1.
You can only work in one window (session) at a time in an SAP system. Answer: False You can work in up to 6 windows (sessions) simultaneously per logon.
Only
Which of the following statements accurately describe a client in an SAP system? Answer: A, D
3.
Use
Partner
The data for all clients in an SAP system is stored within a single common database. This data is nevertheless divided by client so that different companies can be administered and controlled in different clients. A client is not a customer within an SAP system. The following strings are valid entries in the command field: Answer: A, B, D, E, F
SAP Use Internal
Answer: A, E The F1 help provides documentation and technical information on a field.
Only
5.
You can use the F4 key to: Answer: D The F4 key provides a list of possible entries for a selected field.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
You can use the F1 key to:
SAP
You can enter valid transaction codes directly on the SAP Easy Access screen. If you are in another function, you need to enter /n in front of the transaction code. /nend and /nex are two different logoff options. ?SM04 is not a valid entry. search_sap_menu is a valid entry; it creates a search screen for entries in the SAP menu. 4.
Internal
2.
37
Test Your Knowledge
6.
PLM400
You can also call the context-sensitive SAP Library using the F1 key. Answer: True You can call the context-sensitive help using the Application Help pushbutton in the F1 help window.
7.
The following personalization options are available in the SAP GUI:
Only
Use
Partner
Numerous personalization options are available, using the Extras menu, the Customizing of local layout pushbutton, the status bar and Help → Settings.... End users cannot, however, change the size of input fields. You also cannot use the SAP GUI to display a picture of your choice on the SAP Easy Access screen.
Internal
Answer: A, B, D, F
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
38
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 2 Unit Overview
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP Use
Lesson: Overview of Processes and Available Solutions ...................... 40 Lesson: Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio.......... 54 Exercise 5: Basics............................................................... 65
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
39
Only
Internal
Unit Contents
Partner
• •
Understand the basics of the EDP-based QM system Describe the contributions QM makes to the life cycle of a product Describe the software solutions provided by SAP and, in particular, the solutions and functional areas of quality management Describe the functions of mySAP PLM Quality Management Explain the structure of the QM menu and carry out a material analysis using the QM information system
SAP
• • •
Use
Partner
This unit describes the most important QM functions and explains how these functions can be used in an enterprise. You also learn about the basic structure of mySAP PLM Quality Management and about the tasks of each of the individual areas.
Internal
Only
Basics
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Processes and Available Solutions Lesson Overview In his lesson, the QM functions and their importance for your company are introduced.
Lesson Objectives Understand the basics of the EDP-based QM system Describe the contributions QM makes to the life cycle of a product Describe the software solutions provided by SAP and, in particular, the solutions and functional areas of quality management
Business Example
SAP
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
EDP-Based Quality Management
SAP
When you implement a quality management system, you should consider the following: The persons involved in management, quality management, and IT have an interdepartmental discussion about the possibility of reconciling the company objectives with a software solution that meets the market's quality requirements. The SAP system supports the elements of a QM system in accordance with DIN EN ISO 9000.
Use
Partner
• • •
Internal
Only
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Figure 13: EDP-Based Quality Management
40
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Processes and Available Solutions
When you implement a quality management system, you should consider the following: • • •
Market requirements for quality management in your company Business processes in your company Data processing support for the integration of QM functions in other applications
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 14: Requirements for QM Systems
Use
• • •
VDA (Federation of the German Motor Industry) FDA (US Food and Drug Administration) GMP (Good Manufacturing Practices)
Only
Internal
Different demands are placed on a company's QM System, depending on the industry sector involved, for example:
The standards for QM systems must also be taken into consideration; for example: • •
2005/Q2
ISO 9000 QS 9000
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
Total Quality Management (TQM) represents the goal of a comprehensive quality management process in your company.
41
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 15: Contributions of Quality Management
SAP
The interaction of quality management in these processes must be supported by an EDP system.
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
The quality loop according to ISO 9004 illustrates that you can use quality management information provided by QM, (for example from inspections) to perform corrective tasks, if required.
SAP
From the planning and implementation stages of a product's life cycle, to its marketing and use, quality management plays a part in all processes in the logistics supply chain.
42
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Processes and Available Solutions
Quality Management with the SAP Solution Portfolio
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 16: Quality Management with the SAP Solution Portfolio
We differentiate between the following SAP solutions:
SAP
•
• •
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
43
Only
Internal
•
Partner
Use
•
mySAP SCM Planning supports procurement and production planning. my SAP SCM Procurement covers materials management from purchasing, through stock control, to invoice verification. mySAP SCM Production supports make-to-stock production and make-to-order production. mySAP SCM Sales and Distribution Processes deals mainly with business processes in the pre-sales activities and up until the customer's payment is received. My SAP Business Intelligence offers a framework easy-to-interpret and easy-to-use key figures for business decisions. mySAP Financials Controlling supports Accounting and Controlling. mySAP PLM Plant Maintenance (Asset Lifecycle Management) supports the maintenance of equipments and assets.
SAP
• •
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
mySAP PLM Quality Management is included in the following processes: • • •
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
•
mySAP SCM Planning: Integration of QM activities in work planning and procurement planning. mySAP SCM Procurement: Release of vendors, goods receipt inspections, complaints against the vendor. mySAP SCM Production: Inspections during production, end of production checks. mySAP SCM Sales and Distribution Processes: Customer-specific inspection requests, goods issue inspections, customer complaints
SAP
SAP
Use
Quality management:
• •
Uses basic and cross-application functions in the system (for example, Classification System, Document Management System, office functions and Workflow) Is integrated in the processes of the logistics supply chain Provides functions for quality planning, quality inspection and quality control – – –
44
Quality planning: Sampling procedures, dynamic modification rules, inspection plans, ... Quality inspection: GR inspections, inspections during production, ... Quality control: Evaluations, control charts, histograms, quality level, ...
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Partner
Figure 17: QM as a Strategic Management Tool
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Processes and Available Solutions
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
As a result of this integration, you can access general cross-application and support functions in the SAP System from within QM: Basic Functions:
•
Supporting Functions: – – – –
2005/Q2
SAP Business Workflow (activates predefined processes and activities) SAPoffice
Engineering change management (for example for documents, drawings, inspection plans and so on) Document Management System (for example, technical delivery terms, quality assurance agreements) Classification System (for example, batches, class characteristics) Information systems (QMIS, LIS, SAP Business Information Warehouse [SAP®BW])
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
45
Only
Internal
– –
Partner
•
SAP
The QM application component is integrated in the SAP System and uses the supporting functions of the system.
Use
Figure 18: Quality Management in the SAP System
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 19: Managing QM Documents with SAP
SAP
Advantages of using the Document Management System (DMS):
Use
SAPoffice provides another alternative for managing the quality manual and related documents. • • •
You can create any number of structures in the SAPoffice general folders. Access is controlled at folder level. Which users are authorized to change data? Which users only have authorization to display data? The actual content can be managed using SAPscript or any office documents. If you create documents using Office products and archive them in the SAP system, individual users must have a viewer to display the documents on the front-end.
46
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Status management and authorization concept (for example, for different document types and statuses) Flexible management of different document types and classification of documents
Partner
•
SAP
The SAP System provides different options for managing QM-specific documents (for example, the QM manual or documented procedures) centrally. An advantage of this includes a universal archiving concept and central access for all SAP users.
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Processes and Available Solutions
SAP's Solution Portfolio SAP's solution portfolio covers the entire life cycle of a product, as well as the individual processes that are relevant to QM and are a part of this life cycle. SAP provides cross-industry solutions and industry-specific solutions for the process-oriented representation of business transactions. A solution contains a combination of application and technology components geared towards a specific business aim.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal Partner
Use
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Figure 20: Overview of the Solution Portfolio
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
47
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 21: mySAP ERP and Netweaver
SAP Use
Only
Internal
Partner
SAP Netweaver provides a portal infrastructure, a mobile infrastructure for connecting mobile devices, and exchange infrastructure (XI) for connecting processes, as well as Master Data Management (MDM).
SAP
From a technological viewpoint, mySAP ERP, unlike R/3, is based on SAP Netweaver and is embedded in an open and flexible Enterprise Services Architecture (ESA), which can connect SAP and non-SAP applications using Web Services, thereby protecting existing IT investments.
Use
mySAP Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) is the successor of SAP R/3. From an application viewpoint, mySAP ERP covers all areas of a company, such as accounting, human resources management, logistics, as well as corporate services like real estate management, travel management, and strategic enterprise planning.
48
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Processes and Available Solutions
SAP
The “solution map” shows the functional areas of the mySAP ERP solution. Quality Management can be found in the Operations: Support area.
Use
Only
Internal
Quality management in the broader sense denotes all QM-relevant processes (quality planning, quality inspections, quality certificates, quality notifications, quality control, test equipment management, stability studies).
Partner
Quality management as a functional area of mySAP ERP represents quality management processes using mySAP ERP and SAP Netweaver functionality.
SAP
mySAP ERP contains the complete SAP R/3 functionality, but in many areas it has added functionality.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 22: mySAP ERP und SAP R/3 Enterprise
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
49
PLM400
Apart from the application and technological view, there is also a licensing view. Customers can purchase different SAP solutions based on the size and focus of their companies. These solutions provide a varying mix of applications and technology.
SAP
The functional area quality management is part of mySAP PLM.
SAP
For example, in addition to mySAP ERP, the complete solution, it is also possible to purchase the solution mySAP Product Lifecycle Management (PLM), which focuses on product development and line operations.
Use
Partner
Figure 23: mySAP ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning)
Internal
Only
Unit 2: Basics
The following graphic shows the different phases in the life cycle of a product from the product manufacturers point of view, whilst also regarding the process chains of Supply Chain Management (SCM) and Customer Relationship Management (CRM).
50
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 24: mySAP PLM (Product Lifecycle Management)
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Processes and Available Solutions
Partner
Only
Internal Use
Figure 25: Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)
Quality management exerts influence on the entire life cycle of a product.
SAP Use
Only
Internal
In this context, the software that supports these processes plays an important role. The optimization of the processes goes hand-in-hand with the permanent optimization of the software. At the same time, the software must comply with shorter innovation cycles. This often results in terminology changes. Terminology may be changed, renewed, or revised for a variety of reasons.
Partner
The current situation in the quality management area is characterized by ever increasing demands on performance, availability, and profitability. Different strategies and procedures are used to optimize these factors.
SAP
History and Terms
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
51
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
For this reason, we now take a brief look at the history of software development in the quality management area and the terms that developed. The following development steps can be traced: 1.
SAP R/3 •
2.
Quality Management module (QM): Planned and event-controlled processes in quality management. mySAP Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)
Only
3.
Quality Management (QM)
4.
mySAP Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) SAP solution for controlling and planning the core areas of an enterprise (accounting, human resources management, logistics, corporate services, real estate management, travel management, and strategic enterprise planning.
SAP
Quality Management
SAP
5.
Functional area of mySAP ERP for quality management. 6.
Quality Management (in the broader sense)
Use
This list shows the progression from area and module-oriented thinking to the consideration of entire processes and complete life cycles, as well as cross-system life cycles.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
The entire life cycle of a product can be achieved by combining the relevant functional areas of mySAP ERP.
Partner
Entirety of all QM-relevant processes for a product (quality planning, quality inspection, quality certificate, quality notification, quality control, test equipment management, stability study).
52
Use
Partner
Functional area of mySAP PLM, encompassing quality engineering, quality improvement, and quality assurance and control.
Internal
SAP solution that considers the life cycle of a product and the associated data. It encompasses development, operation, shutdown, and disposal.
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Processes and Available Solutions
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the basics of the EDP-based QM system • Describe the contributions QM makes to the life cycle of a product • Describe the software solutions provided by SAP and, in particular, the solutions and functional areas of quality management
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
53
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio Lesson Overview The basic functions of mySAP PLM Quality Management are introduced in this lesson.
Only
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the functions of mySAP PLM Quality Management Explain the structure of the QM menu and carry out a material analysis using the QM information system
Business Example You want to learn about the basic functions of mySAP PLM Quality Management.
SAP
SAP
Functions in the Quality Management Area
Use
Partner
• •
Internal
Lesson Objectives
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 26: Quality Management Functions
54
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio
The functions of the QM area cover the classic quality management tasks such as quality planning, quality inspection, and quality control, as well as supplementary functions.
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 27: Quality Planning: Activities
Use
•
•
General master data (for example, material master, batch data, vendor master records) QM specific master data (for example, master inspection characteristics, inspection methods, sampling procedures) Inspection planning functions (for example, inspection plan, material specification)
Partner
•
Internal
You use quality planning for the following:
Only
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
55
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 28: Quality Inspection: Activities
Quality inspection covers the following functions:
SAP Use
Only
Internal
Partner
Inspection lot processing (from creation to completion) Results recording Defects recording Sample management Interfaces to subsystems (such as QM-IDI, measurement data transfer by using a keyboard wedge)
SAP
• • • • •
56
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio
SAP
You can create the following certificates:
Use
Certificate of conformity Works test certificate Certificate of analysis etc.
Only
Internal
Quality certificates can, for example, be used for goods receipts and for goods issues.
Partner
• • • •
SAP
The quality certificates function allows you to create and monitor certificates to confirm the quality of a product. You can send quality certificates over the Internet.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 29: Quality Certificates: Activities
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
57
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 30: Quality Notifications: Activities
SAP Use Internal
Defect analysis Documentation Priority Entry of the partner concerned Costs recording etc.
Partner
• • • • • •
Examples of quality notifications:
58
Complaint against a vendor Customer complaint Internal problem notification Notification concerning problems in production
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Only
• • • •
SAP
The quality notifications function covers the recording and processing of quality problems (internal or external) and includes:
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 31: Quality Control: Activities
SAP
Only
Internal
Use
Dynamic modification of the inspection scope Statistical process control (SPC; control charts, results history) Quality scores (cp value, cpk value) Vendor evaluation Quality-related costs Evaluations
Partner
• • • • • •
SAP
Quality control covers the following functions:
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
59
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 32: Test Equipment Management: Activities
The test equipment management function covers:
SAP Use
Only
Internal
Test equipment management uses functions from the plant maintenance area.
Partner
Creation and management of test equipment master data Calibration planning functions (for example, definition of calibration cycles) Calibration inspection functions (for example, inspection specifications) Calibration inspection processing Test equipment tracking
SAP
• • • • •
60
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 33: Stability Study Tasks
The stability study function covers:
SAP
•
Use Internal
•
•
Partner
•
Creation and management of basic data (material, batch, bills of material, inspection characteristics, catalogs) Functions for planning of stability studies (for example, testing schedule, inspection strategies, scheduling) Functions for the execution of stability studies (for example, inspection specifications) Functions for the processing of stability studies (for example, create initial sample, execute initial test, define storage conditions, scheduling, execute stability tests, remove stability samples from storage) Stability history
SAP
•
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Only
The stability study function uses functions from the plant maintenance area.
61
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 34: QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
SAP
•
Use
• • •
62
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Partner
• • •
Processing inspections: For example at goods receipt, during production and at goods issue Checking test equipment throughout the logistics supply chain Processing physical samples in the process industry Recording and processing problems in the logistics supply chain with the help of quality notifications Creating certificates to verify product quality from the procurement to the sales and distribution stage Recording quality-related costs in procurement, production and sales and distribution using QM orders Statistical process control with the help of control charts and the results history Analyzing and evaluating quality data.
SAP
The individual QM functions are active throughout a company's logistics supply chain.
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 35: Uses and Benefits of the QM Component
SAP
• •
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
• • • •
QM integration in the overall concept of the SAP system Access to data that has already been maintained (such as customer master, vendor master) Standardization of processes Automation of the information flow (using the Workflow) Planning support (for example provision of inspection plans) Process improvement (for example by monitoring processes and implementing corrective tasks in quality notifications)
SAP
QM provides advantages for your company at various levels, for example through:
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
63
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
64
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio
Exercise 5: Basics Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Describe the central functions in logistics and their use in QM • Evaluate QM-relevant data using the information system
Only Partner
Within the logistics applications, you need central functions that you can use for different areas, for example, materials management, production, or quality management. You also want to evaluate QM-relevant data according to certain criteria at the end of the month.
Use
Task 1: Central functions 1.
Make a note of functions that support QM within the SAP system.
SAP
SAP
____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
Use
Partner
____________________________________________________________ 2.
Which menu paths do you use to access these functions?
Task 2: Material Analysis and SAPoffice At the end of the month, you need an overview of the quality scores for materials. Create this material analysis for the inspection lots using the SAP Information System. Which menu path do you use to access this material analysis? ____________________________________________________________ Analyze the data and create a graphic with the materials and quality scores. Send this graphic to another group (user PLM400-##).
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
65
Only
Internal
____________________________________________________________
1.
Internal
Business Example
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Solution 5: Basics Task 1: Central functions 1.
Make a note of functions that support QM within the SAP system. ____________________________________________________________
Only
____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ SAP Menu → Logistics → Central Functions
SAP
2.
Notification Variant configuration Batch valuation Handling Unit Management Document management Engineering Mass maintenance
SAP
• • • • • • •
Use
Partner
a)
Which menu paths do you use to access these functions?
Use
SAP Menu → Cross-Application Components ALE distribution units Classification system Engineering change management
Task 2: Material Analysis and SAPoffice At the end of the month, you need an overview of the quality scores for materials. Create this material analysis for the inspection lots using the SAP Information System. 1.
Which menu path do you use to access this material analysis? ____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
66
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
• • •
Partner
____________________________________________________________ a)
Internal
____________________________________________________________
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio
Analyze the data and create a graphic with the materials and quality scores. Send this graphic to another group (user PLM400-##). a)
Information Systems→ Logistics → Quality Management → Key Figures → Material → Inspection Lots → Quality Scores (MCXE) On the selection screen Material Analysis: Quality Scores: Selection, you can define the characteristics for analysis (material, inspection type, plant) and the analysis period.
Only
Values
Plant
1000
Month
Keep default values
Start the analysis by choosing the pushbutton Execute or the F8 function key.
SAP Use
You can send the graphic to another user in the system. To do this, choose Graphic → Send in the graphic. The screen Send documents appears. Enter the following data:
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
67
Only
Internal
Hint: In the graphic, a maximum of 6 key figures can be displayed simultaneously. If necessary, select the key figures that should be displayed in the graphic.
Partner
You can display the other characteristics for analysis by double clicking on a row below the sum in the characteristic column. You can display the graphic by choosing the pushbutton Graphic or the F5 function key.
SAP
The basic list appears for the material analysis of the quality scores. The first column of the basic list displays the characteristic, the other columns display the key figures for the characteristic.
Use
Partner
Field name or data type
Internal
Perform the material analysis for the following data:
Unit 2: Basics
PLM400
Field name or data type
Values
Recipient
PLM400-##
By choosing the pushbutton Send, the graphic is sent to the recipient. Close the SAP presentation graphic or exit the graphic by choosing the F3 function button.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
68
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Management as Part of the SAP Solution Portfolio
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the functions of mySAP PLM Quality Management • Explain the structure of the QM menu and carry out a material analysis using the QM information system
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
69
Unit Summary
PLM400
Unit Summary
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
You should now be able to: • Understand the basics of the EDP-based QM system • Describe the contributions QM makes to the life cycle of a product • Describe the software solutions provided by SAP and, in particular, the solutions and functional areas of quality management • Describe the functions of mySAP PLM Quality Management • Explain the structure of the QM menu and carry out a material analysis using the QM information system
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
70
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
When implementing QM, only the business processes in a company must be examined. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
2.
True False
Quality management can be used throughout the whole life cycle of a product. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Partner
□ □ 3.
True False
QM is integrated in the processes of the logistics supply chain.
4.
True False
SAP
SAP
□ □
Use
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Only internal problems can be processed using quality notifications. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Use
5.
True False
Partner
□ □
Physical samples can only be processed in production.
6.
True False
Only
Internal
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Quality planning tasks include: Choose the correct answer(s).
□ □ □ □
2005/Q2
A B C D
Processing of inspection plans Processing of master recipes Management of the material stocks to be inspected Processing of inspection methods
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Internal
Only
□ □
71
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
When implementing QM, only the business processes in a company must be examined. Answer: False
2.
Quality management can be used throughout the whole life cycle of a product. Answer: True
3.
Use
Partner
The example of the quality loop shows that QM can be used throughout the entire life cycle of a product. QM is integrated in the processes of the logistics supply chain. Answer: True
Physical samples can only be processed in production.
SAP
Answer: False Physical samples can also be processed at goods receipt, at goods issue, and for the inspection of external products. 6.
Quality planning tasks include: Answer: A, B, D The materials stocks are managed using the inspection lot.
72
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Quality notifications can be used to handle problems in all processes along the supply chain.
Partner
Use
Only internal problems can be processed using quality notifications. Answer: False
5.
SAP
Due to the integration of QM with the logistics supply chain, inspections can be triggered automatically. 4.
Internal
Only
In addition to the business processes, standards requirements must also be taken into consideration for implementation.
Unit 3 Only
Unit Overview
Partner
This unit examines the whole logistics supply chain from a QM perspective and uses examples to illustrate how quality management can be used for certain processes.
Use
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
Use
Unit Contents
Only
Internal
Lesson: QM in Company Processes .............................................. 74 Lesson: QM Processes in the Logistics Supply Chain.......................... 85 Exercise 6: Processes in Quality Management ............................. 89
Partner
• • •
Understand the use of quality management in the different processes within a company. Explain the possible uses of quality management for your company. Describe the planned processes in QM Describe the event-triggered processes in QM
SAP
SAP
•
Internal
Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
73
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
PLM400
Lesson: QM in Company Processes Lesson Overview Company processes, from the sales order to customer service, are covered in this lesson. Quality management can be integrated in all areas of the logistics supply chain.
Lesson Objectives
Only
•
Partner
•
Understand the use of quality management in the different processes within a company. Explain the possible uses of quality management for your company.
Business Example
SAP Use Internal
•
– Which products cause problems? Salesman:
•
– How many complaints are there? Buyer:
•
– How do I choose a suitable vendor? QM Project Manager:
•
– How can we guarantee the quality across all departments? SAP consultant: –
Partner
Production Manager:
SAP
•
Use
A panel in the company is discussing the options for using the QM functions.
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Lets look at QM in the logistics supply chain
Only
74
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM in Company Processes
QM in Company Processes
Partner
Only
Internal Use
Figure 36: Processes in the Company
Different departments in a company process a product throughout its life cycle.
SAP Use
Only
Internal
The integration of QM in the SAP business processes allows you to process inspections (such as, goods receipt inspections, inspections during production or inspections for stock transfers and delivery), and to record data relating to product quality (such as, management of customer specifications for a product or inspection results) throughout the logistics supply chain.
Partner
The integration of the quality management processes and the exchange of information between individual areas within the company form the basis for achieving customer satisfaction.
SAP
The procedures differ depending on the production process (for example, production operations that are processed externally).
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
75
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
PLM400
The QM component can be integrated in all areas of the logistics supply chain. Prerequisite for this is that you make the relevant Customizing settings in QM.
SAP
Examples of the influence of quality management in the logistics supply chain:
Use
•
• • • •
76
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Sales and distribution: Creation of customer-specific inspection specifications (1) Material requirements planning: Availability of production resources and tools (PRTs) (2) Production: Inspections during production (with integrated reference operation sets and inspection operations in the routing or master recipe) (3) Materials management: Goods receipt inspections, vendor evaluation and inspection stock (4) Stockholding: Inspection of stock transfers, stock monitoring (for example, of shelf-life) (5, 6) Shipping: Inspection for delivery (7) Service: Use of quality notifications (for example, to process complaints) (8)
Partner
•
SAP
If QM is in use in your company and you identify poor-quality goods or services, you can suspend a process until the problem is resolved.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 37: QM in Company Processes
PLM400
Lesson: QM in Company Processes
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 38: QM in Sales & Distribution (Sales Order)
SAP Use
Partner
On the basis of the sales order, you can also include customer-specific inspection specifications.
SAP
You can store quality-relevant information for the customer/material combination (customer information record). This information can then control QM activities in sales and distribution (such as, goods movements, creating certificates and so on).
Only
Internal
For batch determination, the system can access the recorded inspection results.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
77
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
PLM400
SAP Use
Only
Internal
In the MRP list, you can display planned inward goods movements from inspection stock.
Partner
If the functions for test equipment management are active, you can use them to control the release of production resources and tools.
SAP
During production planning, you plan the inspection-relevant operations. These operations are taken into account for material requirements planning. The duration of the inspection of a material can thereby be considered in requirements planning. The material is ready for production on time.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 39: QM in Production (Materials Planning)
78
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM in Company Processes
SAP Use
Control charts Histograms Key figures for process capability
The quality notification allows you to document and process any problems that occur. For example, quality notifications can be created automatically, if during an inspection you identify that the specification limit has been exceeded. The posting of a yield from a goods receipt to the warehouse can be automated (control key in the operation, automatic milestone confirmation and backflushing). In addition, when goods are received in the warehouse, stock-relevant inspection lots can be created. During the course of a quality inspection, you can split materials into batches and partial lots and you can define inspection points.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
79
Only
Internal
• • •
Partner
The QM component provides various statistical and graphical procedures for statistical process control (SPC), such as:
SAP
By integrating the QM component in the production process, you can monitor and document the quality of goods as they are produced. When a production or process order is released, an inspection lot is created automatically for an inspection during production.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 40: QM in Production
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
PLM400
SAP Use
Vendor evaluation, invoice block Vendor release Certification monitoring (QM system valid until...)
If necessary, you can block the delivery of goods from a vendor as a result of the GR inspection results. The quality information record procurement controls whether a source inspection or a goods issue inspection takes place for the vendor's goods. If a source inspection takes place, there is no GR inspection. If the vendor has a QM system, this information is also stored in the vendor master record (screen “Control”). As a customer, you define your requirements for the vendor's QM system in the material master. If a certificate is to be sent with the delivery, this information is stored in the material master.
80
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
The QM data recorded in procurement for a goods receipt provides the purchasing department with the required information to evaluate vendors. This information includes the results of the goods receipt inspection, complaints about the goods, and audit results.
Partner
• • •
SAP
You require externally supplied materials to produce certain goods. If QM is active in procurement, you can use quality-related vendor/material information to control the supply relationships, for example:
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 41: QM in Procurement
PLM400
Lesson: QM in Company Processes
Complaints (complaints against a vendor) are processed using quality notifications.
SAP
For a goods receipt from production into the warehouse (inspection lot origin 04), you can carry out a goods receipt inspection and subsequently release the goods.
SAP
Following a stock transfer within the company (for example, a goods movement between plants or warehouses), you can use the QM functions to inspect the goods according to the required characteristics.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 42: QM in the Storage Process (1)
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
81
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
PLM400
QM allows you to plan and implement the monitoring of deadlines for batches of materials (for example, for goods with a shelf-life expiration date).
SAP
SAP
You define the inspections that are to take place for a material in the material master.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 43: QM in the Storage Process (2)
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 44: QM in Shipping
82
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM in Company Processes
When goods are delivered, characteristics (for example, those specified in the sales order) are inspected. These values, (for example, that have been specified in the variant configuration) can also be copied into the production order and used as inspection specifications. If required, you can create quality certificates that contain data for the finished product or for materials in the production chain. Customer complaints can be recorded and processed using quality notifications.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Use
In the mySAP PLM solution, the SAP system provides additional service management functions.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
83
Only
If goods are returned, you can inspect them and then analyze and document any defects and take appropriate corrective action.
You can record customer complaints in quality notifications and pass them on to the responsible department for further processing.
Partner
Internal
SAP
SAP
Figure 45: QM in Service
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the use of quality management in the different processes within a company. • Explain the possible uses of quality management for your company.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
84
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Processes in the Logistics Supply Chain
Lesson: QM Processes in the Logistics Supply Chain Lesson Overview This lesson gives you an overview of the different QM processes in the logistics supply chain.
Only
Describe the planned processes in QM Describe the event-triggered processes in QM
SAP
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
QM Processes in the Logistics Supply Chain
SAP
The processes for documenting QM-relevant data for a product may differ between companies. A variety of standard processes (for example, inspections at goods receipts or in production) are subject to planning activities and must be carried out on a regular basis. Unexpected problems and defects must also be recorded and processed in an appropriate manner. Depending on the specifications involved, inspections can be planned in advance and the results (in the form of measured values, for example) can be documented.
Use
Business Example
• •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
Lesson Objectives
Figure 46: QM Processes in the Logistics Supply Chain
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
85
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
PLM400
QM processes can be triggered by different events. Standard processes (for example, inspections during production, goods receipt inspections) are planned in advance and are triggered regularly. Event-controlled processes occur spontaneously (such as defects in production, damaged goods at goods receipt); the problems that occur can be recorded and processed in a quality notification.
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
In addition, you can monitor critical values using the information system and if necessary, trigger tasks via the Workflow. The data collected in planned and event-controlled processes (such as, the number of complaints) is evaluated in the information system.
Internal
Triggers can include: • • • •
Goods movements (goods receipt, stock transfer, goods issue) Orders (production orders, maintenance orders, delivery) Deadline monitoring (batch monitoring) Source inspections
The inspection lot forms the basis for inspection processing. It contains all the data for the inspection (such as material, order, inspection specifications, inspection lot size, quantity to be inspected or if required QM order).
86
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
An inspection can be triggered at different stages in the logistics supply chain. This leads to the creation of an inspection lot.
Partner
Use
SAP
SAP
Figure 47: Planned Processes
PLM400
Lesson: QM Processes in the Logistics Supply Chain
You record inspection results for this inspection lot. The usage decision specifies whether the goods are accepted or rejected, based on the results of the inspection.
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 48: Event-Controlled Processes
Use
Partner
In addition to the standard processes, there are event-controlled processes in the logistics supply chain, which are triggered when problems occur. You record, analyze and document these problems in quality notifications and forward them to the departments responsible for further processing.
Only
Internal
You can define follow-up actions that help resolve problems quickly.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
87
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
PLM400
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 49: Information Management
SAP Use
If the predefined critical tolerances are exceeded, the system can automatically trigger follow-up actions (for example, sending a message to the Production Manager).
Only
Internal
You can compare the data with preplanned scores. You can also define your own analyses based on characteristics and scores.
Partner
The monitoring process is supported by different types of analyses (for example, trends, threshold values, and so on).
SAP
The data in the Information System is updated continuously with results of the standard and event-controlled processes.
Use
The Early Warning System (EWS) in the Quality Information System (QMIS) allows you to monitor critical values. If, for example, the quality score drops below the specification limit of 70, a Workflow is automatically triggered.
88
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Processes in the Logistics Supply Chain
Exercise 6: Processes in Quality Management Exercise Objectives
Only
Business Example
Partner
Use
You want to implement Quality Management in your company. During project preparation, you want to analyze the use of QM in the logistics supply chain. You use the demo examples (for example, processes in the model company IDES) to understand the process flow of a quality inspection.
Task 1:
SAP
SAP
Integration of QM in the Processes of a Company 1.
Integration of QM in the Processes of a Company ____________________________________________________________
Use
Partner
____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
Task 2:
Internal
Internal
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Describe the use of quality management on the basis of the logistics supply chain • Print the specifications for the process flow of the quality inspection on the inspection instruction
Shop Papers for Quality Inspection Inspection lots already exist in the system. Display the inspection lot data record for your material T-BQ1##. Note the inspection lot number and print the inspection instruction for the inspection lot. Display the inspection instruction in the print spool. Inspection lot number:________________________________________________
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
89
Only
1.
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
PLM400
Solution 6: Processes in Quality Management Task 1: Integration of QM in the Processes of a Company 1.
Integration of QM in the Processes of a Company
Only
____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ a)
Examples of where Quality Management is used in the logistical processes of a company:
SAP
Goods receipt inspection, source inspection Inspection during production Inspection for stock transfer Goods issue inspection at delivery Returns inspection at return delivery Processing of problem messages
SAP
• • • • • •
Use
Partner
____________________________________________________________
Use
Shop Papers for Quality Inspection
Internal
Inspection lot number:________________________________________________ a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Editing → Display (QA03) The screen Display Inspection Lot: Initial Screen appears. Use the field-related input help (F4 help) to select your inspection lot.
Continued on next page
90
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Inspection lots already exist in the system. Display the inspection lot data record for your material T-BQ1##. Note the inspection lot number and print the inspection instruction for the inspection lot. Display the inspection instruction in the print spool.
Partner
Task 2: 1.
Internal
____________________________________________________________
PLM400
Lesson: QM Processes in the Logistics Supply Chain
Field name or data type
Values
Material
T-BQ1##
Plant
1000
Partner
Exit the selection screen by using the return key. The system displays an overview of the selected inspection lots. You double-click on the inspection lot number to copy this number to the field Inspection lot on the initial screen. After choosing enter, the inspection lot data record appears.
SAP
Hint: You can also automatically create the inspection instruction and print it on a certain printer by making specific system settings. If you manually create the inspection instruction, it is printed after you leave the transaction.
Partner
Use
By choosing the pushbutton Inspection instruction, you can print this in the print spool. Exit the transaction by choosing the F3 function key.
SAP
Internal
Use
The inspection lot data record contains general data, for example, the inspection type or system status. On the single tab pages, there is specialized data for the inspection lot, for example, the inspection lot quantities or inspection specifications.
Internal
Only
You can limit the value range for the search help to certain criteria. Limit the value range using the material. Enter the following data on the tab page Material:
Display the Inspection Instruction System → Own spool requests (SP02)
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
91
Only
An overview of the spool requests is displayed in a second session. Select the spool request and display it by choosing the pushbutton Display contents or the F6 function key.
Unit 3: Overview of QM in the Logistics Supply Chain
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the planned processes in QM • Describe the event-triggered processes in QM
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
92
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Unit Summary
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the use of quality management in the different processes within a company. • Explain the possible uses of quality management for your company. • Describe the planned processes in QM • Describe the event-triggered processes in QM
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
93
Unit Summary
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
94
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
Customer-specific inspection specifications can be copied from the sales order. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Only
If you procure materials externally, you can only use a goods receipt inspection. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Partner
□ □ 3.
True False
Quality certificates can only be used when issuing goods.
Internal
2.
True False
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
SAP
True False
A goods movement can trigger the automatic creation of an inspection lot.
SAP
4.
Use
□ □
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Use
5.
True False
The Early Warning System can be used to monitor critical values (for example, quality scores).
Internal
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
True False
Partner
□ □
Only
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
95
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
Customer-specific inspection specifications can be copied from the sales order. Answer: True
2.
If you procure materials externally, you can only use a goods receipt inspection. Answer: False
Partner
4.
Quality certificates can only be used when issuing goods.
Use
3.
SAP
It is also possible to perform a source inspection at the vendor's as an alternative to a goods receipt inspection.
Internal
Only
If the corresponding settings are made in the material, inspection specifications can be copied from the sales order.
Answer: False Quality certificates can also be used at goods receipt.
SAP
A goods movement can trigger the automatic creation of an inspection lot.
If the corresponding settings have been made in the material, inspection lots will be automatically created for goods movements. The Early Warning System can be used to monitor critical values (for example, quality scores). Answer: True The Early Warning System can be used to monitor certain key figures in QM in periodical processes.
96
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
5.
Partner
Use
Answer: True
Unit 4 Unit Overview
Partner
This unit explains the tasks of quality management in the procurement process. The unit focuses on QM-specific processes in external procurement, such as, vendor release, certificate processing, and inventory management. Examples are used to show the key processes in the system.
Use
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP
Understand the procurement processes from a quality management standpoint Explain inspection and certificate processing at goods receipt Make use of the quality info record in procurement
Use
Only
Internal
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement ................................................ 98 Exercise 7: QM in Procurement .............................................. 109
Partner
Unit Contents
SAP
• • •
Internal
Only
Quality Management in Procurement
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
97
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement Lesson Overview This lesson explains the tasks of QM in the procurement area. The process flow with the use of QM is explained from the order to storage of the goods.
Lesson Objectives
Only
Understand the procurement processes from a quality management standpoint Explain inspection and certificate processing at goods receipt Make use of the quality info record in procurement
Business Example
Partner
SAP
QM in Procurement
Only
Internal
Use
SAP
Only selected vendors is to be used for the external procurement of materials. At goods receipt, the quality certificate is to be checked and samples of the goods are to be inspected. Any defects or problems are to be recorded and the solution is to be documented. The defects or problems documented in this way can then be communicated to the vendor. You can also to make the results of the quality inspection, the documented defects and problems, and the vendor's response available to other departments within your company.
Use
Partner
• • •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Figure 50: QM in Procurement
98
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
In procurement, the QM component has functions for managing, controlling, and processing the following objects, based on: • • •
Material Material and vendor Vendor and manufacturer
QM in Procurement
Only
Use
Partner
• • •
Processes the evaluation, release and selection of vendors (for example, release of a vendor for specific quantities, for a specific period, for a material) Manages quality documents (for example, technical delivery terms) Controls whether a source inspection or a goods receipt inspection is to take place Processes complaints against a vendor
Internal
•
SAP
SAP
Internal
Use
Partner Only
Figure 51: Procurement Chain
QM is integrated in different stages of the procurement chain (when procuring required materials). You define automatic decision-making criteria to ensure that your company receives high-quality goods (for example, vendor evaluation, goods receipt inspection). If, for example, vendors' goods are blocked as a result of poor quality, the system does not propose these vendors and marks them as blocked. In addition, the inspection scope can be controlled using dynamic modification, based on the quality of the delivered goods.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
99
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
The quality information record procurement contains data relating to the vendor release, certificate control, certification and quality assurance agreements. You can use a vendor/manufacturer release to ensure that a vendor only delivers goods from a specific manufacturer. You define a certificate requirement for a material, by using an indicator in the material master.
Partner
• • •
The goods are posted to inspection stock Inspection lots are created at goods receipt The delivery or invoice is to be blocked as a result of a complaint (such as a missing certificate)
Vendor Request and Vendor Selection
Internal
Only
QM at goods receipt controls, for example, whether:
Use
SAP
SAP
The technical delivery terms for a material are stored in the Document Management System (DMS) and can be included in a request for a quotation that you send to the vendor. The technical delivery terms are assigned to the material via the additional data in the material master record. An assignment to the vendor (assigned documents to the creditor) is equally possible. Information relating to QM in procurement is stored in the QM view of the material master and in the quality information record.
100
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 52: Vendor Request for Quotation (RFQ)
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
Internal
Figure 53: Quality Criteria for Vendor Selection
On the basis of the quality information stored about a vendor or manufacturer for a particular material, the purchasing department can draw on quality-related information in addition to the standard criteria (such as price etc.) to select a vendor.
SAP
SAP
Purchase Order and Inspection Processing
Use
Partner
Only
PLM400
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 54: Purchase order
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
101
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
You store the quality-based control information for the combination of vendor or manufacturer and material in the quality information record procurement: • • • • •
Release periods Release quantity Release status type (model, vendor of regular deliveries etc.) Inspection control Certificate processing
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
You can use the quality info record procurement to block a vendor partially or entirely from making a delivery of certain materials.
SAP
SAP
In addition to inspecting the goods upon receipt, you can also have the goods inspected at the vendor's premises and released for delivery to your company. You store the corresponding control and scheduling information in the quality info record procurement. During the source inspection the results recording can take place via the Internet. The goods receipt inspection or source inspection can be triggered, once a purchase order has been issued for the goods and the delivery date has been determined.
102
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 55: Source Inspection
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
Material + vendor or material + vendor + manufacturer
SAP Use
The goods are posted to inspection stock and are released for use or blocked, depending on the inspection results and the usage decision. The transfer posting of the stock occurs automatically when the usage decision is saved. In addition to the basic inspection processing activities, there are various procedures for optimizing the scope and frequency (dynamic modification) of the goods receipt inspections. You can use quality notifications to document any problems that you identify when recording defects or inspection results. You can forward these problems to the relevant departments for further processing.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
103
Only
Internal
•
Partner
If QM in procurement is active for a material, the system checks whether the QM system entered for the vendor in the vendor master record or quality information record procurement is certified and whether this system complies with the QM system requirements that are defined in the material master. If this is the case, no inspection lot is created and the goods are posted directly to the warehouse (skip for certified vendor). The procedure for goods receipts and the inspection skip for certified QM systems is allowed for the combinations:
SAP
When goods are received, an inspection lot (with origin 01) is created for the goods based on the available information (such as quality info record procurement, inspection specifications, current quality level, and so on).
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 56: Processing Inspections at Goods Receipt
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
Automatic payment of an invoice for a delivery can be prevented if the goods are currently being inspected or if the usage decision is a rejection. In Customizing, you can define that automatic follow-up actions (such as sending of a mail) are to be triggered by the usage decision.
Quality Certificates at Goods Receipt
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 57: Quality Certificates at Goods Receipt
Use
Prerequisite for enhanced certificate processing: The indicator Enhanced certificate processing must be set in Customizing for the certificate type. You can send reminders for missing certificates.
104
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
The incoming certificate is filed in the optical archive first as a document, document type. The system sends this information to the inbox of the employee responsible for processing using the Workflow. The document can then be checked and stored as a quality certificate in the optical archive, or assigned to a purchase order.
Partner
You can monitor the receipt of a quality certificate with and without inspection lot processing, independently of the time of goods receipt. You can store the quality certificate in the optical archive.
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
The system supports the following scenarios for certificate receipt: • • • •
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
•
Certificate receipt before goods receipt Certificate receipt with goods receipt Certificate receipt for purchase order item without an inspection lot after goods receipt Certificate receipt for purchase order item with an inspection lot after goods receipt Certificate receipt for purchase order item with inspection lot after the usage decision
SAP
SAP
You can electronically send and receive quality certificates for a delivery. The quality certificate is electronically transferred to the certificate recipient using EDI (Electronic Data Interchange: This is a company-wide electronic means of exchanging data. The data is formatted according to certain standards) The technical transfer can be performed directly using EDI or the Internet. Certificate creation occurs in a similar way to the printing of the certificate for the delivery. The quality certificate is created as a PDF file and packed in an intermediate document (IDoc). During electronic certificate receipt, a certificate record is updated
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
105
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 58: Electronic Certificate Transfer
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
from the incoming IDoc and the quality certificate is stored in the optical archive. As a result, you no longer have to scan the certificate and manually maintain the certificate record.
Only
Use
Partner
Handling Unit Management and QM
Internal
From Release 4.6C, the quality certificate can be electronically transferred with the formatted data. This allows an automatic transfer of results from the certificate to an inspection lot. In addition to outbound deliveries, electronic certificates can also be created for a batch or an inspection lot. This means that the exchange of quality data is not linked to a purchase order or delivery and it makes it easier to use the results of external quality inspections in your own system.
SAP
SAP
You can use Handling Unit Management to depict a type of logistics management that is based on packaging in the SAP System. In this type of logistics, you focus on the movements of handling units (HUs) containing several materials, rather than tracing movements of the individual materials themselves. Basing logistics processes on handling units results in simplified processing of goods movements, which in turn optimizes processes in logistics. Handling units contain all inventory information for the materials that are packed in them, including inventory management information, if the materials are managed with Inventory Management. Status messages, that can be called at any time, indicate whether a handling unit is planned or notified, or if it is in the warehouse or has
106
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 59: Handling Unit Management
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
already been posted as goods issue. Additionally, the integrated history function records every business transaction in the handling unit's life cycle, meaning that any movements or development of the unit can always be monitored and analyzed. Definition: A handling unit is a grouping of physical goods consisting of: • •
Packaging materials (for example, pallets, boxes, vacuum packaging, containers) Goods (that have to be transported and stored, for example)
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
Each handling unit has an identification number on the basis of which information can be read.
Internal
ASN = Advanced Shipping Notification The quantity of goods in inspection stock are not managed by the inspection lot, but rather by the handling unit. Whenever you post a goods movement while processing an inspection lot, the system determines which handling units are currently assigned to the lot and proposes them for the transfer posting.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
107
Only
At goods receipt, you can create inspection lots on the basis of handling units before the goods receipt has even been posted. The inspection stock is managed by the handling unit, not by the inspection lot. This provides greater flexibility when dealing with the stock. Inspection stock is also released on the basis of handling units.
Partner
Use
SAP
SAP
Figure 60: Quality Inspections Using Handling Units
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
Since transfer postings are triggered directly by the handling units, the system always checks whether the postings are allowed. In this way, for example, you can allow transfer postings within inspection stock and block the delivery of handling units in inspection stock to customers. The system can automatically create an inspection lot for a handling unit for the following goods movements or events:
Use
Partner
• •
Packing upon receipt of delivery (inspection lot origin 01, inspection lot origin 05) Packing of finished products during production (inspection lot origin 04) Transfer posting of a handling unit (inspection lot origin 08)
Internal
Only
•
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
108
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
Exercise 7: QM in Procurement Exercise Objectives
Business Example
When required, you record only defects for some materials at goods receipt. As a result, you only need defect codes for these materials and not inspection characteristics. For materials that are procured externally, you always expect the vendor to supply a certificate.
SAP
Task 1:
SAP
The usage decision completes the stock-relevant inspection lots and performs the quantity posting.
Use
Partner
You use Quality Management in your company during procurement. Inspection lots should be automatically created when goods receipts are posted.
Internal
Only
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Process inspection lots in connection with a goods movement during procurement • Record the certificate receipt for a purchase order independent of the goods receipt for the purchase order in the system
Use
Inspection Setup in the Material Master You define the basic settings for the process flow of the quality inspection in the inspection setup of the material master (QM view). Note the most important settings for your material T-BQ4## in plant 1000 for inspection type 05.
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
109
Only
1.
Partner
In addition to goods receipts for the purchase order or order, you can post goods receipts in the SAP System without referring to another document. For such goods receipts, for example at the initial entry of stock balances or during a free delivery, an inspection type for inspection lot origin 05 is used in QM.
Internal
QM at Other Goods Receipts
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
Setting
Indicator Set
Value
Not Set
Post to insp. stock Insp. with mat spec. Insp. with task list Inspection percentage 2.
Posting Another Goods Receipt
Use
Partner
Record a goods receipt for material T-BQ4## with movement type 501 in plant 1000, storage location 0001 without reference to a purchase order. You have received 100 pieces of this material. Note the material document number. ______________________________________________________ Displaying the Inspection Lot An inspection lot was automatically created when the goods receipt was posted. Display this inspection lot and note the stock. Use the material document number to select the inspection lot.
Use
Partner
Stock: Unrestricted use:______________________________ Quality inspection:______________________________
Task 2: Inspection Completion and Stock Posting with the Usage Decision Since you have not detected any defects in the goods, you can complete the inspection using the usage decision and perform a stock posting. Usage Decision for the Inspection Lot Make the usage decision for your inspection lot. Use the selected sets available in the system for usage decisions, and choose UD code A2. 2.
Displaying the Inspection Lot Continued on next page
110
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Reserved:___________________________________
1.
SAP
SAP
3.
Internal
Only
Skips allowed
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
Display your inspection lot again after making the usage decision and note the stock. Stock: Unrestricted use:______________________________ Quality inspection:______________________________ Reserved:___________________________________
Only
QM at Goods Receipt for the Purchase Order
1.
Inspection Setup in the Material Master Note the most important inspection setup data for your material T-BQ3## in plant 1000 for inspection type 01.
SAP
Indicator Set
SAP
Setting
Use
Partner
For certain materials, you expect a certificate from the vendor for delivered goods. This certificate does not always arrive with the delivered goods. The certificate can sometimes arrive before the goods receipt.
Internal
Task 3:
Not Set
Partner
Use
Post to insp. stock Insp. with mat spec. Insp. with task list
Internal
Automatic assignment Insp. by charac.
Only
Skips allowed 2.
Recording the Certificate Receipt The certificate for the ordered material T-BQ3## arrives before the goods in your company. Record the certificate receipt for your purchase order. Select your purchase order using material T-BQ3##.
3.
Posting the Goods Receipt for the Purchase Order Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
111
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
Record the goods receipt for the purchase order of material T-BQ3## with movement type 101 and plant 1000. Select your purchase order using material T-BQ3##. Note the material document number. ______________________________________________________
Only
Results Recording for the Inspection Lot Use the worklist for results recording to select your inspection lots for material T-BQ3##. Record a defective part for the inspection characteristic.
2.
Usage Decision for the Inspection Lot
SAP
Task 5:
Use
The vendor has often delivered defective parts. Create a quality notification that refers to the last delivery. Creating Complaints Against the Vendor Which notification type is used for complaints against the vendor? ______________________________________________________ Which material document number do you use as a reference for complaints against the vendor? Number:______________________ Item:______________ 2.
Subject for Complaint Against the Vendor Note the subject of the complaint against the vendor. To do this, use the subjects defined in the system as coding. You can extend the subject in the notification by using additional descriptions. Continued on next page
112
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
1.
Partner
Complaints Against the Vendor
SAP
Make the usage decision for your inspection lot. Use the selected sets available in the system to make the usage decision. Choose the UD code Return the total lot quantity because of the defective unit.
Use
1.
An inspection lot was created when the goods receipt was posted. The inspection is performed according to the specifications in the inspection plan because of the inspection setup in the QM view of the material master.
Internal
Results Recording and Usage Decision
Partner
Task 4:
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
3.
Contact Partner and Priority You must define the contact partner to continue processing the complaint against the vendor. In addition to the vendor, you must define the contact partner in your company for this complaint against the vendor. Enter your user PLM400-## as the contact person for the complaint. You want the vendor to respond quickly to this complaint. As a result, you assign the priority High to the vendor complaint.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
113
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
Solution 7: QM in Procurement Task 1: QM at Other Goods Receipts
Only
1.
Inspection Setup in the Material Master
Note the most important settings for your material T-BQ4## in plant 1000 for inspection type 05. Setting
Indicator Set
Value
Not Set
SAP
SAP
Post to insp. stock
Use
Partner
You define the basic settings for the process flow of the quality inspection in the inspection setup of the material master (QM view).
Internal
In addition to goods receipts for the purchase order or order, you can post goods receipts in the SAP System without referring to another document. For such goods receipts, for example at the initial entry of stock balances or during a free delivery, an inspection type for inspection lot origin 05 is used in QM.
Insp. with mat spec.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
114
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
Setting
Indicator Set
Value
Not Set
Insp. with task list Skips allowed Inspection percentage
Only
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Planning → Logistics Master Data → Material → Display (MM03)
Choose enter or the pushbutton Select View(s) to exit the initial screen. Select the Quality Management view on the following screen Select View(s). If necessary, use the scroll bar. Choose enter or the pushbutton Organizational levels to exit the selection screen.
SAP Use
Setting
Indicator Set
Post to insp. stock
Value
Not Set X
Insp. with mat spec.
X
Insp. with task list
X
Skips allowed
Only
Internal
The following settings are valid for inspection type 05 of material T-BQ4##.
X
Inspection percentage
10 Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
The Quality Management view of the material master for material T-BQ4## appears in display mode. Choose the pushbutton Insp. Setup to display the inspection setup for material T-BQ4## in plant 1000. The inspection types are displayed that are assigned to this material. In the lower screen area, detailed information on the selected inspection type is displayed.
SAP
Since a lot of data is maintained in QM with reference to a certain plant, you must enter the plant before you can continue to the Quality Management view. Enter plant 1000 and choose enter to exit the screen.
Use
Partner
The initial screen for displaying a material appears. Enter material number T-BQ4## in the Material field for your material. ## is your group number.
Internal
a)
115
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
2.
PLM400
Posting Another Goods Receipt Record a goods receipt for material T-BQ4## with movement type 501 in plant 1000, storage location 0001 without reference to a purchase order. You have received 100 pieces of this material. Note the material document number. ______________________________________________________ Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → Other (MB1C) or
Partner
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Movement (MIGO)
Values
Movement type
501
Plant
1000
Storage location
0001
SAP
Field name or data type
Use
SAP
In transaction MB1C, enter the following data on the screen Enter Other Goods Receipts: Initial Screen:
Use
Values
Material
T-BQ4##
Quantity
100
Hint: The unit of entry (UnE) is copied from the material master. The storage location is copied from the initial screen for entering other goods receipts. Save your entries and note the document number. Displaying the Inspection Lot
Continued on next page
116
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Field name or data type
Partner
Exit the initial screen by choosing enter. The item overview appears for recording other goods receipts. Enter the following data:
3.
Internal
Only
a)
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
An inspection lot was automatically created when the goods receipt was posted. Display this inspection lot and note the stock. Use the material document number to select the inspection lot. Stock: Unrestricted use:______________________________ Quality inspection:______________________________ a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Editing → Display (QA03)
Partner SAP Use
0
Quality Inspection:
100
Reserved:
0
Hint: Since the indicator Post to insp. stock has been set in the inspection setup in the material master, the total goods receipt quantity was posted to Quality Inspection stock.
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
117
Only
Internal
Unrestricted use:
Partner
The following stock exists:
SAP
By choosing enter, the system selects inspection lots based on the selection conditions and displays them. Copy the inspection lot number to the Inspection Lot field with a double-click. Exit the initial screen for displaying the inspection lot by choosing enter. The Display Inspection Lot screen appears, and you choose the pushbutton Stock to switch to the stock overview.
Use
The number of the inspection lot that was last processed in the system is displayed in the Inspection Lot field. You can also use the field-related input help (F4 help) to select your inspection lot. Place the cursor in the Inspection Lot field and choose the F4 function key. A screen appears on which you can enter data for inspection lot selection on different tab pages. Choose the tab page Goods Movement and enter the document number from exercise Posting Another Goods Receipt in the field Material Document.
Internal
Only
Reserved:___________________________________
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
Task 2: Inspection Completion and Stock Posting with the Usage Decision Since you have not detected any defects in the goods, you can complete the inspection using the usage decision and perform a stock posting. 1.
Usage Decision for the Inspection Lot
a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Usage Decision → Record (QA11)
Exit the initial screen by choosing the F5 function key or enter. Since this is an inspection lot without planned inspection characteristics, the screen Record Usage Decision: Defect Overview appears. Make the usage decision with UD code A2. Select this UD code using the field-related input help. Save the usage decision.
SAP
Displaying the Inspection Lot Display your inspection lot again after making the usage decision and note the stock.
Use
Unrestricted use:______________________________ Reserved:___________________________________ a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Editing → Display (QA03) Enter the inspection lot number, and choose enter to display the inspection lot. Choose the pushbutton Stock to switch to the stock overview. The following stock exists: Unrestricted use:
100
Quality Inspection:
0
Reserved:
0 Continued on next page
118
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Quality inspection:______________________________
Partner
Stock:
SAP
2.
Use
Partner
Enter the inspection lot number on the initial screen Record Usage Decision. If necessary, you can also find the inspection lot number as described in exercise Displaying the Inspection Lot.
Internal
Only
Make the usage decision for your inspection lot. Use the selected sets available in the system for usage decisions, and choose UD code A2.
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
Task 3: QM at Goods Receipt for the Purchase Order For certain materials, you expect a certificate from the vendor for delivered goods. This certificate does not always arrive with the delivered goods. The certificate can sometimes arrive before the goods receipt. 1.
Inspection Setup in the Material Master
Only
Setting
Indicator
Partner
Set
Not Set
Post to insp. stock
Use
Insp. with mat spec.
Internal
Note the most important inspection setup data for your material T-BQ3## in plant 1000 for inspection type 01.
Insp. with task list
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
119
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
Setting
Indicator Set
Not Set
Automatic assignment Insp. by charac.
a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Planning → Logistics Master Data → Material → Display (MM03)
Partner SAP
Indicator Set
Not Set
Insp. with task list
X
Automatic assignment
X
Insp. by charac.
X
Skips allowed
X
2.
X
Recording the Certificate Receipt The certificate for the ordered material T-BQ3## arrives before the goods in your company. Record the certificate receipt for your purchase order.
Continued on next page
120
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Insp. with mat spec.
Partner
Use
X
Internal
Post to insp. stock
SAP
Setting
Use
The initial screen for displaying a material appears. Enter material number T-BQ3## in the Material field for your material. Exit the initial screen by choosing enter or the pushbutton Select View(s). Choose the Quality Management view and navigate to the inspection setup for material T-BQ3## in plant 1000. The following settings apply to inspection type 01 (inspection at goods receipt for a purchase order) for this material.
Internal
Only
Skips allowed
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
Select your purchase order using material T-BQ3##. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Certificates → Incoming → Create (QC51)
Only Partner
3.
Posting the Goods Receipt for the Purchase Order
SAP
Select your purchase order using material T-BQ3##. Note the material document number.
SAP
Record the goods receipt for the purchase order of material T-BQ3## with movement type 101 and plant 1000.
Use
In the certificate details, the system proposes the status Certificate Received in the field Certificate Status. The data for the vendor and material were copied from the purchasing document. Save the certificate receipt.
Internal
On the screen Create Quality Certificate Receipt: Initial Screen, you can now create the incoming quality certificate with reference to the purchase order. Select the purchase orders for your material T-BQ3## by using the field-related input help (F4 help) in the Purchase Order field. On the tab page Purchasing documents for material, enter your material number T-BQ3## in the Material field and plant 1000 in the Plant field. Start the selection by choosing the pushbutton Start Search. The overview of purchasing documents is displayed and you can copy the purchasing document to the field Purchase Order with a double-click. Exit the initial screen by choosing the pushbutton Certificate Data or by choosing enter.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
121
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
______________________________________________________ a)
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Movement (MIGO)
Only Partner SAP Use
Note the material document number:
Hint: In the overview on the left side of the screen, the posted material documents are displayed for your goods receipts.
Continued on next page
122
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
_________________________________________________________
Partner
Before you can post the goods receipt, the indicator OK must be set for the item.
SAP
Hint: If you have accessed the details for the item, you cannot make changes in the item overview. All changes are made in this case for the details.
Use
After choosing enter, the purchase order is copied to the overview on the left side of the screen. Already recorded and posted goods receipts are displayed in this overview. The goods receipt data for the current purchase order is displayed in the screen area on the right. In the header data for the purchase order, general data, vendor data, and data for the partners in the purchase order are displayed on the individual tab pages. The item overview is displayed below the header data and details on the items are displayed in the lower half. If necessary, you can still change data for the single items of the goods receipt in the detail data.
Internal
The overview screen for the goods receipt purchase order appears. Select your purchase orders for material T-BQ3## by using the field-related input help (F4 help). On the tab page Purchasing documents for material, enter your material number T-BQ3## in the Material field and plant 1000 in the Plant field. Perform the selection and copy the purchasing document to your overview screen with a double-click.
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
Task 4: Results Recording and Usage Decision An inspection lot was created when the goods receipt was posted. The inspection is performed according to the specifications in the inspection plan because of the inspection setup in the QM view of the material master. 1.
Results Recording for the Inspection Lot
Only
a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording (QE51N)
Field name or data type
Values
Plant
1000
Insp. lot origin
01
Material
T-BQ3##
Use Internal
2.
Usage Decision for the Inspection Lot
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
123
Only
Record a defective part for the inspection characteristic Sight Inspection in the Result field and complete the recording by choosing enter. Save your inspection result. If a characteristic is rejected, you need to enter an additional inspection description because of the specifications for the inspection characteristic. When you save the inspection results, the system displays a screen in which you can enter an inspection description in the Short Text field.
Partner
Choose the pushbutton Execute or the F8 function key to make the selection. The characteristic overview for results recording appears. On the left side of the screen, you can see the worklist, which contains all the inspection lots that correspond to the selection criteria. On the right side of the screen, you can see the characteristic overview in which you can record inspection results.
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
On the results recording initial screen, you can choose inspection lots according to certain criteria using the selection screen. For inspection lot selection, enter the following data on the Material tab page:
Internal
Use the worklist for results recording to select your inspection lots for material T-BQ3##. Record a defective part for the inspection characteristic.
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
Make the usage decision for your inspection lot. Use the selected sets available in the system to make the usage decision. Choose the UD code Return the total lot quantity because of the defective unit. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Usage Decision → Record (QA11)
Partner
Task 5:
SAP
The vendor has often delivered defective parts. Create a quality notification that refers to the last delivery.
Use
Creating Complaints Against the Vendor Which notification type is used for complaints against the vendor? ______________________________________________________
Only
Internal
Which material document number do you use as a reference for complaints against the vendor?
Partner
1.
SAP
Complaints Against the Vendor
Use
Exit the initial screen by choosing the F5 function key or enter. Since this is an inspection lot with planned inspection characteristics, the characteristic overview screen appears. Make the usage decision with UD code R12. Select this UD code using the field-related input help. Save the usage decision. Since it is a stock-related inspection lot, the inspection lot stock appears when you save. Enter the total inspection lot quantity in the field Return Delivery. Enter the reason for the return delivery on the following screen and exit the screen by choosing enter.
Internal
Only
Enter the inspection lot number on the screen Record Usage Decision: Initial Screen. If necessary, you can also find the inspection lot number as described in exercise Displaying the Inspection Lot.
Continued on next page
124
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
Number:______________________ Item:______________ a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Notification → Create (QM01) The initial screen for creating a notification appears. Use the field-related input help to select notification type Q2 - Complaint ag. vendor. Exit the initial screen by choosing the pushbutton Notification or by choosing enter.
Only Partner SAP Use Internal
The screen for creating the complaint against the vendor appears. 2.
Subject for Complaint Against the Vendor
Partner
Hint: The system copies all relevant data from the item for the material document to the complaint against the vendor.
SAP
Exit the screen by choosing Enter.
Use
The complaint is created with reference to the goods receipt document, or the material document with movement type 101, and refers to item 1. You can use this reference document if the entire delivery quantity is returned. The complaint is created with reference to the transfer document for usage decision, or the material document item with movement type 122. You can use this reference document if less than the entire delivery quantity is returned.
Internal
On the following screen, you define which document the notification refers. In the Material Document field, enter the document number of the goods receipt document from exercise Posting the Goods Receipt for the Purchase Order. You can also use the field-related input help (F4 help) to find this number. In this case, the screen Material Document List appears, on which you can enter the required selection criteria for the document. Copy the material document with a double-click. Also enter the item for the material document on the screen, which refers to the complaints against the vendor.
Only
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
125
Unit 4: Quality Management in Procurement
PLM400
Note the subject of the complaint against the vendor. To do this, use the subjects defined in the system as coding. You can extend the subject in the notification by using additional descriptions. a)
Enter the subject of the complaint against the vendor on the tab page Subject. In addition to the coding, you can also enter an extra long text for the subject.
Only Partner
You must define the contact partner to continue processing the complaint against the vendor. In addition to the vendor, you must define the contact partner in your company for this complaint against the vendor. Enter your user PLM400-## as the contact person for the complaint. You want the vendor to respond quickly to this complaint. As a result, you assign the priority High to the vendor complaint.
Use
3.
Internal
Hint: The coding for the subjects occurs in code groups and codes. These are created in a certain catalog type in the system. Contact Partner and Priority
On the tab page Contact Partner, define the contact person for the complaint against the vendor. In addition to the vendor as contact person, you must define the coordinator for the complaint against the vendor. This coordinator is the contact person in your company for this complaint against the vendor. Enter your user PLM400-## as coordinator.
Use
Only
Internal
Save the notification.
Partner
Define the importance of the complaint against the vendor in the field Priority. Select a priority by pressing F4.
SAP
SAP
a)
126
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Procurement
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the procurement processes from a quality management standpoint • Explain inspection and certificate processing at goods receipt • Make use of the quality info record in procurement
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
127
Unit Summary
PLM400
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the procurement processes from a quality management standpoint • Explain inspection and certificate processing at goods receipt • Make use of the quality info record in procurement
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
128
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
The quality info record contains data for certificate control at goods receipt. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Only
QM cannot be used to set a payment block for the goods receipt invoice. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
3.
True False
You do not have to perform a goods receipt inspection for goods coming from certified vendors.
Use
Partner
□ □
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Internal
2.
True False
True False
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
129
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
The quality info record contains data for certificate control at goods receipt. Answer: True
2.
QM cannot be used to set a payment block for the goods receipt invoice. Answer: False
3.
You do not have to perform a goods receipt inspection for goods coming from certified vendors. Answer: True
SAP
SAP
If a vendor is certified, the goods can be posted directly to the warehouse without an inspection lot.
Use
Partner
If QM in procurement is activated, goods receipt invoices can be blocked until the corresponding quality inspection is completed.
Internal
Only
Depending on the material and vendor in question, the quality info record can be used define how the goods receipt certificates are to be processed.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
130
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 5 Unit Overview
Partner
In this unit, you learn about the possible uses of QM in production. The processes of the quality inspection during production, as well as the quality inspection after completion of production are dealt with. The specific requirements of the process industry are also taken into consideration.
Use
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP
Explain the use of QM in production Carry out an inspection during production and the subsequent possibilities Inspect a goods movement once production has been completed
SAP
• • •
Use
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production ................................................. 132 Exercise 8: QM in Discrete Manufacturing .................................. 141 Exercise 9: QM in Process Manufacturing .................................. 149
Partner
Unit Contents
Only
Internal
Internal
Only
Quality Management in Production
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
131
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production Lesson Overview This lesson explains the tasks of QM in the production area. The process flow with the use of QM is explained from production planning to order confirmation.
Lesson Objectives
Only
Explain the use of QM in production Carry out an inspection during production and the subsequent possibilities Inspect a goods movement once production has been completed
Business Example Various quality inspections are to be performed during production. Depending on the products, inspection results must be recorded and /or defects must be documented.
SAP
SAP
QM in Production
Use
Partner
• • •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 61: QM in Production / Process Industry
In production, the QM component provides you with important information about the current quality of the manufactured goods (statistical process control) and if necessary, you can intervene with quality notifications (Workflow link) to implement corrective actions.
132
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
QM inspection planning is integrated in the production planning functions. Inspection operations are included in the routing (production planning in discrete manufacturing) or in the master recipe (production planning in the process industry). Inspections during production are controlled using the inspection operations that are contained in the routing or the master recipe.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
Inspection points allow you to repeatedly record results for the same inspection characteristic in one order. You can define the point, at which an inspection is to take place (for example, every two hours, every tenth wire basket, every 100 pieces). Inspection points can be created automatically during the order release or manually during the results recording. If some production operations are to be processed externally, the system automatically creates a purchase requisition. You can carry out a quality inspection for the goods receipt that has been created by this purchase requisition. You confirm the yield and scrap quantity to the production order. Partial lots enable you to manage several different quality grades in the production process.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
133
Only
Internal
The control key in the task list operation (such as routing, master recipe, inspection plan) defines whether inspection characteristics are to be used.
Partner
Inspections during production and inspections for external processing are triggered automatically.
SAP
In production, the integration of inspection specifications in the routing allows you to record QM-relevant information. The inspection operations are therefore integrated in the work processes of the production chain.
Use
Figure 62: Production Chain
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
For production processes in the process industry, you can set the system so that approval of the inspection lot is required before the lot can be released for results recording.
Inspection During Production
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
If the sample management functions are active, the system also creates the corresponding physical-sample master records when it creates the inspection lot. The planned sampling can be enhanced by unplanned samples.
134
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
When an order is released, the system creates an inspection lot with corresponding inspection specifications (for example, sample size, inspection frequency and inspection characteristics), based on the information contained in the operations of the routing.
Partner
Use
Figure 63: Order Release
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
Internal
Figure 64: Inspection during production
In quality control, control charts play an integral part in statistical process control (SPC). These charts allow you to monitor the current production process. You can use control charts for both quantitative and qualitative characteristics.
SAP
SAP
If the action limits are exceeded, the system automatically records predefined defects and tasks can be triggered for the quality notifications.
Use
Partner
Only
PLM400
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 65: Creating a Notification for Order Confirmation
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
135
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
If you want to create a quality notification for a production order, you can do so from the operation confirmation for the production order. You can use the confirmation in transaction CO11N to do this. If notifications already exist for the production order (for example, notifications related to defects recording), then you can process these notifications.
Internal
Only
If you are creating a new quality notification, you can freely define the notification type.
Use
Partner
Specific Inspection Processes in Production
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner Only
Internal
Figure 66: Inspection for External Processing
136
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
When operations are processed externally, you inspect the materials upon their return in a goods receipt inspection: •
•
Use
Partner
•
Internal
Only
• • •
The operations are identified by corresponding control keys for external processing. An inspection type is assigned to the operations. This inspection type is activated in the material master of the finished product. When the order is generated, the purchase requisition is used to create a purchase order for the operation to be externally processed. An inspection lot is created when the goods are received from external processing. You can define special inspection plans for the goods receipt inspection from external processing.
SAP
SAP
You can create partial lots, based on the confirmation of the results for inspection points. You can assign these partial lots to batches. You can either create a new batch for this assignment or use an existing one.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
137
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 67: Combination of Partial Lots into Batches
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
Partner SAP
SAP
A new inspection lot can only be created, if the usage decision has been made for the existing inspection lot (this means that the inspection lot has been completed).
Partner
You can create inspection lots for production versions. However, there can only be one open inspection lot for each production version.
Only
Internal
You can display existing inspection lots for a production version. You can then determine which inspection lots are currently open and which lots have been completed with a usage decision.
Use
In an inspection during production for production versions (for example, in the automotive industry) you can complete the current inspection lot and create a new lot. This is advisable if the specifications have changed (such as tolerance changes, additional inspections in the rate routing or inspection characteristic).
Use
Only
Internal
Figure 68: Inspection for Repetitive Manufacturing
138
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
Internal
Only
Inspection at the End of Production
Partner
•
Goods receipt from production into the warehouse. When the goods are received at the warehouse, they become stock-relevant and are posted to inspection stock. Once the quality inspection has been completed and the goods have been accepted with the usage decision, they can be posted to unrestricted-use stock. Delivery
SAP
•
You can inspect the following:
Use
When an order is completed, corresponding goods movements are triggered.
SAP
Figure 69: Goods Movements
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 70: Early Inspection at Goods Receipt from Production
When a production or process order is released, an early goods receipt inspection lot (inspection lot origin 04) can be generated. This inspection lot is created independently of whether an inspection lot with origin 03 exists for the relevant order.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
139
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
The immediate inspection lot at goods receipt represents a new combination for inspection lots: One inspection lot is created for each combination of order, batch and storage location. Once the goods have been received, the inspection lot becomes stock-relevant and can be used to manage stock. Advantages:
Only
Inspection lot is created when order is released Independent inspection plan Automatic assignment of batch number at goods receipt Inspection can begin at an early stage
• • •
Only one inspection lot for each order Only one batch and storage location No direct link between inspection lot and original order (The inspection lot for the inspection lot origin 04 recognizes the production order. The production order always only contains the inspection lot for the inspection lot origin 03 and not the inspection lot for the inspection lot origin 04).
Use
Partner
Limitations:
Internal
• • • •
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
140
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
Exercise 8: QM in Discrete Manufacturing Exercise Objectives
Only
Task 1:
You use quality inspections during production in your company. During production, parts are taken and inspected at regular intervals. If there are defects, the persons responsible from quality management and production planning should be automatically informed.
Use
Processing the inspection lot
SAP Use
You work in production at work center T-P##. You use the results recording worklist to select all inspection lots in production that you have to process. Note the inspection lot number and the number of the corresponding production order.
Internal
Inspection lot number:___________________________________ Production order:_________________________________ Recording inspection results
Only
2.
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
Displaying the inspection lot for the production order
SAP
In your company, you work with production orders that are dependent on lot size. The specifications are copied from the routing depending on the quantity to be produced. When the production orders are released, inspection lots are automatically created for the quality inspection during production. 1.
Internal
Business Example
Partner
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Perform a quality inspection during production and record inspection results at several points during production • Create internal defect notifications when there are problems during production
141
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
Record measured values for each inspection operation for at least two inspection points when the worker inspects the planned inspection characteristics. Hint: Multiple inspection results can be recorded for the same inspection characteristic in and inspection lot if inspection points are used.
Only
3.
Short text for inspection characteristic
Recording form
SAP
SAP
Operation
Use
Partner
Note the operations in which a quality inspection is performed in the following table. Also enter the description for the inspection characteristics and the results recording type.
Displaying the Control Chart
Use
Usage Decision
Task 2: Routing and Specifications for the Quality Inspection 1.
Display the standard routing for material T-BQ5##. Which control key is used for operations that are relevant for inspection? Control key:_______________________________ In which operations of the standard routing is a quality inspection supported? Operation:______________ Operation:_________________
142
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
After all quality inspections have been completed for the production order, you can complete the inspection lot using the usage decision. Make the usage decision for your inspection lot by choosing a suitable UD code.
Partner
Display the control chart for the inspection characteristic Shaft length and record results for another inspection point for this inspection characteristic. 4.
Internal
Example: One sequence of operation lasts 6 hours. The diameter of the material has to be recorded every hour. Therefore, one inspection lot exists for the production order with a total of 6 inspection points. The inspection result for the inspection characteristic “diameter” can be recorded for every inspection point.
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
Solution 8: QM in Discrete Manufacturing Task 1: Processing the inspection lot
Only
1.
Displaying the inspection lot for the production order
Inspection lot number:___________________________________ Production order:_________________________________ a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording (QE51N)
Values
Insp. lot origin
03
Work center
T-P##
SAP
Perform the selection by choosing the pushbutton Execute or the F8 function key. The characteristic overview for results recording appears. In the screen area on the left, all inspection lots are displayed that meet the selection conditions. The inspection lots are uniquely identified in the worklist by the inspection lot number, material number, and the number of the production order. Hint: If you need additional criteria to identify inspection lots, you can create a user-dependent display variant. 2.
Recording inspection results Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
143
Only
Internal
Field name or data type
Partner
Use
Screen area Inspection operation selection
SAP
The selection screen for the results recording worklist appears. Enter the following criteria for inspection lot selection:
Use
Partner
You work in production at work center T-P##. You use the results recording worklist to select all inspection lots in production that you have to process. Note the inspection lot number and the number of the corresponding production order.
Internal
In your company, you work with production orders that are dependent on lot size. The specifications are copied from the routing depending on the quantity to be produced. When the production orders are released, inspection lots are automatically created for the quality inspection during production.
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
Record measured values for each inspection operation for at least two inspection points when the worker inspects the planned inspection characteristics. Hint: Multiple inspection results can be recorded for the same inspection characteristic in and inspection lot if inspection points are used.
Recording form
You inspect the same inspection characteristics at regular intervals in accordance with the specifications in the routing. This is achieved by using inspection points. You use a container number and the date to clearly identify the inspection point. Quality inspections are performed in operations 30 and 60.
Only Internal
Continued on next page
144
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Enter a container number in the right side of the screen, and confirm your entry by choosing enter. The characteristic overview of all inspection characteristics in operation 30 appears. A summarized recording of inspection results is defined for the inspection characteristic Straight shaft, this means that the number of nonconforming units is recorded. Enter the inspection result in the field Result and confirm your entry by choosing ENTER. The inspection characteristic is automatically valuated and closed. When you save the inspection results, the screen for the valuation of the inspection point appears. During inspection point valuation, a confirmation can be performed for the production order. Confirm the proposed inspection point valuation by choosing enter.
Partner
Use
a)
Short text for inspection characteristic
SAP
SAP
Operation
Use
Partner
Note the operations in which a quality inspection is performed in the following table. Also enter the description for the inspection characteristics and the results recording type.
Internal
Example: One sequence of operation lasts 6 hours. The diameter of the material has to be recorded every hour. Therefore, one inspection lot exists for the production order with a total of 6 inspection points. The inspection result for the inspection characteristic “diameter” can be recorded for every inspection point.
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
Record results for another inspection point in operation 30. To do this, go to the entry next inspection in the worklist in the left screen area under operation 30.
Only Partner
Short text for inspection characteristic
Recording form
30
Straight shaft
Summarized, number of defects
60
Diameter
Classed recording
60
Shaft length
Single-value recording
SAP Use Internal
3.
Displaying the Control Chart
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
145
Only
In the screen area on the left for the worklist, the current valuation status is displayed for the single inspection characteristics and inspection points. Record results for another inspection point in operation 60.
Partner
You can record inspection results for the characteristic Shaft length on the characteristic overview screen. Click on the current inspection point in the worklist to call up the characteristic overview screen. Enter your inspection results in the Result field. After entering the first measured value, you can then enter additional measured values for this inspection point. After entering the last measured value, you must manually valuate the inspection characteristic in this case. Perform the valuation and exit the screen by choosing enter. Save your inspection results and valuate the inspection point. Copy the proposed values for inspection point valuation.
SAP
Classed results recording for the characteristic Diameter cannot be performed on the characteristic overview screen. Therefore, choose this characteristic and switch to the detail screen by choosing the pushbutton Choose characteristic. The inspection specifications are displayed and you can record the number of single values (class scope), which are in the specified value class. Confirm the entries by choosing enter.
Use
Operation
Internal
Expand operation 60 in the worklist on the left side of the screen, and enter the container number for inspection point identification. After choosing enter, the characteristic overview for all inspection characteristics in operation 60 appears in which two inspection characteristics are inspected. Classed recording is planned for the characteristic Diameter. Single measured values should be recorded for the characteristic Shaft length.
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
Display the control chart for the inspection characteristic Shaft length and record results for another inspection point for this inspection characteristic. Record results for another inspection point in operation 60 for the characteristic Shaft length. Choose this inspection characteristic on the characteristic overview screen and then choose the pushbutton Control Chart. The control chart for this inspection characteristic is shown in the lower screen area of the characteristic overview screen. The inspection results recorded for another inspection point are immediately copied to the control chart and the display is updated. Save your entries. 4.
Usage Decision
a)
Double-click on your inspection lot number in the worklist to switch to the transaction for making the usage decision.
SAP Use
Routing and Specifications for the Quality Inspection 1.
Display the standard routing for material T-BQ5##. Which control key is used for operations that are relevant for inspection? Control key:_______________________________ In which operations of the standard routing is a quality inspection supported?
Continued on next page
146
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Task 2:
Partner
Hint: The usage decision for inspection lots can also be automatically made from the inspection during production. You can also plan jobs, which complete inspection lots with the usage decision depending on the status of the basic production orders.
SAP
Confirm the information message by choosing enter, and make the usage decision for your inspection lot by choosing a suitable UD code.
Use
Partner
After all quality inspections have been completed for the production order, you can complete the inspection lot using the usage decision. Make the usage decision for your inspection lot by choosing a suitable UD code.
Internal
Only
a)
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
Operation:______________ Operation:_________________ a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Planning → Inspection Planning → Routing → Routings → Standard Routings → Display (CA03)
Field name or data type
Values
Material
T-BQ5##
Plant
1000
Exit the initial screen by choosing the pushbutton Operations or the F8 function key. The operation overview for the routing appears.
SAP Use
Only
Internal
Hint: You can also use the Engineering Workbench to display the routing (Logistics → Central Functions → Engineering → Engineering Workbench [CEWB])
Partner
Quality inspections are defined for operations 30 and 60 in the standard routing for material T-BQ5##.
SAP
Display the details for the control key. To do this, select the control key and switch to the control key table by choosing the F4 function key. In this Customizing table, all operation control keys are maintained. Use the scroll bar to find control key PP06. Place the cursor on this control key, and choose the pushbutton Detailed Information or the F5 function key. The indicator Insp. char. required is set for this control indicator.
Use
Partner
In the operation overview, the operations relevant for inspection are not marked differently. The control key for the operation and the entry of inspection characteristics are the only decisive factors for operations.
Internal
Only
Enter the following data on the initial screen:
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
147
PLM400
148
2005/Q2
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
Exercise 9: QM in Process Manufacturing Exercise Objectives
Only
Task 1:
You use process orders in your company to manufacture products. According to the specifications in the master recipe, the products are made using the PI sheet. During production, you record results for planned inspection characteristics at regular intervals. This involves changing directly from the PI sheet to results recording.
Use
Processing the PI Sheet
SAP Use
Maintain the PI sheet for material T-HTQ2## (plant 1100, laboratory processing group) and note the number of the control recipe.
Hint: Before you can begin recording the inspection results, you may have to give two digital signatures in the phase 310. To do this, use your PLM400-## user and your password. Switch from the PI sheet to results recording. During the process, you should record inspection results at freely-defined times and for certain events. Use the event new container 1 to identify the inspection point. Record inspection results for the planned inspection characteristics. 2.
Creating a New Partial Lot Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
149
Only
Internal
Control recipe: ______________________________________
Partner
Results Recording from the PI Sheet
SAP
The PI sheet contains specifications for the production of a product. During the production process, the current, process-relevant data is entered directly in the PI sheet. During a quality inspection in process manufacturing, you can switch directly from the PI sheet to results recording. 1.
Internal
Business Example
Partner
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Switch from the PI sheet to results recording in process manufacturing and record inspection results • Create partial lots during results recording and if necessary, create new batches
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
You can create partial lots during results recording because of the specifications in the master recipe that is used for the production of material T-HTQ2##. After recording inspection results, create a new partial lot. Use a suitable description for the partial lot (for example, shift 1) 3.
Assignment of a Partial Lot to a Batch
Hint: In this example, the batch number is assigned in connection with results recording and the partial lot valuation.
Task 2: Inspection Completion Using the Usage Decision After all quality inspections have been completed for the process order, you can complete the inspection lot using the usage decision. Make the usage decision for your inspection lot by choosing a suitable UD code.
SAP
SAP
1.
Use
Partner
It is also possible to copy the batch number from the process order to the inspection lot. This number is then proposed at partial lot valuation.
Internal
Only
Since material T-HTQ2## is handled in batches, you must assign a batch to the partial lot. Therefore, you must create a new batch for the partial lot you created.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
150
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
Solution 9: QM in Process Manufacturing Task 1: Processing the PI Sheet
Only
1.
Results Recording from the PI Sheet
Partner
To do this, use your PLM400-## user and your password.
SAP
Switch from the PI sheet to results recording. During the process, you should record inspection results at freely-defined times and for certain events. Use the event new container 1 to identify the inspection point.
Hint: Before you can begin recording the inspection results, you may have to give two digital signatures in the phase 310.
Use
Control recipe: ______________________________________
SAP
Maintain the PI sheet for material T-HTQ2## (plant 1100, laboratory processing group) and note the number of the control recipe.
Internal
The PI sheet contains specifications for the production of a product. During the production process, the current, process-relevant data is entered directly in the PI sheet. During a quality inspection in process manufacturing, you can switch directly from the PI sheet to results recording.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
151
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
Record inspection results for the planned inspection characteristics. a)
Logistics → Production-Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find (CO60)
Field name or data type
Values
Plant
1100
Operating group
Laboratory
Material number
T-HTQ2##
Partner SAP Use
Exit the screen Record Results for Inspection Point: Initial Screen by choosing ENTER. On the characteristic overview screen, you can record inspection results for single inspection characteristics in the Result fields. Save your entries. 2.
Creating a New Partial Lot
Continued on next page
152
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Hint: You make the appropriate setting for the inspection point and user field combination in Customizing. You define which user fields (text fields, numerical fields, time, date) you want to use for the identification.
Partner
You can record results for the inspection characteristic several times by using inspection points. You use a text field in this case to clearly identify the inspection point. Enter the inspection point identification as new container 1.
SAP
In the master recipe, results recording is planned for phase 320. By double clicking on Record inspection results, you can switch from the PI sheet to results recording in QM.
Use
Exit this screen by choosing the F8 function key or the pushbutton Execute. The worklist that corresponds to the selection criteria appears. Select your PI sheet and leave the list by choosing the F5 function button or by choosing the Maintain PI sheet pushbutton. The PI sheet appears and you can confirm the relevant data for the production process.
Internal
Only
Enter the following data on the selection screen:
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
You can create partial lots during results recording because of the specifications in the master recipe that is used for the production of material T-HTQ2##. After recording inspection results, create a new partial lot. Use a suitable description for the partial lot (for example, shift 1) a)
Partial lot creation is supported in the specifications of the master recipe header for the process order. Since you have recorded results for the first inspection point, you must create a partial lot when you save the inspection results.
Only
Assignment of a Partial Lot to a Batch Since material T-HTQ2## is handled in batches, you must assign a batch to the partial lot. Therefore, you must create a new batch for the partial lot you created.
It is also possible to copy the batch number from the process order to the inspection lot. This number is then proposed at partial lot valuation.
Use
Select an already existing batch or create a new batch (external batch number assignment, for example, new batch HTQ2##) and exit the screen by choosing enter. You return to the PI sheet and can edit the other phases in the production process.
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
153
Only
Internal
Since the material is managed in batches in this case and the master recipe supports a partial lot and batch for the inspection point, you must assign a batch to the partial lot. In the field Batch, you can select a batch that is already available in the system for the material using the F4 help, or create a new batch by choosing the pushbutton Batch.
Partner
a)
SAP
SAP
Hint: In this example, the batch number is assigned in connection with results recording and the partial lot valuation.
Use
Partner
3.
Internal
Use the pushbutton Partial lot to create the first partial lot. Enter a suitable description for the partial lot in the Description field. Exit the screen by choosing enter. The screen Valuation and Partial Lot Assignment appears again.
Unit 5: Quality Management in Production
PLM400
Task 2: Inspection Completion Using the Usage Decision 1.
After all quality inspections have been completed for the process order, you can complete the inspection lot using the usage decision. Make the usage decision for your inspection lot by choosing a suitable UD code. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Usage Decision → Record (QA11)
Only Partner SAP
Choose a suitable code in the field UD Code and save your entries.
SAP
On the characteristic overview for the usage decision, the system displays all the relevant data from the inspection on the tab pages Defects, Characteristics, Inspection Points.
Use
Hint: Confirm the information message by choosing enter, and make the usage decision for your inspection lot by choosing a suitable UD code.
Internal
On the screen Record Usage Decision: Initial Screen, the inspection lot number of the lot last processed in the system is entered in the field Inspection Lot. You can also find the inspection lot number using the F4 help.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
154
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Production
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the use of QM in production • Carry out an inspection during production and the subsequent possibilities • Inspect a goods movement once production has been completed
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
155
Unit Summary
PLM400
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the use of QM in production • Carry out an inspection during production and the subsequent possibilities • Inspect a goods movement once production has been completed
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
156
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
An inspection lot can be created automatically when a production order is released. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
2.
True False
In the course of an inspection during production:
3.
□ □ □
A B C
□
D
Inspection results can be recorded for the inspection characteristics. Defects cannot be recorded. Multiple results for the same inspection characteristic can be recorded if inspection points are used. No unplanned characteristics can be added.
An inspection cannot be performed when goods are received from production.
Use
Partner
Choose the correct answer(s).
Internal
Only
□ □
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
SAP
SAP
□ □
True False
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
157
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
An inspection lot can be created automatically when a production order is released. Answer: True
2.
In the course of an inspection during production: Answer: A, C
Partner
3.
An inspection cannot be performed when goods are received from production.
SAP
An inspection lot can be created for the goods movement at the end of the production order. This inspection lot is stock-relevant.
SAP
Answer: False
Use
It is possible to record results and defects in the course of an inspection during production. Inspection points allow for multiple recording within the one production order. Unplanned characteristics can be added when results are being recorded.
Internal
Only
If the material in production is subject to quality inspection, an inspection lot will automatically be created by the system when the production order is released.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
158
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 6 Only
Unit Overview
Use
Partner
The uses of quality management in sales and distribution processes are dealt with in this unit. The unit deals with customer-specific inspection requests, certificate creation, and the processing of customer complaints.
Unit Objectives
SAP
Use QM in the sales processing and service areas Understand QM-relevant processes for a sales order and for a delivery Use quality notifications to process customer complaints
Only
Internal
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution .................................... 160 Exercise 10: QM in Sales Order Processing................................ 169
Partner
Unit Contents
SAP
Use
After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • •
Internal
Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
159
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution Lesson Overview This lesson explains the possible uses of quality management in sales processing and in service.
Lesson Objectives
Only
Use QM in the sales processing and service areas Understand QM-relevant processes for a sales order and for a delivery Use quality notifications to process customer complaints
Business Example Before goods can be shipped, they must be subjected to a quality inspection. The results of this inspection are copied into a quality certificate for the delivery.
SAP
SAP
QM in Sales and Distribution
Use
Partner
• • •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 71: QM in Sales and Distribution/Service
The QM component controls inspection processing for goods issue. When the goods shipped, the QM component supplies the quality certificates to accompany the delivery. You can process customer complaints efficiently using quality notifications.
160
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution
Internal
Partner
Only
PLM400
Figure 72: Sales Chain
The QM application component supports sales and distribution processes by:
•
Customer specifications can be used for batch determination.
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
In the service area, customer complaints are received and are distributed for further processing in the system, based on the nature of the problem.
SAP
SAP
•
Quality inspections for a delivery (dependent on sales organization, customer and material) Quality certificates for a delivery (with reference to sales organization, customer and material) Management of customer terms of delivery
Use
•
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
161
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
PLM400
Delivery Inspection
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Use
• • •
Specify the material for material-specific inspection processes Define customer specifications Enter an additional short or long text
When creating the delivery the quality info record sales helps you decide where the checks for the goods to be delivered are carried out.
162
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
You can use the sales quality info record to define the inspection specifications for a specific customer/material combination. You can overwrite the general customer specifications (see above) with the material-specific inspection processes. In the sales quality information record, you can:
Partner
If a customer master record has been created for a customer, you can use the quality information record in sales to define inspection-relevant specifications for the customer. These specifications apply to all materials that are delivered to the customer and include the control parameters quality inspection, delivery category and documents.
SAP
SAP
Figure 73: Delivery Inspection
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution
If a delivery for a product or a material is created, then QM automatically generates an inspection lot for the inspection relevant delivery items. A delivery item is inspection relevant if the corresponding control parameters are active in the sales processes and in QM.
SAP
The inspection results for a delivery (or for inspections during production) are printed on a quality certificate and included with the delivery (or sent directly to the customer).
Only
Internal
On the certificate, the system can print results for inspection characteristics and values from characteristics associated with the batch. This applies to the results obtained throughout the entire production chain.
Partner
Use
If a delivery is made up of batch requirement materials then partial lots are automatically formed for the inspection lot. The inspection of the individual batches is carried out with reference to the relevant partial lot.
SAP
For a delivery, you can inspect the goods, based on the control parameters (quality info record sales, delivery category and so on).
Use
Partner
Figure 74: Delivery
Internal
Only
PLM400
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
163
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP Use
• •
One inspection lot for each main item: An inspection lot is created for the main item. A partial lot is created for every batch split item (variant A). One inspection lot for each batch split item: An inspection lot is only created for the main item if the main item has a batch. An inspection lot is created for every batch split item as soon as the batch is known. This setting only affects materials subject to management in batches. (variant B).
In variant A, the inspection lot number is in the details of the main item of the outbound delivery. In the details for the batch split item, you can find both the partial lot number and the inspection lot number. There is no batch in the inspection lot header.
164
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
In the inspection types for the inspection lot origins 10 (delivery to customer with sales order), 11 (delivery to customer without sales order), and 12 (general delivery), the field Lot Creation Control has been enhanced. You can make the following settings:
Partner
As of SAP R/3 Enterprise Release 470x200 (PLM Extension 2.00), you can perform the quality inspection for an outbound delivery according to variant A or variant B. In the inspection setup, you can define if partial lots are to be formed in the case of a batch split in the outbound delivery, or if a dedicated inspection lot is to be created for each batch split item.
SAP
Figure 75: Alternatives for quality inspections for outbound deliveries
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution
In variant B, the inspection lot number is only contained in the details of the main item if the main item also has a batch. Otherwise, the inspection lot number is in the details for the batch split item. The batch is in the inspection lot header.
Service and Repairs Processing
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP Use
SAP
Figure 76: Service
The data is recorded in the notification system and forwarded to the departments responsible for processing the problems. The system updates the relevant statistical data (such as number of notifications for a customer).
Partner Only
Internal
In the Service area, you record customer problems and define activities or tasks.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
165
PLM400
Internal
Figure 77: Repairs Processing Using Quality Notifications
SAP Use
•
If the technical inspection confirms that the goods are in proper working order and repairs are not necessary, the goods can be returned to the customer If the goods must be scrapped, you can send replacement parts to the customer using the sales processes.
166
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Create a repair order Post a goods movement to the appropriate stock so the returned items can be processed accordingly (for example, sales order stock, unrestricted-use stock, or scrap) Initiate a technical inspection (analyzing the defects and determining what corrective tasks need to be performed) Confirm the result of the technical check in the repair order and complete the notification
Partner
• •
SAP
You can use quality notifications to support the RMA (Return Material Authorization) process in your company. For example, if goods are returned by a customer for repair or replacement because of a technical defect, you can use a quality notification to process the return delivery. You record the problem in a quality notification for a customer complaint (notification origin Q1) and then use the functions of the quality notification and integrated action box to:
Use
Partner
Only
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution
SAP Use
You make a usage decision for the inspection lot and post the goods, depending on the results of the inspection, to the appropriate stock. The standard settings from client 000 can be copied into the current client.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
167
Only
Internal
The returned items are inspected. During the inspection you can record inspection results and defects.
Partner
If a good that has been delivered is returned by the customer (for example, because of a technical defect or a repair order), one of the ways in which you can process this return is using a quality inspection. You use an inspection lot to perform a quality inspection to determine whether the goods can be repaired.
SAP
Returns and repairs processing provides you with a wide range of functions for managing all the necessary activities which repairing goods for a customer entails. From registering the repair request from the customer through to billing the customer for the services performed.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 78: Repairs Processing Using Inspection Lot
PLM400
168
2005/Q2
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution
Exercise 10: QM in Sales Order Processing Exercise Objectives
Business Example
Incoming customer complaints are recorded in the system. Depending on the subject of the complaint, you may have to perform additional activities.
Task 1:
Use
Partner
You perform a quality inspection in your company when goods are delivered. The results of this inspection for delivery are copied to the certificate, which is enclosed with the goods.
Internal
Only
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Perform a quality inspection during goods issue for deliveries and create a certificate for delivery • Use quality notifications for customer complaints and repairs processing
You perform quality inspections during the delivery of goods, in accordance with the agreements that you have made with your customer. In this way, the goods can also be inspected for certain customer specifications.
Use
Creating a Delivery
Internal
Create a delivery for material T-FQ1##. The delivery should be performed without reference to an order. The goods are sent from shipping point 1100, the sales organization is 1020, the distribution channel is 22, and the division is 00. Use the delivery type Delivery w/o ref. The ship-to party 7777 receives 100 kg of material.
Only
The planned goods issue data is the current date + 2 days. Note the delivery number: ________________________________________________________ 2.
Creating the Transport Order For the goods to be transported from the warehouse to the shipping zone, a transport order must be created for the delivery. You can create this transport order in a subsequent function when processing the delivery, or during picking. Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
1.
SAP
SAP
Quality Inspection During Delivery
169
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
PLM400
Create the transport order and add the following data:
Only
011
Plant:
1100
Foreground/background:
System-guided
Adopt pick. quantity:
2
Recording Inspection Results and Usage Decision Record inspection results for partial lot 1 and complete the inspection lot with the usage decision.
Customer Complaint for Delivered Goods After your customer has received the goods, you receive a customer complaint. The customer complains about the poor quality of the delivered goods. 1.
Customer Complaint for Delivery
SAP
Notification type:__________________________
Use
Subject and Contact Person Enter the subject of the customer complaint. Use a suitable coding. In addition to the coding, you can also enter a detailed text for the customer complaint.
Only
Internal
You (PLM400-##) are the coordinator for processing customer complaints in your company. The customer complaint has high priority. Complete the notification, and then save.
Partner
2.
SAP
Create a customer complaint for the delivery from exercise Creating a Delivery. Which notification type do you use?
Use
Partner
Task 2:
Internal
3.
Warehouse number:
170
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution
Solution 10: QM in Sales Order Processing Task 1: Quality Inspection During Delivery You perform quality inspections during the delivery of goods, in accordance with the agreements that you have made with your customer. In this way, the goods can also be inspected for certain customer specifications.
Only
Creating a Delivery
Partner
Create a delivery for material T-FQ1##. The delivery should be performed without reference to an order. The goods are sent from shipping point 1100, the sales organization is 1020, the distribution channel is 22, and the division is 00. Use the delivery type Delivery w/o ref. The ship-to party 7777 receives 100 kg of material.
Use
The planned goods issue data is the current date + 2 days.
Internal
1.
Note the delivery number:
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
171
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
PLM400
________________________________________________________ a)
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document → Without Order Reference (VL01NO)
Field name or data type
Values
Shipping point
1100
Delivery type
Delivery w/o ref.
Field name or data type
Values
Sales org.
1020
Distribution channel
22
Division
00
Use
Partner
The following data is proposed due the settings in your user master record:
SAP Use Internal
Values
Planned GI
Current date +2 days
Material
T-FQ1##
Delivery quantity
100
Hint: Material T-FQ1## is managed in batches. The batch is found for the delivery item using the automatic batch search. During the following quality inspection, a partial lot is created for the batch. Save your delivery. Creating the Transport Order Continued on next page
172
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Field name or data type
Partner
In addition to the data for the delivery header, the data for the items in the delivery are also displayed in the overview. Enter the following data on the tab page Item overview:
SAP
Exit the initial screen by choosing the return key. The screen Create Delivery w/o Ref.: Overview appears. Enter the ship-to party 7777.
2.
Internal
Only
Enter the following data on the initial screen for the outbound delivery:
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution
For the goods to be transported from the warehouse to the shipping zone, a transport order must be created for the delivery. You can create this transport order in a subsequent function when processing the delivery, or during picking.
Warehouse number:
011
Plant:
1100
Foreground/background:
System-guided
Adopt pick. quantity:
2
a)
Change your delivery and create the transport order.
Partner
Use
Hint: You can also immediately create a transport order from the transaction for creating the delivery. The system first saves the delivery and then switches to the transport order.
SAP
SAP
The number of the delivery, which you last created, is display in the field Outbound Delivery. Exit the initial screen by choosing the return key. The overview screen for the delivery appears. Choose Subsequent functions → Create transport order..
Use
Partner
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document (VL02N)
Internal
Only
Create the transport order and add the following data:
Confirm the screen with Yes.
Only
Internal
On the Create Transport Order for Delivery: Initial Screen, enter the following data:
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
173
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
PLM400
Warehouse number
011
Plant
1100
Process Flow
System-guided
Adopt pick. quantity
2
Hint: When you use QM in sales and distribution, you can use the Quality info record: SD to control whether the goods issue can be posted in parallel with the quality inspection or only after the quality inspection has been completed (this means, when the usage decision is made). Confirm your entries by choosing the return key and then save.
SAP
SAP
3.
Use
Hint: If you make the setting Copy picking quantity: 2, the pick quantity is copied into the delivery as the delivered quantity and is posted to goods issue.
Internal
Only
Values
Partner
Field name or data type
Recording Inspection Results and Usage Decision
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
174
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution
Record inspection results for partial lot 1 and complete the inspection lot with the usage decision. a)
You can access results recording via Worklist - Results Recording (QE51N), or Results Recording for Delivery in SD (QE14). Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording (QE51N)
Values
Plant
1100
Material
T-FQ1##
Batch
FQ1##
Exit the selection screen by choosing the function key F8.
SAP
Task 2:
Use
After your customer has received the goods, you receive a customer complaint. The customer complains about the poor quality of the delivered goods.
Internal
1.
Customer Complaint for Delivery Create a customer complaint for the delivery from exercise Creating a Delivery. Which notification type do you use?
Partner
Customer Complaint for Delivered Goods
SAP
Record inspection results for partial lot 1 on the characteristic overview screen in the field Result, and save your entries. Switch from the results recording worklist to the usage decision for the inspection lot in the delivery. Make the usage decision and save your entries.
Use
Partner
Field name or data type
Internal
Only
On the selection screen, enter the following data on the tab page Material:
Only
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
175
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
PLM400
Notification type:__________________________ a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Notification → Create (QM01) Notification type Q1 is used for the customer complaint. On the Create Notification: Initial Screen, choose notification type Q1 and exit the initial screen by choosing the pushbutton Notification or by choosing Enter.
Only
Values
Delivery
8000....
Delivery item
10
Hint: If you enter the delivery item 900 001, you can also copy the batch to the customer complaint.
SAP Use
2.
Subject and Contact Person
Only
Internal
Enter the subject of the customer complaint. Use a suitable coding. In addition to the coding, you can also enter a detailed text for the customer complaint.
Partner
You can define in Customizing for the notification type, which initial screen is called up when you create a notification.
SAP
Exit the screen by choosing Enter. The screen Create Notification: Customer Complaint appears. The data from the delivery item was copied to the notification.
Use
Partner
Field name or data type
Internal
Since you have to record the customer complaint for a certain item in a delivery, you must enter this data on the following screen:
Continued on next page
176
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: QM Tasks in Sales and Distribution
You (PLM400-##) are the coordinator for processing customer complaints in your company. The customer complaint has high priority. Complete the notification, and then save. a)
On the tab page Complaint, enter data for the customer. Use coding for the subject. You can include customer data in the field Description, as well as in the long text field.
Only Partner
Values
Priority
High
Coordinator
PLM400-##
SAP
Save the notification.
Field name or data type
Use
Screen area Execution
SAP
The second partner for this customer complaint is responsible for processing the complaint. Enter the following data on the tab page Internal processing:
Internal
A partner for this message has already been entered on the Customer tab page. In this case, this is the customer. This data was copied from the returned delivery.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
177
Unit 6: Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use QM in the sales processing and service areas • Understand QM-relevant processes for a sales order and for a delivery • Use quality notifications to process customer complaints
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
178
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Unit Summary
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Use QM in the sales processing and service areas • Understand QM-relevant processes for a sales order and for a delivery • Use quality notifications to process customer complaints
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
179
Unit Summary
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
180
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
Customer-specific tolerance specifications can be taken into consideration when performing a goods issue inspection. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
2.
True False
Internal
Only
□ □
Customer returns can be subjected to a returns inspection. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
3.
True False
Inspection results from the goods issue inspection cannot be included on the quality certificate. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
SAP
True False
SAP
□ □
Use
Partner
□ □
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
181
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
Customer-specific tolerance specifications can be taken into consideration when performing a goods issue inspection. Answer: True
2.
Internal
Only
Customer-specific inspection characteristic specifications are considered in accordance with the specifications in the inspection plan. Customer returns can be subjected to a returns inspection.
When the customer return is posted, an inspection lot can be created automatically. Special inspection plans for returns can be used. 3.
Inspection results from the goods issue inspection cannot be included on the quality certificate.
SAP
The results of an inspection during production and the results of a goods issue inspection can both be included on the quality certificate.
SAP
Answer: False
Use
Partner
Answer: True
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
182
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 7 Unit Overview
Partner
In quality planning, you define specifications and processes on a long-term basis as master records. Quality planning covers inspection planning and the basic data required for inspection planning.
Use
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP
Explain and use logistics master data in quality planning Explain and use the basic data in quality management Explain the structure and use of inspection plans
SAP
• • •
Internal
Only
Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
Only
Internal
Lesson: Logistics Master Data in Quality Planning............................. 184 Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data .............................. 192 Exercise 11: Quality Planning................................................. 207
Partner
Use
Unit Contents
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
183
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
Lesson: Logistics Master Data in Quality Planning Lesson Overview In inspection planning, logistics master data is used as well as the QM-specific master data. This lesson gives an overview of this data.
Lesson Objectives
Only
•
Explain and use logistics master data in quality planning
Partner
Business Example Cross-application master data must be used in quality planning. The required QM-relevant settings are a quality management area of responsibility.
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Use
Logistics Master Data in Quality Planning
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 79: Sections of Quality Management
184
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Logistics Master Data in Quality Planning
Quality Management is divided into:
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Quality Planning Quality Inspections Quality Certificates Quality Notifications Quality Control Test Equipment Management Stability Study
Internal
• • • • • • •
Figure 80: Quality Planning Functions
Use
You use the following data for quality planning:
•
2005/Q2
General master data in logistics Inspection planning data (for example, inspection plans, master recipes and material specifications) QM-specific basic data (for example, master inspection characteristics, inspection methods, sampling procedures)
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
185
Only
Internal
• •
Partner
In quality planning, you define information and processes on a long-term basis as master records. Quality planning provides the basis for inspection processing.
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
SAP
General master data is made up of cross-application data and QM-specific data. Cross-application data is maintained in most cases in other components of the SAP system.
Partner
Use
Cross-application data used in inspection planning includes:
Internal
Material master Vendor master record Batch classification Customer info record Quality documents
Only
• • • • •
QM-specific data used in inspection planning includes: • • • •
186
Quality Info Record: Procurement Quality Info Record Sales Material Specification Inspection Plan
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
SAP
Master data is data that does not change over a long-period of time. Master data contains information that is required on a regular basis, the master data for a vendor, for example, contains the name, address and bank details.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 81: Logistics master data - Overview
2005/Q2
Lesson: Logistics Master Data in Quality Planning
Internal
Only
PLM400
The quality information record procurement contains details for a specific material/vendor combination. For example, it specifies:
SAP
The quality information record sales contains details for a specific material/customer combination. For example, it specifies: When and how an inspection is to take place What documents are relevant for a delivery etc.
This information is used in inspection processing for planning and control purposes.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
187
Only
Internal
• • •
Partner
Use
• •
The delivery quantity, for which the vendor is released The date, up to which the vendor is released for the relevant product The QM system and quality documents that are to be used by the vendor or are to accompany the delivery Is an electronic quality data exchange planned? etc.
SAP
• • •
Use
Partner
Figure 82: QM-Relevant Information Records
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
SAP
The documents are placed in the document management system and are assigned accordingly. The assignments are made according to operational area.
Use
•
Quality assurance agreements (document type Q01): Quality info record, procurement (reference to material, (revision level), vendor, plant) Technical delivery terms (document type Q02):
•
– –
Additional data in the material master Documents for the vendor master record
Only
Internal
–
These documents are relevant for QM in sales: •
Quality assurance agreements (document type Q03):
•
– Quality info record sales (reference to sales organization and customer) Quality specifications (document type Q04): –
188
Assigned to the material in the quality info record sales (reference to customer, sales organization, material).
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
These documents are used for procurement operations this means for requests and orders:
SAP
Technical delivery terms and quality assurance agreements are required when a vendor delivers goods to your company or when you deliver goods to customers.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 83: Quality Documents for Supply Relationships
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Logistics Master Data in Quality Planning
Material Specification
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 84: Material Specification
SAP
You can use the material specification to define inspection specifications for a material that are valid across all clients.
Use
The material specification provides an inspection specification that can be created and maintained with a minimum of effort and that can supplement or replace the inspection plan at plant level. The material specification is integrated in the product structure tree (Transaction CC04).
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
189
Only
Internal
You can create a time reference for the material specification. This allows you to plan changes to a material specification that are to be made at a specific time. You can activate the planned changes manually or using a job.
Partner
You assign the required master inspection characteristics to the material in the material specification. In addition, you can pre-schedule a result data origin for the characteristics (such as date from a mobile result recording).
SAP
In the QM component, you can inspect both on the basis of inspection plans, and on the basis of material specifications that are valid company-wide.
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
The link between master inspection characteristics and class characteristics enables inspection results from a quality inspection to be included in the batch valuation.
SAP
•
Use
The results are forwarded during the inspection completion with the usage decision or during the inspection point evaluation to the class characteristics. The batch valuation also takes place during the inspection completion The material specification is not absolutely necessary to forward inspection results from QM into the class characteristics. You can also carry out a batch valuation without material specifications. A general prerequisite for carrying out a batch valuation with the inspection results from QM is the link between the master inspection characteristics and the class characteristics of the batch class.
190
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Partner
•
The material that is inspected with a material specification must be handled in batches The material must be assigned to a batch class (“Classification” tab page in material master) The master inspection characteristics that are used must be linked to class characteristics when the inspection lot is created
SAP
For the inspection results to be included in the batch valuation:
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 85: Material Specification with Batch Valuation
PLM400
Lesson: Logistics Master Data in Quality Planning
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain and use logistics master data in quality planning
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
191
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data Lesson Overview Inspection plans contain information on how the quality inspection of the materials is to be performed. The necessary specifications, such as the sample size and the inspection characteristics, are created in the system as QM basic data.
Only
Internal
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
• •
Explain and use the basic data in quality management Explain the structure and use of inspection plans
In your enterprise, inspection plans are used to determine the inspection criteria for materials and products. In inspection planning, the required basic data and the inspection plans are created and processed.
Use
Inspection Planning
SAP
SAP
Business Example
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 86: Inspection planning
192
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
In inspection planning, you create material-related information that is used when this material is inspected. You use inspection plans to describe how a quality inspection should be processed for one or more materials. You define in the inspection plan in which order individual inspection operations should be performed and which inspection characteristics should be inspected using which specifications.
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
In the inspection plan you determine the inspection operations, the characteristics to be checked for each inspection operation and the text equipment to be used. The inspection plan used in QM is similar to the routing and the rate routing, as well as the master recipe. There are only slight differences between these task list types with regard to the inspection plan functions.
SAP
SAP
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 87: Task list types
Only
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
193
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
in production:
•
– Routing (task list type N) – Rate routing (task list type R) – Reference operation set [no material reference] (task list type S) in plant maintenance:
•
– Equipment task list (task list type E) – PM task list (task list type A) in process manufacturing:
•
– Master recipe (task list type 2) In quality management: – –
Inspection plan (task list type Q) Reference operation set [no material reference] (task list type S)
The task list has a similar basic structure in all components. However, the additional information in a task list varies from one component to another.
SAP
SAP
You can include the characteristics you require in the different task list types.
Use
Partner
•
Internal
Only
In the SAP System, the following task list types are used for planning purposes:
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 88: Inspection Plan Structure
194
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
All task lists in the SAP System, including the inspection plan in QM, have a multi level structure: • • •
Header information Operation information (inspection operations) inspection characteristics
Only
You can cumulate several task lists in a task list group. For example, in the task list group “goods receipt inspection” you can cumulate the relevant inspection plans for the model inspection, the preliminary series inspection and the series inspection.
You use inspection characteristics to determine what is to be inspected and according to which specifications the inspection is to be performed. Inspection characteristics are subordinated to the inspection operations and are indicated by a number within an operation
Use
Partner
Through the operations individual inspection steps in an inspection plan will have to be described. You determine for which inspection site a specific inspection takes place
Internal
In the task list header the place the data that is valid for the entire inspection plan (such as task list usage, material assignment, status, parameter for dynamics, definition of the inspection points, activities for changeability).
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 89: Using Task Lists
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
195
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
You can create task lists for different purposes, for example:
Basic Data for Inspection Planning
Use
This means that you can create several task lists with different inspection operations and inspection characteristics for the same material (or the same combinations of material-vendor/manufacturer or material-customer).
Internal
Only
Model series Preliminary series Goods issue Performing an audit Repetitive manufacturing and so on.
Partner
• • • • • •
SAP
SAP
To create an inspection plan, you need different building blocks of data that are stored in the SAP system as basic data. You can copy or reference this data in the inspection plan.
196
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 90: Basic Data for Inspection Planning
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
The following data is available:
Use
Partner
Only
Sampling procedures Sampling schemes Dynamic modification rules Catalogs (coding) Test equipment (production resources/tools) Master inspection characteristics Inspection methods Work centers Reference operation sets
Internal
• • • • • • • • •
Partner
Use
SAP
SAP
Figure 91: Sample Determination (Basic Data)
• • •
Whether an inspection is required (skip) The inspection severity (for example, tightened, normal, reduced, or inspection skip) The quantity to be inspected
These rules are stored in the SAP system as sampling procedures, sampling schemes and dynamic modification rules, and are used to determine samples.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
197
Only
Internal
When a inspection lot creation takes place, the system uses predefined rules to determine:
PLM400
Internal
Figure 92: Sample Determination (Procedure)
The information obtained from inspections is updated in the quality level. •
SAP
•
Sampling procedures are procedures that determine the sample size in an inspection. The sampling procedure also defines the type of valuation that is to be used for recording results (such as attributive, variable, manual, etc.). Dynamic modification rules are basic data records that contain the definition of the inspection stages and the conditions for the inspection stage change. Stage changes take place depending on the inspection results for the inspection lots and inspection characteristics, (that is depending on whether they are accepted or rejected).
198
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Partner
Use
•
SAP
•
The quality level is a data record in the SAP System, in which the inspection stages for future inspections are defined. The current quality level specifies if an inspection is required and how it is to take place. On the basis of this information you determine the scope of the inspection for the current inspection and the inspection level for the next inspection. The quality level can be maintained on the basis of characteristics, inspection lots or inspection types. You can delete the quality levels you no longer need using an executable program (report). You can enter a reset period in days in the dynamic modification rule. After this period, the quality level begins again with the first inspection stage given in the dynamic modification rule. You can evaluate the quality level. You can display the dynamic modification history (either lot-based or inspection type-based) from within the quality level.
Use
Partner
Only
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
Partner SAP Use
You can freely combine some of the codes in a catalog into code groups.
The catalog type defines the use of a catalog (for example, for defects recording, tasks, and so on).
Use
Catalogs contain a number of content-related codes that enable qualitative descriptions of problems (in text form) to be encoded and processed in the system in machine form. Typical contents of a catalog include characteristic attributes, usage decisions, tasks and defect types.
Internal
Only
Internal
Figure 93: Catalog
You create catalogs to simplify and improve the recording of data, to describe problems that occur, and to standardize the evaluation of this information.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
199
Only
2005/Q2
Partner
You can either assign catalogs directly to the inspection characteristics or define them for general events (for example, to record defects during results recording).
SAP
If required, you can select codes from (different) code groups, or entire code groups and combine them to form selected sets.
PLM400
Internal
Figure 94: Test equipment (PRT)
When you plan an inspection, you can assign production resources/tools (PRT). The QM component differentiates between the following production resources/tools:
•
You can assign production resources and tools at operation level in an inspection plan. You can then link from the inspection characteristic to one of these production resources and tools.
200
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Partner
Use
•
Materials (production resources/tools that are maintained in the material master; for example, plug gauges) These materials are used in materials management, for example in inventory management, material requirements planning and procurement. Documents (production resources/tools that are managed in the Document Management System; for example, sketches, CAD drawings) Equipment, (production resources/tools that are managed in the equipment master and that are subject to maintenance, for example, measuring equipment or precision tools). Other production resources/tools that are managed as master data (for example, smaller tools) A PRT master record is created that contains basic data and location data.
SAP
SAP
•
Use
Partner
Only
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
SAP
•
Reference operation sets: Task lists that contain predefined operations and characteristics, but have no material assigned. Master inspection characteristics: Inspection characteristics that are defined to be used frequently in inspection plans, or that are to be evaluated for all inspection plans.
Internal
You can create master inspection characteristics in several languages. You can create a where-used list for master inspection characteristics and can replace versions centrally. Inspection methods: Inspection methods describe how a characteristic is to be inspected. They are created as basic data records and assigned to the inspection characteristics. You can assign several inspection methods to a master inspection characteristic.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
201
Only
Master inspection characteristics help to improve and standardize inspection planning. When creating inspection plans, you can include master inspection characteristics and can create your own inspection characteristics that are specific to the inspection plan.
Partner
Use
•
SAP
In the SAP system, you can copy the following reusable data blocks into the inspection plan and then change them if necessary, or you can reference them in the plan, so that any changes that are made to the templates are also made in this plan:
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 95: Master inspection characteristics, inspection method, reference operation set
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
You can create a where-used list for inspection methods and can replace method versions centrally. In addition, you can assign documents from the Document Management System (DMS) to the inspection method at version level. This way it is possible to link different documents (such as MS Office documents, Internet documents and so on).
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 96: Work center
Use Internal
Machines People Production lines Processing centers
QM is linked to the Controlling via the work centers. The information contained in the work centers can be used for scheduling and costing purposes. Work centers are included in the inspection plan at operation level.
202
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
• • • •
Partner
A work center is an organizational unit that defines where an inspection is to take place and who is to perform it. The work center has a specific capacity available. The work carried out at and by the work center is valuated using settlement records that are determined by cost centers and activity types. The following can be defined as work centers:
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 97: Basic Data in the Inspection Plan
SAP
The information at characteristic level overrides the data stored at header level.
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
The inspection planning activities and the release of the inspection plan can be subject to an approval procedure with the help of the engineering change management function (for example, as required by the GMP or FDA).
SAP
Basic data is assigned at different levels in the inspection plan (at header, operation, and characteristic levels). You can assign such information as the dynamic modification rule at header level or characteristic level.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
203
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
Features of Inspection Planning
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
You can distribute inspection methods, master inspection characteristics, and code groups and the associated codes, from one source system to one or more target systems using ALE (Application Link Enabling).
Use
QL31 for inspection method distribution QL21 for master inspection characteristic distribution QL41 for code group distribution
In addition, the distribution of changes to master data can be triggered automatically in the background from the relevant change transactions if this function is activated in Customizing (QM → Basic Settings → Maintain Settings at Client Level). You can find further information in Customizing under QM → Environment → Tools → Distribute ALE Master Data. You can use transaction QL11 to distribute material inspection settings. DXWB (Data Transfer Workbench). The data transfer workbench (transaction SXDA) supports you in transferring task lists from external systems.
204
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
• • •
Partner
These three objects can be distributed directly using transactions:
SAP
SAP
Figure 98: Distribution of QM Master Data
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
You can find additional information in Customizing under Quality Management → Quality Planning → Inspection Planning → General → Copy Inspection Plan from External System.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 99: Approval Procedure
SAP
To use the approval procedure in the inspection plan (important for the process industry, you define a change rule and a change type in the inspection plan header.
Use
If you inspect with a material specification in addition to an inspection plan, you can use the material authorization group to define that single approval is required for the inspection lot, despite the existence of an approved inspection plan.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
205
Only
Internal
The user authorizations must be maintained so that you can use the authorization objects. You can use transaction PFCG to do this.
Partner
To use the approval procedure in the inspection lot (for a work order), you define an identifier for this approval procedure in the material authorization group.
SAP
You can implement typical approval procedures that are required in the process industry to change master data.
PLM400
206
2005/Q2
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
Exercise 11: Quality Planning Exercise Objectives
Only
Task 1:
You are responsible for inspection planning in your company. Inspection criteria are defined for materials, parts, and products using inspection characteristics. As a result, you use master inspection characteristics to standardize inspection plans. In this way, you promote systematic, uniform, and rational inspection planning.
Use
Creating an Inspection Characteristic as a Master Record
Creating a Qualitative Master Inspection Characteristic
Use
SAP
2.
Internal
Note the settings for the control indicators of the characteristic: Continued on next page
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
207
Only
A sampling procedure should be used to determine the respective inspection scope. It is important that your goods are always packaged properly. Therefore, this characteristic must always be inspected and the number of nonconforming units determined. Summarized results recording should be used. The number of units inspected during results recording must correspond to the planned number of units to be inspected. If the characteristic is rejected during inspection, you want to enter additional information for the characteristic. The characteristic should always be printed on the inspection instruction.
Partner
Inspection characteristics are generally defined as qualitative (for example, "product color") or quantitative (for example, "weight") characteristics. Depending on this characteristic type, additional data is defined for the inspection characteristic.
SAP
1.
You need a qualitative master inspection characteristic to inspect packaging materials. Create this master inspection characteristic with the identifier CH01-## for plant 1000 and the short text Packaging OK. Enter Group ## in the Search field to simplify the search for the master inspection characteristic. The characteristic should be referenced in inspection plans.
2005/Q2
Internal
Business Example
Partner
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create inspection characteristics as master records (master inspection characteristics) • Extend existing inspection plans and include master inspection characteristics
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
Type [ ] Charac. attribute Sample [ ] Sampling procedure
[ ] Additive sample
[ ] SPC characteristic
[ ] Destructive inspection
Only
Internal
[ ] Record no. of defects
( ) Summ. recording
( ) Required char.
( ) Single result
( ) Optional char.
( ) No charac. rec.
( ) After accept.
( ) Classed recording
( ) After rejection
Use
Partner
Results confirmation
Use
Docu. confirmation
( ) Scope not fixed
( ) No documentation required
( ) Fixed scope
( ) Docu. if rejected
( ) Smaller scope
( ) Docu. required
Partner
Insp. scope
( ) Larger scope
Internal
Miscellaneous [ ] Long-term inspection [ ] Scrap share/ q-score
Only
[ ] RR change docs [ ] Assign test equipment
Continued on next page
208
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
SAP
SAP
[ ] Defects recording
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
Print ( ) Print ( ) Do not print ( ) Do not print at skip
Only
Task 2: Using Inspection Characteristics in the Inspection Plan
1.
Enhancing an Existing Inspection Plan
SAP
2.
Referencing a Master Inspection Characteristic
Use
Sampling procedure Fix5-0 should be used to determine the sample.
Only
Internal
Save the changed inspection plan.
Partner
To define inspection criteria, you require inspection characteristics in the newly created operation for the inspection plan. Reference master inspection characteristic CH01-##.
SAP
You want to add an extra inspection operation to an existing goods receipt inspection plan for material T-BQ3##. Change this plan in plant 1000 and create an inspection operation with the description Packaging inspection. Use control key QM02 for this operation. You do not have to assign a certain work center.
Use
Partner
You can use master inspection characteristics to standardize inspection plans. You can also create additional inspection characteristics at any time in an inspection plan.
Internal
Hint: The master inspection characteristic can only be used in task lists if it has the status Released.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
209
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
Solution 11: Quality Planning Task 1: Creating an Inspection Characteristic as a Master Record Inspection characteristics are generally defined as qualitative (for example, "product color") or quantitative (for example, "weight") characteristics. Depending on this characteristic type, additional data is defined for the inspection characteristic. a)
Creating a Qualitative Master Inspection Characteristic You need a qualitative master inspection characteristic to inspect packaging materials. Create this master inspection characteristic with the identifier CH01-## for plant 1000 and the short text Packaging OK. Enter Group ## in the Search field to simplify the search for the master inspection characteristic. The characteristic should be referenced in inspection plans.
SAP Use Internal
Type
Only
[ ] Charac. attribute Sample [ ] Sampling procedure
[ ] Additive sample
[ ] SPC characteristic
[ ] Destructive inspection
[ ] Record no. of defects
Continued on next page
210
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
Note the settings for the control indicators of the characteristic:
SAP
A sampling procedure should be used to determine the respective inspection scope. It is important that your goods are always packaged properly. Therefore, this characteristic must always be inspected and the number of nonconforming units determined. Summarized results recording should be used. The number of units inspected during results recording must correspond to the planned number of units to be inspected. If the characteristic is rejected during inspection, you want to enter additional information for the characteristic. The characteristic should always be printed on the inspection instruction.
Use
Partner
2.
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Planning → Basic Data → Inspection Characteristic → Create (QS21)
Internal
Only
1.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
Results confirmation ( ) Summ. recording
( ) Required char.
( ) Single result
( ) Optional char.
( ) No charac. rec.
( ) After accept.
( ) Classed recording
( ) After rejection
Partner
Insp. scope
Docu. confirmation
( ) Scope not fixed
( ) No documentation required
( ) Fixed scope
( ) Docu. if rejected
( ) Smaller scope
( ) Docu. required
Internal
Only
[ ] Defects recording
( ) Larger scope
Use
Miscellaneous [ ] Long-term inspection
SAP
SAP
[ ] Scrap share/ q-score [ ] RR change docs
Partner
Use
[ ] Assign test equipment Print ( ) Print ( ) Do not print at skip Hint: The master inspection characteristic can only be used in task lists if it has the status Released. a)
Creating a Qualitative Master Inspection Characteristic Enter the following data on the initial screen:
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
211
Only
Internal
( ) Do not print
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
Field name or data type
Values
Plant
1000
Master inspection characteristic
CH01-##
Valid from
Current date
Only Partner
Field name or data type
Values
Status
Released
Internal
By choosing the F5 function key, the pushbutton Master inspection characteristic, or enter, the general data for the master inspection characteristic appears. In the screen area Control data, set the indicator Qualitative charac. and enter the following data in the screen area General information:
Reference characteristic Packaging OK
Search field
Group ##
Use
Short text
SAP Use
Partner
Type [ ] Charac. attribute
[ ] Additive sample
[ ] SPC characteristic
[ ] Destructive inspection
Only
Internal
Sample [x] Sampling procedure [ ] Record no. of defects Results confirmation (x) Summ. recording
(x) Required char.
( ) Single result
( ) Optional char.
Continued on next page
212
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
SAP
By choosing enter, or the pushbutton Control indicators, the control indicators are displayed for a qualitative characteristic. Set the indicators in the following way:
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
Results confirmation ( ) No charac. rec.
( ) After accept.
( ) Classed recording
( ) After rejection
Insp. scope
Docu. confirmation
( ) Scope not fixed
( ) No documentation required
(x) Fixed scope
(x) Docu. if rejected
( ) Smaller scope
( ) Docu. required
Partner
( ) Larger scope Miscellaneous
Use
[ ] Long-term inspection [ ] Scrap share/ q-score [ ] RR change docs
SAP
SAP
[ ] Assign test equipment Print
Use
( ) Do not print
Hint: When you have edited the first page of control indicators, you can access the second page by choosing enter. When you have edited the control indicators, you return to the general data for the master inspection characteristic. Save your entries.
Continued on next page
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
213
Only
Internal
( ) Do not print at skip
Partner
( * ) Print
2005/Q2
Internal
Only
[ ] Defects recording
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
Task 2: Using Inspection Characteristics in the Inspection Plan You can use master inspection characteristics to standardize inspection plans. You can also create additional inspection characteristics at any time in an inspection plan. 1.
Enhancing an Existing Inspection Plan
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
214
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
You want to add an extra inspection operation to an existing goods receipt inspection plan for material T-BQ3##. Change this plan in plant 1000 and create an inspection operation with the description Packaging inspection. Use control key QM02 for this operation. You do not have to assign a certain work center. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Planning → Inspection Planning → Inspection Plan → Change (QP02)
Values
Material
T-BQ3##
Plant
1000 Hint: There are two inspection plans for the material T-BQ3##. Select the plan with the group counter 1. This plan is to be used for the goods receipt.
SAP Use
Partner
Field name or data type
Values QM02
Description
Packaging inspection
Hint: A new operation is defined in the inspection plan using these entries. However, this operation does not contain any inspection characteristics. You must define these for each operation in another step. 2.
Referencing a Master Inspection Characteristic
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
215
Only
Internal
Work center Control key
SAP
The screen Change Inspection Plan: Task List Overview appears. Select the inspection plan with the group counter 1 and the short text WE Neonröhren / GR Fluorescent lamp and exit the screen by choosing the Operations pushbutton. The operation overview for the inspection plan appears. Create another operation with the following data.
Use
Partner
Field name or data type
Internal
Only
The screen Change Inspection Plan: Initial Screen appears. Enter the following data:
Unit 7: Functions in Detail - Quality Planning
PLM400
To define inspection criteria, you require inspection characteristics in the newly created operation for the inspection plan. Reference master inspection characteristic CH01-##. Sampling procedure Fix5-0 should be used to determine the sample. Save the changed inspection plan. Select the operation you just created in the inspection plan. Then choose the pushbutton Inspection characteristics or the F7 function key to access the characteristic overview for the new operation.
Partner
Enter the identifier CH01-## in the field Master inspection characteristic and choose enter. The Sample tab page for the inspection characteristic then appears as a result of the control indicators in master inspection characteristic CH01-##. You enter sampling procedure Fix5-0 in the field Sampling procedure.
Internal
Only
a)
By choosing enter, you can go back to the characteristic overview screen.
Use
Save the changed inspection plan.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
216
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Planning and QM Basic Data
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain and use the basic data in quality management • Explain the structure and use of inspection plans
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
217
Unit Summary
PLM400
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Explain and use logistics master data in quality planning • Explain and use the basic data in quality management • Explain the structure and use of inspection plans
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
218
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
Quality documents can be stored using document management. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Only
The material specification is not integrated in the product structure. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Partner
□ □ 3.
True False
The material specification can only be used for materials managed in batches.
Internal
2.
True False
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
SAP
True False
The inspection characteristics are used to determine what is to be inspected. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Use
5.
True False
Partner
□ □
The sampling procedure defines how the sample size is to be determined. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
6.
True False
The following QM basic data can be distributed to other systems using ALE (Application Link Enabling): Choose the correct answer(s).
□ □ □ □
2005/Q2
A B C D
Master inspection characteristics Sampling procedure Inspection setup in the materials Dynamic modification rules
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
219
Only
Internal
□ □
SAP
4.
Use
□ □
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
Quality documents can be stored using document management. Answer: True There a different document types available for the quality documents.
Only
The material specification is not integrated in the product structure. Answer: False
3.
The material specification can only be used for materials managed in batches. Answer: False
4.
The inspection characteristics are used to determine what is to be inspected.
SAP
SAP
The material specification can be used as a simplified inspection specification for all materials.
Use
Partner
In addition to the inspection plans, the material specification is also integrated in the product structure (transaction CC04).
Internal
2.
Master inspection characteristics or characteristics that are created in an inspection plan can be used for the determination of the inspection specifications. The sampling procedure defines how the sample size is to be determined. Answer: True The sampling procedure is used to define the sample size and perform the valuation. 6.
The following QM basic data can be distributed to other systems using ALE (Application Link Enabling): Answer: A, C Automatic or manual distribution using ALE is possible for master inspection characteristics and for the inspection setup in the materials.
220
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
5.
Partner
Use
Answer: True
Unit 8 Unit Overview
Partner
In this unit, you learn about the different types of quality inspection. The unit covers inspection lot processing with defects recording, inspection lot processing with results recording, and sample management.
Use
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP Use
Partner
Unit Contents Lesson: The Inspection Lot........................................................ 222 Lesson: Inspection Lot Creation .................................................. 228 Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion ............................ 236 Exercise 12: Quality Inspections ............................................. 253 Exercise 13: Copy Inspection Results Function in Inspection Processing....................................................................... 261 Lesson: Sample Management .................................................... 268 Exercise 14: Quality Inspection/Sample Management .................... 277
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
221
Only
Internal
Describe the creation of inspection lots Explain the process flow of a quality inspection Explain how the inspection specifications are determined Explain the steps in inspection lot creation Describe the processes in results recording and defects recording Complete the inspection lot with the usage decision Explain the processes involved in the copy inspection results function Explain the objects used in sample management. Use sample management in inspection planning Describe the inspection process using sample management
SAP
• • • • • • • • • •
Internal
Only
Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Lesson: The Inspection Lot Lesson Overview The inspection lot is the central object used for inspection processing. From an inspection lot, it is possible to access all information that is related to an inspection.
Only
Describe the creation of inspection lots Explain the process flow of a quality inspection
A quality inspection is performed in accordance with specifications from quality planning. Inspection lots are created automatically for goods movements or production orders.
SAP
SAP
Inspection Process Flow
Use
Business Example
• •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
Lesson Objectives
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 100: Quality Inspection Functions
222
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: The Inspection Lot
Quality inspection includes the following functions: •
•
Use
Partner
• •
Internal
Only
•
Inspection lot processing: During inspection lot processing, you carry out the inspections that have been predefined in the planning stages. In the SAP System, the term inspection lot (not inspection request) refers to a request to carry out an inspection. Results recording: Recording of results for the planned inspection characteristics Defects recording: Recording defect data in the form of defect attributes (defect codes, descriptions) Sample management: Processing and managing physical samples Interface to external systems
SAP
SAP
The inspection lot documents the request to carry out an inspection. The inspection lot comprises information from inspection planning or the inspection specification (inspection plan, material specification). This means that when the inspection lot is created, the current specifications are copied into the inspection lot. Changes that are made to the specifications retroactively do not affect an existing inspection lot. The inspection lot is identified by a unique number in the system. You record the inspection results and any costs associated with a QM order (if required) in the inspection lot.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
223
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 101: Inspection lot processing
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
You complete the inspection lot with the usage decision.
Use
Only
Internal
Goods receipt Production order in production Delivery to a customer Goods movements within a company Deadline monitoring of materials managed in batches (recurring inspections) Manual lot creation etc.
Partner
• • • • • • •
SAP
SAP
An inspection lot can be generated in different areas of your company as a result of different events, for example:
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 102: Inspection Lot Creation
224
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: The Inspection Lot
Partner
Only
Internal Use
Figure 103: Inspection Lot Origin and Inspection Type
You can define different variants (inspection type) for inspection lot processing depending on the origin and source of the inspection lot.
SAP Use
Inspection lot for a goods receipt Inspection lot for a manufacturing order Inspection lot for a delivery (in shipping)
The inspection type defines how an inspection is to take place. Each inspection type is assigned to an inspection lot origin. There can be several inspection types for one inspection lot origin. The following inspection types, for example, are available for the inspection lot origin "Goods receipt for a purchase order": • •
Model inspection Normal inspection
You make the settings for these inspection types in Customizing. You can overwrite this setting with material-specific data in the inspection setup (QM view of the material master). You can also modify individual settings in inspection planning.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
225
Only
Internal
• • •
Partner
The inspection lot origin describes the source of the inspection lot. The SAP System contains predefined inspection lots. For example, the following inspection lot origins are available:
SAP
The assignment inspection types to inspection lot origins allows you to manage different origins and triggering events for the inspection lots.
PLM400
Figure 104: Sequence of Inspection Lot Processing
ARCH (Lot archived), SPCO (Stock posting completed), SPST (Stock posting started), BASG (Batch assigned), BRRQ (Batch record required), PRII (Inspection instruction printed), PRSI (Sample-drawing instr. printed), RREC (Results confirmed), CRTD (Created), DEF (Defects were recorded), REL (Released), LTCA (Lot cancelled), LTIN (Long-term inspection), CCTD (Insp. characteristics created), CHCR (Characterist. must be created), ICCO (Inspection close completed), LKD (Lot locked), CALC (Sample calculated), UD (Usage decision has been made), PREQ (Plan/specific. required), PASG (Plan/specific. assigned), CROK (Certificate receipt confirmed).
SAP
SAP
•
Use
Partner
During inspection processing, an inspection lot undergoes different processing stages. These stages are documented by the status management function, for example:
Internal
Only
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
226
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: The Inspection Lot
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the creation of inspection lots • Explain the process flow of a quality inspection
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
227
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Lot Creation Lesson Overview An important step in inspection lot processing is the definition of the inspection specifications. These inspection specifications can be adapted to suit the situation.
Only
Explain how the inspection specifications are determined Explain the steps in inspection lot creation
Products, in various variations, are produced. The inspection specifications must be different for each variation.
Inspection Specification Determination
Use
Business Example
• •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
Lesson Objectives
SAP
SAP
When an inspection lot is created for a material (or for a combination of material/vendor/manufacturer or material/customer), the system selects the corresponding inspection specifications. The specifications from the variant configuration or batch determination take precedence over those from the material specification and the latter, in turn, take precedence over the specifications from the task list.
228
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 105: Inspection Lot Creation
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Lot Creation
Serial number information from a goods movement (goods receipt, from production) is copied to the inspection lot at lot creation. Serial numbers that are assigned to a production order can be included in the inspection lot using the inspection lot origin 03 (from production). During results recording, serial numbers are proposed.
Only
You can link the release of the inspection lot to an approval procedure. This means that the inspection lot must be explicitly released before it can be processed. The inspection lot is created, but it is not available for results recording.
Partner
Use
Changes in the inspection lot are dependent on the inspection lot status. Once a lot has been created, for example, any changes made to a task list are not automatically included in the inspection lot. Once you have made the usage decision, you cannot make any other changes to the inspection lot (exception: long-term characteristics)
Internal
The inspection specifications (such as sample size n, accepted number c, rejected number c) are determined based on the lot size to be inspected (N) and the lot is released for processing. The inspection lot is then released for processing and the shop papers (such as the inspection instruction) can be printed at the predefined work centers.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 106: Inspection specifications from the variant configuration
You can use the variant configuration to describe complex products that can exist in several variants (for example, in the automotive industry). You create the variants using a configurable material. There is a super bill of material (BOM) that contains all possible components and a super task list containing all possible operations. You
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
229
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
assign characteristics to the configurable material using a class. These characteristics describe a specific variant. Object dependencies control the selection of the correct components and operations from the super BOM and the super task list. You can use class characteristics from the variant configuration as a source for inspection specifications in the inspection lot. As a prerequisite, each class characteristic must be linked to one master inspection characteristic. In addition, the "Inspect by configuratn" indicator in the QM view of the material master must be set.
Only SAP
SAP
Object dependencies: Mutual dependency between objects. This dependency can exist, for example, between characteristics and characteristic values, for example, that a 21-gear assembly is allowed for a racing bicycle. Object dependencies can also be used to control the selection of BOM items and routing operations in variant configuration.
Use
Partner
If there are inspection specifications from both the variant configuration and the task list or material specification that are relevant for the characteristic, the specifications from the variant configuration take precedence over those from the material specification. The specifications from the latter, in turn, take precedence over those from the task list.
Internal
You can inspect by configuration for inspection lot origin 01 (GR inspection at goods receipt for a purchase order), 03 (in-process inspection for a production order), and 04 (inspection at goods receipt from production).
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 107: Valuation in Configuration
230
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Lot Creation
If a class characteristic in the configuration is not valuated and if the associated master inspection characteristic is defined as a required characteristic in the task list or material specification, this characteristic becomes an optional characteristic for the inspection. If a class characteristic in the configuration is not valuated and if the associated master inspection characteristic is defined as a required characteristic in the task list or material specification, this characteristic remains a required characteristic for the inspection.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Class characteristics that are valuated for the configuration, but which do not exist in the task list or material specification, are also inspected. The characteristic is assigned to the last operation in the inspection lot.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
231
Only
Internal
Your customer wants to inspect an additional characteristic that is not contained in the task list. To automatically include this characteristic, the corresponding class characteristic from configuration must be linked to the master inspection characteristic.
Partner
Use
SAP
SAP
Figure 108: Additional characteristic from variant configuration
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
SAP Use
Prerequisite for including inspection specifications from batch determination:
•
•
232
Each class characteristic from batch determination that is to be included in the inspection lot must be linked to a master inspection characteristic. In addition, the Inspect by batch indicator must be set for the inspection type in the QM view of the material master. This indicator is valid for inspection types that are assigned to the inspection lot origins 10, 11 and 12. The Inspect with specification or the Inspect with task list indicator (or both) must be set for the inspection type in the QM view of the material master.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Partner
If there are inspection specifications from both batch determination and the task list or material specification that are relevant for the characteristic, the specifications from batch determination take precedence over those from the material specification. The specifications from the latter, in turn, take precedence over those from the task list.
SAP
If an inspection using the batch determination has been planned for the outbound delivery, the inspection specifications that have been defined in batch determination are included (together with the specifications from the task list and the material specification) when an inspection lot is created in the sales area.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 109: Inspection Specifications from Batch Determination
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Lot Creation
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 110: Flexible Inspection Specifications: Procedure
SAP Use
Inspections as the result of complaints Inspections in stability studies
At inspection lot creation, the characteristics that are relevant to the current inspection are selected in the universal plan. This is known as flexible specification selection. At results recording, it is possible to change certain specifications, for example inspection method, tolerances, or characteristic attributes. This is known as flexible specification changing. The function for flexible inspection specifications is usually used in conjunction with the stability study solution. However, you can use it in other processes if you implement a BAdI for inspection lots.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
233
Only
Internal
You can still perform these types of inspections if the inspection specifications can be changed using flexible specification selection and changing at inspection lot creation or in results recording. The solution to the problem lies in the planning of inspection specifications in a so-called universal plan, which contains a wide scope of inspection specifications (characteristics, inspection methods, sampling procedures, and so on).
Partner
• •
SAP
Flexible inspection specifications can, for example, be used when inspections cannot be fully planned in advance. This may be the case for:
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 111: Flexible Inspection Specifications: Changeable Specifications
The following specifications can only be changed at inspection lot creation:
SAP
The following specifications can be changed at inspection lot creation and in results recording:
Internal
234
Characteristic short text All limit pairs (upper/lower tolerance, limit pairs 1 and 2, plausibility limits) Target value Decimal places Inspection method Info fields related to the characteristic Selected set
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
• • • • • • •
Operation short text Sampling procedure Control indicator (Required or optional characteristic)
Partner
Use
SAP
• • •
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection Lot Creation
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain how the inspection specifications are determined • Explain the steps in inspection lot creation
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
235
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion Lesson Overview
Internal
Only
Results for the inspection characteristics can be recorded during the inspection. It is also possible to record defects for an inspection lot. Depending on your requirements, different recording options are available. At the end of the inspection, you complete the inspection lot (inspection lot completion).
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the processes in results recording and defects recording Complete the inspection lot with the usage decision Explain the processes involved in the copy inspection results function
Business Example
SAP
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Record Inspection Results
SAP
An important step in inspection lot processing is the recording of the inspection results for the planned inspection characteristics. If unplanned defects arise in the course of the inspection, it is possible to record defect data. Depending on the requirements, different types of recording can be used.
Use
Partner
• • •
Figure 112: Inspection
You record inspection results for the planned inspection characteristics in the inspection lot.
236
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
If any problems have been identified during the inspection, you can record defects and if necessary, activate a quality notification to process the problems. The characteristics or inspection points are completed and valuated, based on the inspection specifications. If required, you can confirm labor or machine times that were needed to process the inspection lot in a Controlling order. You can also confirm any quantities that have been manufactured in the production order or process order.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
Use
You can record results for qualitative characteristics with a YES/NO statement or on the basis of attribute codes (catalog type 1) that implicitly contain a valuation. The following recording types are available for quantitative characteristics: • • •
Summarized results recording (for example, mean value and standard deviation) Classed recording, this means that class contents are recorded Single-value recording this means each individual value (such as measured value, attribute code) is recorded.
The results are updated in the statistics and can be used for quality control purposes. You can evaluate and monitor this data using the QM Information System (QMIS).
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
237
Only
Internal
You record results for planned characteristics (quantitative or qualitative) on the basis of the planned recording type and the characteristics are valuated according to the predefined valuation rule.
Partner
Figure 113: Results Recording, Defects Recording
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
If problems are identified during the inspection, you can use the defects recording function to document them and then activate a quality notification to process these problems.
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 114: Recording Steps
Use
•
•
When the configuration of the results recording is set accordingly then the results recording restricts itself to the entry of the inspection results. Once all characteristics have been closed, the usage decision is made for the inspection lot and this completes the lot. You can record results directly for the inspection lot, or select the relevant lot from a worklist.
238
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Recording results for inspection lots, inspection points or master inspection characteristics etc. Valuating characteristics (manual or automatic, according to how you have configured results recording) Closing characteristics (manual or automatic, according to how you have configured results recording)
Partner
The results recording process is divided into the following stages:
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Variants of Results Recording
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
Through the user settings, you can make individual settings for results recording and thereby adapt the process to suit your requirements.
Use
•
You make the settings for the selection variant on the selection screen for the worklist. You make the settings for the display variant on the entry screen using the Select layout icon.
The system only displays objects in the worklist (inspection lots, operations) for which you have processing authorization. The objects of the tree are displayed differently depending on the input requirements. On the entry screen, you can easily navigate between the individual processing objects. After inspection lot selection, you can automatically access the first operation with characteristics to be processed. Using the integrated graphic display, you can call up a histogram, a run chart, or a quality control chart in the screen area below the entry area.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
239
Only
Internal
•
Partner
With a user-specific variant, you can set up the selection criteria as required (selection variant). In addition, you can define how the information is to be formatted in the tree (display variant or layout).
SAP
Figure 115: Worklist in Results Recording
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
The characteristic valuations that are executed are immediately displayed in the overview tree (worklist). In addition, the graphic display is updated.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP Use
•
240
Results recording for a master inspection characteristic for all inspection lots and operations Results recording for inspection characteristics for all inspection lots and operations Results recording for several inspection points (physical samples, equipment) in one inspection lot and operation.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
•
•
Partner
In the standard system, the following recording options are available:
Internal
Process-optimized results recording enables flexible tabular characteristic processing. In this way, you can record inspection results exactly for the recording process and work center.
SAP
Figure 116: Process-Optimized Results Recording
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
SAP
SAP
You can process the results for one master inspection characteristic on one screen, in table form, and for all inspection lots. This function can be used, for example, when a characteristic is to be inspected for different materials/batches.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 117: Results Recording for Master Inspection Characteristic
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 118: Results Recording on the Internet
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
241
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
From Release 4.6C, it is possible to record results based on characteristics on the Internet. The transaction for this service is (QEW01) and it can be used from external locations (Internet) and internally (Intranet). A worklist appears, from which the user can choose an inspection lot, when the the service is accessed. Results recording can be performed for all operations. For an inspection characteristic, you can record summarized results (measured values, mean values, attribute codes, number of nonconforming units, number of defects), single values (single measured values, number of defects), and comments.
Only
•
Results recording at the vendor's (source inspection)
The identification process in R/3 is based on the alias. Therefore, each R/3 user should have an alias assigned to them. Furthermore, it is necessary to create a selection variant for each user in the SAP R/3. This can be done using transaction QEW01V. The selection variant is used to restricts a user's worklist.
SAP
SAP
The following inspection lots cannot be selected: Inspection lots with inspection point processing, inspection lots with partial lots, and inspection lots that require a digital signature.
Use
Partner
Internal results recording: Internally, the service can be used to record results as normal.
Internal
This service is useful for:
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 119: Mobile results recording
From release 4.6C, quality management supports mobile results recording.
242
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
With mobile results recording you can record inspection results using a mobile device on site. This results data can later be transferred to the SAP System. In the SAP System, you determine which inspections are to be recorded using a mobile device in the worklist “Mobile Results Recording” (transaction QEH1). After you have done this, there is an allocation at inspection operation level, determining which inspector is to inspect with what device.
Only Partner
To perform mobile results recording, you need to define "Mobile Devices" in Customizing (QM → Quality Inspection → Subsystems → Define Applications for Mobile Recording).
Copy Inspection Results Function
Internal
You can find information on the mobile devices available, on the supported devices, and on the corresponding BAPI interfaces on the PLM homepage in SAPNet (alias PLM).
Use
SAP
SAP
The copy inspection results function supports a variety of different business processes. It is especially used for recurring inspections, such as deadline monitoring of batches, calibration inspections (monitoring measurement equipment), and stability studies. In these types of inspections, certain characteristics must only be inspected once, whereas others must be inspected every time. For the sake of clarity, all inspection results should be available in every inspection lot.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
243
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 120: Business background for the copy inspection results function
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Another example for the use of the copy inspection results function is the transfer of inspection results from inspections during production (inspection lot origin 03) to inspection lots for goods receipts for an order in the warehouse (inspection lot origin 04). The transfer of inspection results from one inspection point to another is also possible in results recording. The same is true for intermediate products or raw materials for produced batches, for which you may wish to transfer some characteristic values to the inspection lot for the finished product.
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
The copy inspection results function also allows you to copy inspection results from an inspection during production and use them as initial values for a stability study.
Internal
The data selection now uses this inspection lot data to select data in the system. This is process-dependent. Different rules can be defined for data selection. It can be triggered during inspection lot processing or when recording results.
244
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
The first step in the copy inspection results process is the correct selection of the source inspection lot. The function is always started from a particular inspection lot.
Partner
Use
SAP
SAP
Figure 121: Copy Inspection Results: Selection of Source Data
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 122: Copy Inspection Results: Characteristic Mapping
SAP Use
Only
Internal
Partner
The key fields of the characteristic mapping may depend on the process.
SAP
If a suitable inspection lot was found as the source of the data, the correct result value must be assigned to the individual characteristics of the "target inspection lot". Inspection operations and inspection points may also have to be considered during this assignment process. When the data has been successfully transferred, the results data origin in the target inspection lot is set to the value planned in Customizing under Settings for Copy Inspection Results Function.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
245
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Use
Special features of the copy inspection results function during inspection lot processing:
• •
246
When an inspection lot is created manually or automatically, you can transfer the values for the inspection characteristics to the inspection lot after the sample calculation. Depending on the settings in Customizing, the copy inspection results function is either triggered automatically after sample calculation or you have to start it manually when changing an inspection lot. After a successful data transfer, the system sets the inspection lot status RREC Results Confirmed. If the data transfer after sample calculation does not work, because the system cannot find a suitable source object, you can trigger the copy inspection results function afterwards when changing the inspection lot.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Partner
Process-dependent selection and mapping were implemented using filter-dependent Business Add-Ins (BADIs). SAP supplies several example implementations of these. The BAdI technology allows the customer to implement customer-specific selection and mapping procedures.
SAP
SAP
Figure 123: Selection and mapping when copying inspection results
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Special features of the copy inspection results function in results recording: • •
When accessing results recording, you can transfer data to the characteristics of the current operation or inspection point (but not into the whole inspection lot). You can start the copy inspection results function manually in the menu at any time.
In all cases, an application log is generated, which you can display via the menu.
Only
Figure 124: Inspection Lot Completion
Use
The quality level is updated based on the inspection results. The system uses this quality level to determine the inspection stage for the next inspection of the material or of the combinations material-vendor/manufacturer or material/customer. The time of dynamic modification that you have defined (dynamic modification at lot creation or at usage decision) determines when the quality level is to be updated. If required, you can define follow-up actions that can be triggered automatically, once the usage decision is made (for example, sending a complaint mail to a vendor).
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
247
Only
Internal
The system can also calculate quality scores for the material, or the combinations material-vendor/manufacturer or material/customer. There are various procedures available for this calculation.
Partner
Once the inspection results have been recorded, the inspection lot is completed with the usage decision. The usage decision specifies whether the lot is accepted or rejected. The system can automatically make inventory postings on the basis of the usage decision (for example, posting from inspection stock to unrestricted-use stock), provided that the relevant settings have been made.
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Internal
Inspection Lot Completion
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
In the usage decision transactions, it is standard that quantities for the stock transfer can only be specified in the base unit of measure of the material.
Use Internal
If no alternative units of measure are specified in the material, then no input help will be visible for the quantity fields on the stock screen.
248
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
You can use the methods of the BAdI to define a dialog box, in which the quantity value can be entered for another unit of measure. This value must then be converted to the base unit of measure within the implementation. In the usage decision transaction, quantities can only be passed on to inventory management in the base unit of measure.
Partner
You can use the Business Add-In QEVA_ALT_QTY_INPUT to define an input help (F4 help) in the usage decision for the quantity fields on the stock screen (tab page Inspection Lot Stock). Then you can enter quantities in another unit of measure than the base unit of measure.
SAP
SAP
Figure 125: Alternative units of measure in the usage decision
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Internal
Figure 126: Digital Signature
SAP Use
A transaction can only be performed by users with a special authorization The user can be uniquely identified and there can be no forgeries The name of the user and the signed transaction are documented, together with the date and time to prevent forgeries
The digital signature has been implemented for the following transactions:
•
•
QM area: Saving inspection results for an inspection lot, recording and changing the usage decision for an inspection lot, confirming the drawing of physical samples for an inspection lot manually Engineering Change Management (ECH) area: Changing the status of an engineering change request before object processing, Releasing an engineering change order Process manufacturing area: Completing a work step in the PI sheet, accepting invalid values in input validations in the PI sheet, approving a batch record
The digital signature has been implemented in the SAP System using Secure Store and Forward (SSF). SSF allows you to link various external security products that use different identification procedures. After three unsuccessful attempts, the transaction is canceled.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
249
Only
Internal
•
Partner
• • •
SAP
You can specify that a user must execute a digital signature to be able to carry out certain business transactions in the SAP System. The digital signature enables you to meet the security requirements stipulated in the Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) with regard to the execution of these transactions. The digital signature ensures that:
Use
Partner
Only
PLM400
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 127: External Systems
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
250
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
The system features standardized, certified interfaces for linking external equipment to the QM component. Alongside the mobile results recording you have the following options:
QM has a predefined reference (User Exit) for the necessary function enhancements. Date transfer using a keyboard wedge: With this technology you can fill individual input data fields on the screen with values This replaces the manual input of characters using the keyboard. The transfer is controlled and monitored by the user.
Enhancement of inspection lot archiving
Use
– –
Search help for archived inspection lots Displaying archived inspection lots in the business view
Only
Internal
•
As of SAP ERP Central Component 5.0, enhancements are also available for inspection lot archiving (archiving object QM_CONTROL). To search for archived inspection lots, there is a dedicated tab page available when you choose the F4 help in the display transaction (QA03) . You can also display the information by switching to the business or technical view of the archived inspection lot in the archive explorer (transaction SARI, archiving object QM_Control). The business view displays the inspection lot the same way in which an inspection lot is displayed on the database.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
Using an electrical switch the serial interface for the keyboard of the R/3 terminal is switched parallel to the serial interface of the subsystem, this means with the electronic measurement equipment. Normally you would use the standard RS232-C here and if necessary adjust signal deviation of the measuring equipment to this standard No special system software is required for this solution
SAP
SAP
•
Use
Partner
•
Quality inspections using the QM-IDI interface:This technology is converted into QM in order to process inspection operations on subsystems. The interfaces exchange data in both directions. The data transfer is triggered from the subsystem, it comes automatically from a log determined and publicized by SAP and is monitored by the system. SAP offers the necessary data transfer programs for a range of platforms. Get characteristic results via a PC interface: With this technology you can copy entire data records (this means several folders); they are converted in order to transfer results records for individual inspection characteristics, such as measurement values and inspection descriptions, from a subsystem into QM. The transfer is triggered and monitored by the user.
Internal
Only
•
251
PLM400
252
2005/Q2
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Exercise 12: Quality Inspections Exercise Objectives
Business Example
Use
Partner
During a follow-up inspection, you must inspect certain materials again. To do this, you manually create inspection lots in the system and record the inspection results for the planned inspection characteristics. After finishing the inspection, you complete the inspection lots with the usage decision. If necessary, you can trigger follow-up actions (for example, sending a UD log) using the usage decision.
Internal
Only
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create inspection lots manually • Record results for inspection lots and complete the inspection with the usage decision
Task 1:
SAP
You manually create an inspection lot in the system for the follow-up inspection of a material that has already been stored and valuated. Then, record inspection results for the planned inspection characteristics. These inspection results are available for quality control and evaluations.
SAP
Use
Manually Creating an Inspection Lot
1.
Partner
Creating the Inspection Lot
2.
Displaying the Inspection Lot Display the manually created inspection lot and make a note of the following details for the inspection lot data record: Inspection lot number: ______________________________________________ Inspection type: ___________________________________________________ Sample size: ______________________________________________ Task list group: ______________________ Group counter: ______________________ Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
253
Only
Internal
Manually create an inspection lot for material T-BQ3## in plant 1000 for inspection lot origin 05. The inspection lot quantity is 100 pieces. Enter your group number in the field Short text.
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
According to which specifications is the sample size determined in this inspection lot? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ 3.
Results Recording for the Inspection Lot
Task 2: Usage Decision and Inspection Completion
1.
Making the Usage Decision
SAP
2.
Displaying the Mail
Use
3.
Partner
Display the mail that has just been sent. Catalog for Usage Decisions In which catalog are all codes stored for the usage decisions? Properties of this Catalog What features does this catalog have? ____________________________________________________________
254
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Catalog: _____________________________ 4.
SAP
Make the usage decision for your inspection lot by choosing a suitable UD code. All UD codes are stored in the SAP System in a certain catalog type. A mail should be sent when the usage decision is made. Choose the corresponding UD code.
Use
Partner
You can make the usage decision for the inspection lot after you complete the inspections. The usage decision shows whether the inspected goods were accepted or rejected.
Internal
Only
Record inspection results for the inspection lot. Use the Results recording worklist for this and select the inspection lots for material T-BQ3##.
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Solution 12: Quality Inspections Task 1: Manually Creating an Inspection Lot
Only
1.
Creating the Inspection Lot
a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Editing → Create (QA01)
Values
Material
T-BQ3##
Plant
1000
Inspection Lot Origin
05
Field name or data type
Values
Insp. lot size
100
Short text
Group ##
Only
Internal
By choosing enter, the detail data for the inspection lot is displayed. Enter the following data:
Choose enter to release the data. Save your entries. 2.
Displaying the Inspection Lot Display the manually created inspection lot and make a note of the following details for the inspection lot data record: Inspection lot number: ______________________________________________ Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
Use
Field name or data type
SAP
SAP
Enter the following data on the initial screen:
Use
Partner
Manually create an inspection lot for material T-BQ3## in plant 1000 for inspection lot origin 05. The inspection lot quantity is 100 pieces. Enter your group number in the field Short text.
Internal
You manually create an inspection lot in the system for the follow-up inspection of a material that has already been stored and valuated. Then, record inspection results for the planned inspection characteristics. These inspection results are available for quality control and evaluations.
255
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Inspection type: ___________________________________________________ Sample size: ______________________________________________ Task list group: ______________________ Group counter: ______________________ According to which specifications is the sample size determined in this inspection lot?
Only
____________________________________________________________ Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Editing → Display (QA03)
Field name or data type
Values
Inspection lot
50000000 .......
Inspection Type
05
SAP
SAP
The number of the inspection lot that was last created is displayed in the field Inspection lot. By choosing enter, the screen Display inspection lot appears. The following data is displayed on this screen:
Tab page Insp. lot quantities
Use
5 PC
Partner
Sample size
........
Group counter
1
Inspection specifications are used from the assigned inspection plan for inspection type 05 because of the inspection setup in the QM view of the material master. This inspection plan has two inspection operations and each operation has one inspection characteristic. The sample size that is required for inspecting characteristics is defined using the sampling procedure, which is assigned to the characteristics. 3.
Results Recording for the Inspection Lot Continued on next page
256
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Tab page Insp. specifications Group
Use
Partner
a)
Internal
____________________________________________________________
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Record inspection results for the inspection lot. Use the Results recording worklist for this and select the inspection lots for material T-BQ3##. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording (QE51N)
Plant
1000
Material
T-BQ3##
The characteristic overview for results recording appears for the inspection lots you selected. Your current worklist is displayed on the left side of the screen. The characteristic overview for the first operation to be processed in the inspection lot is displayed in the screen area on the right.
Use
Record inspection results for the first operation in the inspection lot on the characteristic overview screen. On the characteristic overview, you can enter the summarized inspection result in the field Result. Exit the field by choosing enter. The inspection characteristic is valuated and automatically closed. Save your entries.
SAP
Use
Exit the selection screen by choosing the F8 function key or the pushbutton Execute.
Task 2: Usage Decision and Inspection Completion You can make the usage decision for the inspection lot after you complete the inspections. The usage decision shows whether the inspected goods were accepted or rejected. 1.
Making the Usage Decision
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
257
Only
Internal
Record inspection results for the characteristic in the second operation. The characteristic overview appears by double clicking on the operation in the worklist (screen area on the left). You can then record results.
Partner
Partner
Values
SAP
Field name or data type
Internal
Only
The selection screen for inspection lots in the results recording worklist appears. Use the tab page Material to select inspection lots and enter the following data:
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Make the usage decision for your inspection lot by choosing a suitable UD code. All UD codes are stored in the SAP System in a certain catalog type. A mail should be sent when the usage decision is made. Choose the corresponding UD code. When you have saved the inspection results, you can then immediately switch to the usage decision from the results recording worklist. By double clicking on the inspection lot number in the worklist, the screen Record Usage Decision: Characteristic Overview appears. In this overview, you can view details for inspection characteristics in the inspection lot. Select the UD code M100 in the field UD code using the field-related input help (F4 help). Save the usage decision.
Partner SAP
2.
Displaying the Mail Display the mail that has just been sent. a)
Office → Workplace (SBWP) or the pushbutton SAP Business Workplace in the application toolbar on the initial screen of the SAP system. In your workplace you can access an overview of all of the documents and workflows that have been sent to you in the Inbox.
3.
Catalog for Usage Decisions Continued on next page
258
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Hint: As the material T-BQ3## requires documentation, you may have to make a comment when you save the usage decision if you have rejected characteristics in results recording but have selected the UD code M100 (acceptance code).
Partner
Use
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Usage Decision → Record (QA11)
SAP
Hint: You can also access the transaction for making the usage decision by choosing:
Use
Hint: When you make the usage decision, you can also enter long text about the usage decision. You can enter this long text in the screen area Usage Decision by choosing Create Long Text for UD. The long text can be copied to the mail.
Internal
Only
a)
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
In which catalog are all codes stored for the usage decisions? Catalog: _____________________________ a) 4.
All codes for usage decisions are stored in catalog 3.
Properties of this Catalog What features does this catalog have? ____________________________________________________________
Only
Use
Partner
Catalog 3 can only be used with selected sets like catalog 1. Code valuation is required in selected sets. For catalog 3, follow-up actions are possible at code level in all selected sets.
Internal
a)
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
259
PLM400
260
2005/Q2
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Exercise 13: Copy Inspection Results Function in Inspection Processing Exercise Objectives
Only
Business Example
Use
Partner
You can use the copy inspection results function in inspection lot processing and in results recording. You want to use this function in conjunction with recurring inspections of batches. In results recording, you want the system to propose the results of the last inspection.
Task 1: Recurring inspections of batches for a material
SAP Use
How many inspection lots exits for the material? _____________________
Internal
How many inspection lots for the material have already been completed with the usage decision? ___________________________________________________ 2.
Document the following data for the completed inspection lot:
Only
Batch:_________________________________________________ Inspection characteristic short text: ______________________________________ Inspection result:_____________________________________________
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
In plant 1000, select all inspection lots for material TAQ5##. To do this, use the inspection list in the selection transaction (QA33).
SAP
The batches for a material must be inspected at regular intervals. Inspection lots of inspection lot origin 09 are used for this. These inspection lots are always generated in time for the next inspection date using a periodic job. 1.
Internal
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the copy inspection results function in inspection processing • Explain the suitable times for the data transfer
261
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Task 2: It is time for the next recurring inspection of the material and batch from section 1-1-2. The corresponding inspection lot has already been created by a job. Record inspection results for this inspection lot. To do this, use the results recording worklist (transaction QE51N) and select all inspection lots for your material T-AQ5##. 2.
What do you notice when you access results recording for the inspection lot with the batch from section 1-1-2?
Only
How many inspection lots are in your worklist? _________
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
Partner
3.
What is the processing status of the characteristic? Status:_________ Short text: __________________________________
Internal
1.
Use
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
262
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Solution 13: Copy Inspection Results Function in Inspection Processing Task 1: Recurring inspections of batches for a material
Only
1.
In plant 1000, select all inspection lots for material TAQ5##. To do this, use the inspection list in the selection transaction (QA33).
Use
Partner
How many inspection lots exits for the material? _____________________
Internal
The batches for a material must be inspected at regular intervals. Inspection lots of inspection lot origin 09 are used for this. These inspection lots are always generated in time for the next inspection date using a periodic job.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
263
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
How many inspection lots for the material have already been completed with the usage decision? ___________________________________________________ a)
Overview of all inspection lots in recurring inspections for material T-AQ5##: Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Inspection → Display Data (QA33
Plant
1000
Inspection Lot Origin
09
Material
T-AQ5##
Sort your inspection lots according to the system status. To do this, select the System Status column in the inspection list and then choose Sort in ) or Sort in Descending Order ( ). Ascending Order (
Number of inspection lots for material T-AQ5##: at least 4 inspection lots should be listed.
Use Internal
2.
Document the following data for the completed inspection lot: Batch:_________________________________________________ Inspection characteristic short text: ______________________________________
Continued on next page
264
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Hint: If necessary, you can change the layout of the inspection list, for example, to display the batch. To do this, use the pushbutton for changing the layout in the application toolbar, or use the key combination Ctrl + F9.
Partner
At least one inspection lot has already been completed with the usage decision (System Status UD, …).
SAP
Exit the selection screen by choosing the F8 function key or the pushbutton Execute ( ).
Use
Partner
Values
SAP
Field name or data type
Internal
Only
Enter the following data on the initial screen:
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Inspection result:_____________________________________________ Data of the completed inspection lot: Field name or data type
Values
Batch
TAQ5##-3
Short text for inspection characteristic
Density
Inspection Result
1,190
Task 2:
Partner
It is time for the next recurring inspection of the material and batch from section 1-1-2. The corresponding inspection lot has already been created by a job. Record inspection results for this inspection lot. To do this, use the results recording worklist (transaction QE51N) and select all inspection lots for your material T-AQ5##.
Use
1.
How many inspection lots are in your worklist? _________ a)
Results recording worklist:
SAP Use
Plant
1000
Inspection Lot Origin
09
Material
T-AQ5##
At least 3 inspection lots should be in the worklist. 2.
What do you notice when you access results recording for the inspection lot with the batch from section 1-1-2? _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ a)
2005/Q2
In results recording for the inspection lot with the batch TAQ5##-3, the value 1.190 is proposed as the result. This is due to data transfer from the preceding inspection lot when accessing results recording. Continued on next page
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
265
Only
Internal
Exit the selection screen by choosing the F8 function key or the pushbutton ). Execute (
Partner
Values
SAP
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording (QE51N) Field name or data type
Internal
Only
a)
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
3.
PLM400
What is the processing status of the characteristic? Status:_________ Short text: __________________________________ a)
The characteristic has the status 2 Processed.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
266
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Inspection and Inspection Lot Completion
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the processes in results recording and defects recording • Complete the inspection lot with the usage decision • Explain the processes involved in the copy inspection results function
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
267
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Lesson: Sample Management Lesson Overview For certain parts of the quality inspection, several samples of a material must be taken and analyzed. Sample management allows you plan and execute such sampling.
Lesson Objectives
Only
Explain the objects used in sample management. Use sample management in inspection planning Describe the inspection process using sample management
Business Example For a quality inspection during production, several samples of a material must be taken. These individual samples are to be analyzed in different laboratories.
SAP
SAP
Planning Objects in Sample Management
Use
Partner
• • •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 128: Sample Management
268
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Sample Management
You plan and process physical samples using the functions for sample management. The physical-sample records are either created automatically at inspection lot creation or manually. The inspection is similar to the inspection process for inspection points, you record inspection results for the characteristics in the inspection operations that have been assigned.
Only Partner
Sample-drawing instruction: Contains all of the required information for drawing one or more physical samples from the population to be inspected.
SAP Use
Partner Only
Internal
SAP
Physical sample: Subpopulation that is taken from a population and that reflects the quality of this population. The population can be an inspection lot. The name physical sample (unlike the name sample) is mainly used to describe formless (amorphous) subpopulations (for example, of bulk products or continuous products). These subpopulations are taken from a population, based on a sample-drawing procedure. The number of physical samples can either be fixed or determined on the basis of a sampling scheme.
Use
Sample-drawing procedure: Master data record that is defined in the task list header and controls the drawing and formation of physical samples. The sample-drawing procedure contains one or more sample-drawing items. These items specify the details for drawing the physical samples. You use the sample-drawing item to define whether you want to work with primary samples only (single-stage physical-sample drawing) or also with pooled and reserve samples. You also define the number of physical samples and the physical sample container in the sample-drawing item.
Internal
Physical-sample drawing: Taking of a physical sample according to a predefined procedure. The physical-sample drawing can be subject to a separate confirmation process using a status scheme. The physical samples must then be released before results can be recorded.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
269
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 129: Planning the Physical Samples
SAP Use
Partner
Physical-sample categories Number of physical samples Physical-sample sizes Lot container for the inspection lot Physical sample container
Only
Internal
SAP
• • • • •
Use
To plan the drawing of physical samples, you must define the necessary information in the sample-drawing procedure. You can define a confirmation requirement for each sample-drawing procedure. In addition, you can define whether the physical samples are to be drawn based on the inspection lot quantity or on the number and type of lot containers. You assign the sample-drawing procedure in the plan header (inspection plan, routing, master recipe). . The sample-drawing item contains instructions relating to:
270
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Sample Management
Partner
Only
Internal
• • •
SAP
SAP
When drawing physical samples, there are the following physical-sample categories:
Use
Figure 130: Physical-sample categories
Primary samples are taken directly from the population. Pooled samples are created by pooling primary samples. Reserve samples are primary samples that are reserved as specimen samples.
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
You define the physical-sample categories in the sample-drawing item. Each sample-drawing procedure can contain one or more sample-drawing items.
Figure 131: Physical-Sample Records and Physical-Sample Drawings
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
271
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
All sample data records contain different data: • •
Only SAP
SAP
The physical sample drawing is a reference object for all physical samples (primary samples, pooled samples and reserve samples) that come from the same inspection lot. During the inspection lot generation the system automatically assigns a physical-sample drawing number to each physical-sample drawing.
Use
•
Internal
•
Partner
•
Header data: General information about the physical sample (for example, sample number, sample type, sample category, status information, short text). Sample origin data: Information about the origin of the physical sample (such as material, batch, material document number, plant, vendor, manufacturer). Inspection lot data: Information about the inspection lot from which the sample was taken (such as inspection lot number, status of the inspection lot, inspection lot quantity, sample size, task list group). Physical-sample drawing data: Information about the physical-sample drawing (such as sample type, lot sample container, lot sample container unit, sample container type, number of physical samples, physical sample number, physical sample drawing procedure, confirmation of the removal of the sample) Storage location data: Information about where the physical samples are stored after an inspection (such as storage location, storage duration and status of the physical sample).
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
272
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Sample Management
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
As of SAP ERP Central Component 5.0 the sample record was extended by additional fields.
Use
Location of Sample Drawing (functional location) Info Sample-Drw (additional information for the physical-sample drawing, textual description of the sample-drawing location)
On the Sample Detail tab page, you can define the following information on the Administrative Data for Physical Sample tab page: • • •
2005/Q2
Processor (for example, the person responsible for processing the sample, or the person who took the sample, ...) Date of Sample Drawing Time of Sample Drawing
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
273
Only
Internal
• •
Partner
On the Physical-Sample Drawing tab page, you can define the following information on the Data for Physical-Sample Origin tab page:
SAP
Figure 132: New feature in the sample management for SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
You can select using these and other fields related to the physical sample in the transactions for results recording (QE51N and QE52). In results recording, you can also select according to the sample status. The enhancement of the logical database PGQ means you can now also create sample-based evaluations or queries. •
Archiving physical samples
To search for physical samples, there is a dedicated tab page available when you choose the F4 help in the display transaction (QPR3) . You can also display the information by switching to the business or technical view of the archived sample in the archive explorer (SARI, archiving object QM_SAMPLE). The business view displays the sample the same way in which a sample is displayed on the database.
SAP
SAP
Inspection Process Using Physical Samples
Use
As of SAP ERP Central Component 5.0, you can archive physical samples and physical-sample drawings to which you no longer need direct access using the archiving object QM_SAMPLE. You can display the archived data in the transaction for displaying physical samples.
Internal
Only
Search help for archived physical samples Displaying archived physical samples (business view)
Partner
– –
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 133: Inspection Process Using Planned Physical Samples
274
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Lesson: Sample Management
Internal
Figure 134: Inspection Process Using Unplanned Physical Samples
You can create inspection lots manually for one or more existing physical samples. The system creates one inspection lot for each physical sample. All inspection lots created in this way have the inspection lot origin 15.
SAP
Only
Internal
Use
Perform stability checks on reserve samples Check competitors' samples Check samples that you received in relation to the a customer complaint
Partner
• • •
SAP
You can use this function, for example, to:
Use
Partner
Only
PLM400
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
275
PLM400
276
2005/Q2
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
PLM400
Lesson: Sample Management
Exercise 14: Quality Inspection/Sample Management Exercise Objectives
Only
Business Example
Partner
Task 1:
SAP Use
1.
Creating the Inspection Lot for a Material and Batch
You must perform a follow-up inspection on batch TQ1## because of information from vendor 1000. There is 50kg of this batch in 10 canisters. 2.
Displaying the Inspection Lot Data Record and Sample Data Record Display the inspection lot and note the following data: Inspection lot number: __________________________________________ Sample size: __________________________________________ Task list group: _________________
Group counter: __________
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
277
Only
Internal
Create a manual inspection lot for material T-TQ1## in plant 1100. Use inspection lot origin 01.
Partner
In your company, inspection plans for goods receipt already exist for the material. In these inspection plans, physical-sample drawing is dependent on the number of containers and the physical-sample container (for example, drums, canisters, tanks).
SAP
Manual Creation of Inspection Lots
Use
Based on information from your raw material vendor, you must perform a follow-up inspection on a batch of delivered material. Since you will record results for this follow-up inspection in the system and use them for later evaluations, you create a manual inspection lot. The goods are stored in canisters, and you must take samples based on the number of canisters because of the information from the vendor.
Internal
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and process inspection lots for physical samples • Record inspection results for physical samples, valuate physical samples and complete the inspection with the usage decision
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Sample-drawing procedure: ____________________________________ How many physical samples were taken? ___________________ Which numbers do the physical samples have? ___________________ Display a physical-sample data record for the inspection lot, and note the following data:
Physical-sample category: __________________________________________ Physical-sample status: __________________________________________
Results Recording for Physical Samples and Inspection Completion with the Usage Decision Make the usage decision for the inspection lot. Record inspection results for the physical samples and valuate the single physical samples. Use the results recording worklist and select your physical samples using the physical-sample number.
SAP
SAP
1.
Use
Partner
Task 2:
Internal
Only
Physical-sample drawing number: ______________________ ________________________________________
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
278
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Sample Management
Solution 14: Quality Inspection/Sample Management Task 1: Manual Creation of Inspection Lots
Only
1.
Creating the Inspection Lot for a Material and Batch
You must perform a follow-up inspection on batch TQ1## because of information from vendor 1000. There is 50kg of this batch in 10 canisters. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Editing → Create (QA01)
Use
Partner
Create a manual inspection lot for material T-TQ1## in plant 1100. Use inspection lot origin 01.
Internal
In your company, inspection plans for goods receipt already exist for the material. In these inspection plans, physical-sample drawing is dependent on the number of containers and the physical-sample container (for example, drums, canisters, tanks).
Use
Values
Material
T-TQ1##
Plant
1100
Insp. lot origin
01
Field name or data type
Values
Batch
TQ1##
Insp. lot size
50
No. containers
10 CAN
Vendor
1000
Only
Internal
By choosing ENTER, the detail data for the inspection lot is displayed. Enter the following data:
Choose ENTER to release the data, and save your entries. 2.
Displaying the Inspection Lot Data Record and Sample Data Record Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
Field name or data type
SAP
SAP
Enter the following data on the initial screen:
279
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Display the inspection lot and note the following data: Inspection lot number: __________________________________________ Sample size: __________________________________________ Task list group: _________________
Group counter: __________
Sample-drawing procedure: ____________________________________
Only
Which numbers do the physical samples have? ___________________
Physical-sample drawing number: ______________________ ________________________________________ Physical-sample category: __________________________________________ Physical-sample status: __________________________________________
SAP
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Editing → Display (QA03)
Use Internal
Field name or data type
Values
Inspection lot
.......
Tab page Insp. lot quantities 0.200 KG
Only
Sample size Tab page Insp. specifications Group
.......
Group counter
1
Drawing proc.
S1000 Continued on next page
280
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
The number of the inspection lot that was last created is displayed in the field Inspection lot. By choosing Enter, the screen Display inspection lot appears. The following data is displayed on this screen:
SAP
a)
Use
Partner
Display a physical-sample data record for the inspection lot, and note the following data:
Internal
How many physical samples were taken? ___________________
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Sample Management
Based on the sample-drawing item in the sampling procedure, only primary samples are processed in this case. In this case, the number of primary samples is dependent on the number of containers. Two physical samples are taken from 10 containers in accordance with the specifications in the sampling scheme.
Field name or data type
Values
Phys. sample
1000000...
Phys. sample
1000000...
Internal
Only
You use the pushbutton Samples to switch from the inspection lot data record to the sample overview for the physical-sample drawing.
Field name or data type
Values
Physical sample
...
Category
Primary sample
Status
REL, LBPR
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Select a physical sample and choose the Display Physical Sample pushbutton to switch to the sample data record.
Use
Record inspection results for the physical samples and valuate the single physical samples. Use the results recording worklist and select your physical samples using the physical-sample number. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording (QE51N) The selection screen for inspection lots in the results recording worklist appears. Use the tab page Physical sample for inspection lot selection.
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
281
Only
1.
Make the usage decision for the inspection lot.
Partner
Results Recording for Physical Samples and Inspection Completion with the Usage Decision
Internal
Task 2:
Unit 8: Functions in Detail - Quality Inspection
PLM400
Field name or data type
Values
Physical sample
100000... to 100000...
Hint: You can use the field-related input help in the field Physical sample to select the physical samples for the current inspection lot.
Only
Values
Plant
1100
Inspection Lot Origin
01
Material
T-TQ1##
Exit the selection screen by choosing the F8 function key or the pushbutton Execute.
SAP Use Internal
Save your entries.
282
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Record inspection results for the other physical samples in operations 10 and 20, and complete the inspection lot with the usage decision. Switch from the results recording worklist to the usage decision by double clicking on the inspection lot number. On the recording screen for the usage decision, there is an additional tab page with the results for the physical samples.
Partner
Record inspection results for the physical sample on the characteristic overview screen. On the characteristic overview, you can enter the summarized inspection result in the field Result. Exit the field by choosing Enter. The inspection characteristic is then valuated and automatically closed. The system returns to the next inspection characteristic in the operation. Save your entries after recording results for the second inspection characteristic. The screen for valuating the physical sample then appears. You can accept the proposed valuation or manually change the valuation for the physical sample.
SAP
The characteristic overview for results recording appears for the inspection lots you selected. Your current worklist is displayed on the left side of the screen. The characteristic overview for the first physical sample in the first operation of the inspection lot is displayed in the screen area on the right.
Use
Partner
Field name or data type
Internal
You can also use the Matrial tab page for your selection. In this case use the following selection criteria:
PLM400
Lesson: Sample Management
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the objects used in sample management. • Use sample management in inspection planning • Describe the inspection process using sample management
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
283
Unit Summary
PLM400
Unit Summary
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
You should now be able to: • Describe the creation of inspection lots • Explain the process flow of a quality inspection • Explain how the inspection specifications are determined • Explain the steps in inspection lot creation • Describe the processes in results recording and defects recording • Complete the inspection lot with the usage decision • Explain the processes involved in the copy inspection results function • Explain the objects used in sample management. • Use sample management in inspection planning • Describe the inspection process using sample management
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
284
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
Inspection lots are always created automatically. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Only
The specifications in the inspection type define how an inspection is to take place. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
3.
True False
The status of the inspection lot informs you about the current “processing status” of the inspection lot. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
SAP
4.
True False
SAP
□ □
At inspection lot creation, the inspection specifications are copied into the inspection lot.
Use Internal
5.
Partner
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
True False
The inspection specifications from the routing cannot be altered. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
6.
True False
Only
□ □
The inspection specifications from the task list cannot be altered. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
2005/Q2
True False
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Use
Partner
□ □
Internal
2.
True False
285
Test Your Knowledge
7.
PLM400
In addition to inspection results recording for characteristics, it is also possible to record defects. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □ 8.
True False
Inspection results can also be recorded on the Internet.
Only
□ □
Partner
9.
True False
At inspection completion in the usage decision, the quality level is always updated. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True False
Use
□ □
SAP
SAP
10. It is not possible to use a digital signature in the usage decision. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True False
11. The number of physical samples is defined in the sample-drawing procedure. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True False
Only
Internal
□ □
12. Only specifications for the primary sample can be specified in the sample-drawing item. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
286
True False
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
Use
□ □
Internal
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
13. An inspection process can consist of planned and unplanned physical samples. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
True False
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
287
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
Inspection lots are always created automatically. Answer: False
2.
The specifications in the inspection type define how an inspection is to take place.
In the inspection type, you define whether the inspection is to be performed, for example, on the basis of specifications from the task list and/or on the basis of the specifications from the material specification. The status of the inspection lot informs you about the current “processing status” of the inspection lot. Answer: True
Use
At inspection lot creation, the inspection specifications are copied into the inspection lot. Answer: True The task list (for example, inspection plan, routing, master recipe) is copied into the inspection lot.
5.
The inspection specifications from the routing cannot be altered. Answer: False The inspection specifications can be altered, for example, in accordance with the specifications from variant configuration.
288
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
4.
Partner
The inspection lot status shows you what has already been done using a particular inspection lot (for example, inspection results have been recorded, the usage decision has been made, ....).
SAP
SAP
3.
Use
Partner
Answer: True
Internal
Only
Inspection lots can be created automatically (for example, when a goods movement takes place) or manually (for example, for a follow-up inspection).
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
6.
The inspection specifications from the task list cannot be altered. Answer: False The inspection specifications can be altered, for example, in accordance with the specifications from batch determination. In addition to inspection results recording for characteristics, it is also possible to record defects.
Internal
Only
7.
Answer: True Defects recording for an inspection lot is always possible.
Partner
8.
Inspection results can also be recorded on the Internet. Answer: True
Use
The service QEW01 is available for inspection results recording using the Internet.
SAP
At inspection completion in the usage decision, the quality level is always updated.
SAP
9.
Answer: False
Use
Answer: False It is possible to work with digital signatures in both inspection results recording and in the usage decision. It depends on the settings in the material. 11. The number of physical samples is defined in the sample-drawing procedure. Answer: False The number of physical samples is defined in the sample-drawing item. Several sample-drawing items can exist for one sample-drawing procedure.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
289
Only
Internal
10. It is not possible to use a digital signature in the usage decision.
Partner
The system only updates the quality level if you are working with dynamic modification.
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
12. Only specifications for the primary sample can be specified in the sample-drawing item. Answer: False In addition to specifications for the number of primary samples, you can also make specifications regarding the number of pooled samples and reserve samples.
Only
Answer: True
Use
Partner
In addition to the physical samples that are already planned, you can also create unplanned physical samples if required.
Internal
13. An inspection process can consist of planned and unplanned physical samples.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
290
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 9 Unit Overview
Partner
This unit deals with the possibilities for incoming and outgoing quality certificates. You learn about certificate monitoring at goods receipt, and certificate planning and processing at goods issue.
Use
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP
Plan certificates Create quality certificates for the outbound delivery
SAP
• •
Unit Contents
Only
Internal
Partner
Lesson: Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue .............................. 292 Exercise 15: Quality Certificates ............................................. 301
Use
Internal
Only
Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
291
Unit 9: Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates
PLM400
Lesson: Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue Lesson Overview Quality certificates must be created for the outbound delivery of the goods. They give an overview of the necessary planning steps. For certain materials, certificates are also expected for the goods receipt.
Only
Internal
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
• •
Plan certificates Create quality certificates for the outbound delivery
In your company, quality certificates must be created for the outbound deliveries. To do this, certificate planning must be performed, in which customer-specific requirements have to be taken into account.
Use
Certificate Planning
SAP
SAP
Business Example
Quality certificate: Guarantees that specific manufacturing procedures or working practices have been followed and defined inspections have taken place that are based on regulations, standards, customer specifications, or other agreements. The certificate also confirms inspection results. You can monitor the certificate receipt independently of the goods receipt, with reference to a purchase order.
292
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 135: Quality Certificate Functions
PLM400
Lesson: Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue
Certificate processing in goods issue covers: • •
Certificate planning (creating certificate forms and certificate profiles) Certificate processing (creating and shipping certificates)
You can use the Information System at any time to create an up-to-date overview of certificate receipts and certificate issues.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
Use
A quality certificate verifies the quality of goods. The chemical or physical properties of goods can be recorded as inspection results or documented as batch characteristics.
Only
Internal
You can create customer-specific certificates whose content and layout are modified to meet customer requirements, or general certificates (for example, for a material).
Partner
Figure 136: Quality Certificates
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
293
Unit 9: Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates
PLM400
Partner SAP
In the certificate profile, the system predefines such information as the data origin, output format, and procedures for skip for each characteristic (master inspection characteristic or class characteristic for batch) that is included on the certificate.
To create certificates, you define certificate profiles which are based on standard certificates and forms such as:
SAP
Certificate of analysis Works test certificates (for example, according to DIN EN ISO 10204) Acceptance inspection certificate
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Internal
Only
If the certificate form is not in the current client then a form search is carried out in client 000.
Partner
You can create certificate forms using the SAPscript editor. In the delivery system the example formula QM_QCERT_01 is available. This form can be used as a copy template for your own forms.
294
Use
• • •
Use
Only
Internal
Figure 137: Certificate Planning
PLM400
Lesson: Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue
Certificate Processing
Partner SAP
The system retrieves the data defined in the certificate profile for the individual characteristics and copies it to the certificate. You can also include inspection results for materials in the production chain on the certificate. You use the certificate profile to control how a skipped characteristic is to be printed on the certificate.
Use
The certificates for the delivery items are created when goods are shipped. The certificate creation process can be automated. In addition, you can create certificates manually for a batch for a material or for an inspection lot.
Use
Only
Internal
Figure 138: Certificate processing
Internal
Partner
You can archive the certificates in an optical archive using ArchiveLink.
SAP
The recipient addresses are taken from the customer master data.
Only
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
295
Unit 9: Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
• • •
Only
Internal
Partner
Summarized value for the characteristic Mean value of the characteristic for each inspection point Original value
SAP
You can print characteristic values for inspection points, physical samples and equipment on the certificate. To do this, you define the level at which results are selected for each characteristic in the certificate profile. The following levels are available for results selection:
Use
Figure 139: Example of a Certificate
296
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Lesson: Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue
Internal
Figure 140: Processing Quality Certificates at Goods Receipt
You can monitor the receipt of a quality certificate with and without inspection lot processing, independently of the time of goods receipt. You can store the quality certificate in the optical archive.
SAP Use
Only
Internal
If the quality certificate is electronically transferred with the formatted data, this allows an automatic transfer of results from the certificate to an inspection lot Via the results data origin entered in the inspection plan or in the material specification you characteristically control whether the data is copied from the electronic certificate or whether is should be checked itself.
Partner
Prerequisite for enhanced certificate processing: The indicator Enhanced certificate processing must be set in Customizing for the certificate type.
SAP
The incoming certificate is filed in the optical archive first as a document, document type. The system sends this information to the inbox of the employee responsible for processing using the Workflow. The document can then be checked and stored as a quality certificate in the optical archive, or assigned to a purchase order.
Use
Partner
Only
PLM400
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
297
Unit 9: Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 141: Quality Certificate for Delivery on the Internet
SAP
Each customer contact who wants to call up their certificate needs a SAP user and alias name for the delivery system. This SAP user needs to have a reference to a contact person at the customers. The service QC42 (as of Release 3.1) can be used to retrieve quality certificates for a batch from the Internet. The most current certificate data on the database is always read. The certificate is copied as a PDF-file.
298
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
The service QC40 facilitates the processing of messages related to delivery items directly from the Internet. This means that there is always a current certificate available and that there is a protocol for each retrieval of a certificate. The service QC40A facilitates the display of stored certificates for delivery items on the Internet as a PDF. This means that the content of the certificate is not updated each time the certificate is called. Instead, the stored certificate is displayed each time.
Partner
Use
•
SAP
You can make it possible for your customers to access quality certificates on the Internet. There are two variants available:
PLM400
Lesson: Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 142: Certificate Transfer
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
299
PLM400
300
2005/Q2
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Unit 9: Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
PLM400
Lesson: Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue
Exercise 15: Quality Certificates Exercise Objectives
Only
Task 1:
In your company, quality certificates are used to document the quality of goods. The quality certificate is created in general for the delivery item. You must copy certain customer-specific specifications to the certificate layout. In certain cases, you must also create a certificate for a batch.
Use
Assigning a Certificate Profile
SAP
Assigning a Certificate Profile to the Material
Use
QC400-##
Certificate type:
E23 (Works test certificate "2.3" EN 10204)
Version:
1
Hint: Certificate profiles can only be assigned if they have the status Released. 2.
Assigning the Certificate Profile to a Combination of Material/Customer If customer 7777 receives material T-FQ1##, a special certificate profile should be used. Assign the following certificate profile to this key combination:
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
301
Only
Internal
Certificate profile:
Partner
Assign the following certificate profile to your material T-FQ1##:
SAP
In the certificate profile, you define the characteristics that should be printed on the certificate. You also assign a form that is used for creating the certificate. The form determines the layout and a part of the certificate content. 1.
Internal
Business Example
Partner
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Describe the basic structure of a certificate profile and assign the certificate profile to different objects • Create certificates for deliveries and batches
Unit 9: Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates
PLM400
Certificate profile:
QC400C-##
Certificate type:
E23 (Works test certificate "2.3" EN 10204)
Version:
1
Caution: When you assign the certificate profile, you set the Valid from date as today's date - 2 days.
Only
Certificate creation 1.
Creating a Certificate for a Batch
Recipient:
Use
Partner
An inspection station for materials requests a certificate for a batch of material T-FQ1## from you. Create this quality certificate for batch FQ1##. The sending plant is 1100. User-definable address Mr. Braxton
SAP
SAP
Inspection Station South 673244 Philadelphia Creating a Certificate for a Delivery
Hint: If necessary, use the Outbound delivery monitor to select your delivery in a second session: Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery → Lists and Logs → Outbound Delivery Monitor (VL06O). Selection type: List of deliveries for outbound delivery, material: T-FQ1##, batch: FQ1##
302
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Create a certificate for your delivery from the exercise QM in Sales Order Processing in the lesson Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service.
Partner
Use
2.
Internal
Task 2:
PLM400
Lesson: Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue
Solution 15: Quality Certificates Task 1: Assigning a Certificate Profile In the certificate profile, you define the characteristics that should be printed on the certificate. You also assign a form that is used for creating the certificate. The form determines the layout and a part of the certificate content.
Only
Assigning a Certificate Profile to the Material
Internal
1.
Use
Partner
Assign the following certificate profile to your material T-FQ1##:
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
303
Unit 9: Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates
PLM400
Certificate profile:
QC400-##
Certificate type:
E23 (Works test certificate "2.3" EN 10204)
Version:
1
Hint: Certificate profiles can only be assigned if they have the status Released.
Only
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Certificates → Outbox → Certificate Profile → Assignment → Create (QC15).
SAP
Values
Valid from
Today's date
Material
T-FQ1##
Profile
QC400-##
CType
E23
VersNo
1
SAP
Field name or data type
Use
Partner
You use the key combination to define for which objects the certificate assignment should be created. Choose the key combination Material. Enter the following data on the quick entry screen for certificate assignment:
Use
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Certificates → Outbox → Certificate Profile → Change (QC02) and choose the Release pushbutton. Release Assigning the Certificate Profile to a Combination of Material/Customer If customer 7777 receives material T-FQ1##, a special certificate profile should be used. Assign the following certificate profile to this key combination:
Continued on next page
304
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Hint: Certificate profiles must have the status Released if they are to be assigned. If required, you can release the certificate profile by choosing:
Partner
Save your entries.
2.
Internal
a)
PLM400
Lesson: Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue
Certificate profile:
QC400C-##
Certificate type:
E23 (Works test certificate "2.3" EN 10204)
Version:
1
Caution: When you assign the certificate profile, you set the Valid from date as today's date - 2 days.
Only
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Certificates → Outbox → Certificate Profile → Assignment → Create (QC15).
Values
Valid from
Current date -2 days
Material
T-FQ1##
Customer
7777
Profile
QC400C-##
CType
E23
VersNo
1
SAP
SAP
Field name or data type
Use
Partner
Choose the key combination Material/Customer. Enter the following data on the quick entry screen for certificate assignment:
Use
Partner
Save your entries.
Task 2: Creating a Certificate for a Batch An inspection station for materials requests a certificate for a batch of material T-FQ1## from you. Create this quality certificate for batch FQ1##. The sending plant is 1100.
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
305
Only
Internal
Certificate creation 1.
Internal
a)
Unit 9: Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates
Recipient:
PLM400
User-definable address Mr. Braxton Inspection Station South 673244 Philadelphia
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Certificates → Outgoing → Certificate Creation → For Batch (QC22)
Internal
Only
a)
Field name or data type
Values
Material
T-FQ1##
Batch
FQ1##
Sending Plant
1100
Choose User-definable address as the recipient, and exit the screen by choosing enter.
SAP Use Internal
2.
Creating a Certificate for a Delivery
Continued on next page
306
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Hint: You can display the created certificate in the print spool. Choose: System → Own spool requests (SP02). You can select the spool request in the overview and display it using the pushbutton Display contents.
Partner
Hint: Use the LOCL output device.
SAP
On the following screen, you can enter the address. Exit the screen by choosing enter. You return to the initial screen for certificate creation. Perform the certificate creation by choosing the pushbutton Execute or the F8 function key. The certificate is issued as a print output according to the specification in the field Transmission medium.
Use
Partner
Create the quality certificate for the following batch:
PLM400
Lesson: Certificate Receipt and Certificate Issue
Create a certificate for your delivery from the exercise QM in Sales Order Processing in the lesson Quality Management in Sales and Distribution and Service. Hint: If necessary, use the Outbound delivery monitor to select your delivery in a second session:
Only
Selection type: List of deliveries for outbound delivery, material: T-FQ1##, batch: FQ1## Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Certificates → Outgoing → Certificate Creation → For Delivery (QC20)
Output type
LQCA
SAP
Sort order
01
Processing mode
1
Shipping point
1100
Delivery
8000....
Partner
Values
SAP
Field name or data type
Use
On the selection screen for certificate creation, enter the following data:
Hint: The processing mode 1 represents the first processing of the message (in this case, the certificate for the delivery item). If the certificate is to be output again, you must select the processing mode 2 (repeat processing). Exit the selection screen by choosing the function key F8. The output from the delivery is displayed. For the selected delivery, an output of output type LQCA (quality certificate, ship-to party) can be processed. After selecting the output, you can display it on screen by choosing the pushbutton Print preview or edit it using the F8 function key. In this case, the certificate is issued and you can display it in the print spool.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
307
Only
Internal
Use the number of the delivery from the exercise QM in Sales Order Processing
2005/Q2
Use
Partner
a)
Internal
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery → Lists and Logs → Outbound Delivery Monitor (VL06O).
Unit 9: Functions in Detail - Quality Certificates
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Plan certificates • Create quality certificates for the outbound delivery
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
308
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Unit Summary
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Plan certificates • Create quality certificates for the outbound delivery
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
309
Unit Summary
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
310
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
Certificate forms and certificate profiles are used for certificate planning. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Only
To archive outgoing certificates, you can use the ArchiveLink interface.
Internal
2.
True False
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Partner
□ □ 3.
True False
Certificates cannot be retrieved via the homepage of a vendor. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Use
□ □
True False
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
311
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
Certificate forms and certificate profiles are used for certificate planning. Answer: True
2.
To archive outgoing certificates, you can use the ArchiveLink interface. Answer: True
3.
Certificates cannot be retrieved via the homepage of a vendor. Answer: False Using the Internet service QC40, you can retrieve certificates for a delivery item via the Internet (the vendor's homepage).
Use
Partner
Outgoing certificates can be stored using ArchiveLink and displayed again later.
Internal
Only
The certificate profile is used to define which characteristics are to appear on the certificate. The form is used to define the layout.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
312
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 10 Only
Unit Overview
Use
Partner
Quality notifications are a central tool used to record and process problems and to handle unplanned events. In addition to the quality notifications, other notification categories are also covered in this unit.
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP
Describe how notifications can be used Explain the structure of a notification Record and process notifications in the system Describe the possible uses of quality notification Explain how notifications are processed
Lesson: General Notification Processing ........................................ 314 Lesson: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain .................. 321 Exercise 16: Quality Notifications ............................................ 329
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
313
Only
Internal
Unit Contents
Partner
Use
SAP
• • • • •
Internal
Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
PLM400
Lesson: General Notification Processing Lesson Overview Problems and malfunctions can turn up in different areas and in different business processes in your company. The use of notifications allows you to describe the problems and document the problem solution process.
Only
Internal
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe how notifications can be used Explain the structure of a notification Record and process notifications in the system
Business Example Notifications are used enter problems centrally. The entry screen should be easy to use.
SAP
SAP
Notification Processing and Elements of the Notification
Use
Partner
• • •
Quality notifications are the central medium in QM for processing problems and unplanned events. Quality notification: Structured problem notification that is integrated in the system and that can be used to process various problems arising from poor quality goods or services. These problems can be customer complaints, complaints against a vendor, or internal problem notifications. Quality notifications allow you to record, manage and evaluate data for these problems.
314
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 143: Quality Notification Functions
PLM400
Lesson: General Notification Processing
There can be many different causes for problems that occur in products. The problems can occur at any stage of the logistics supply chain.
SAP
•
Use
• • • • •
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
315
Only
Internal
• •
Partner
• •
Describe a problem and define the reference objects that are affected (for example, material, vendor, manufacturer) Record the names of all parties concerned (partners) Define processing parameters for the quality notification (for example, assign priority, specify time period by which the notification is to be completed) Record individual defect items for a problem and analyze their causes Determine the corrective actions that are to be implemented (such as immediate tasks or corrective tasks that can only be performed once a thorough defect analysis has taken place) Monitor the progress of corrective actions using statuses Log all activities that were associated with the problem Record the nonconformity costs that are incurred in processing and correcting problems Print, fax, archive, or export various documents (shop papers) that are related to the problem Compile a list of created notifications for processing or for evaluation
SAP
The notifications enable you to:
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 144: Problem Processing in the Company
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 145: Notification Processing in the SAP System
SAP
The SAP System differentiates between various notification systems:
Use
The following notification types are available in the SAP System: • •
• • •
316
General notifications: General notification (G0), change notification (54) Quality notifications: Customer error (F1), Vendor error (F2), Material error (F3), customer complaint (Q1), complaints against vendor (Q2), internal problem notification (Q3) Maintenance notifications: PM order (M1), malfunction report (M2), activity report (M3), malfunction report from QM (MQ) Service notifications: Service notification (S1), activity report (S2), service request (S3) Notifications in the project system: Claim on customer or vendor (C1), Claim by customer or vendor (C2)
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
General notifications (notification category 05) Quality notifications (notification category 02) Maintenance notifications (notification category 01) Service notifications (notification category 03) Claim notifications (notification category 04)
Partner
• • • • •
SAP
Other components and supporting functions of the SAP System are integrated in the quality notification system.
PLM400
Lesson: General Notification Processing
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 146: Elements of the Quality Notification System
SAP
Action Log: The action log displays an overview of all the changes in the life cycle of a notification (for example, when the last change was made and who made the change). Information from the status management and change document functions forms the basis for the action log. Via object services you can very easily attach documents to the notification. You can assign any number of master records from the document management system (DMS) to the header of a quality notification (such as a scanned fax of the defects that has been sent by your customer). You can display this original document directly from the quality notification. You can link notifications to the Workflow, to automate the processing of these notifications.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
317
Only
There are various notification types available in the standard for these notification origins. You can also define your own notification types for the notification origins in Customizing.
Partner
Use
Customer complaint (notification origin Q1) Complaint against a vendor (notification origin Q2) Internal problem notification (notification origin Q3)
Internal
• • •
SAP
Quality notifications have different origins:
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
PLM400
You can create QM orders from quality notifications. By confirming to QM orders, the time and effort required for a defect analysis can be recorded. An extensive status management is in place for the notifications in the SAP system.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP Use
With the transactions for simplified notification processing, you are presented with a simplified view of a notification in terms of structure and functions. In this processing view, the system only provides the functions that you need to process the notifications quickly and efficiently. You can enter information quickly and easily using both the SAP System and the Internet/Intranet. In simplified notification processing, tasks and activities are created using the action box. You can access simplified notification processing in the system under Office Notification or under Logistics - Central Functions - Notifications.
318
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
This notification type serves as a “general-purpose” notification that is not limited to any specific business processes. You can use this notification type to initially record information of a general nature, which may later be categorized more specifically from a business perspective.
Partner
The notification category “General notification” is available as of release 4.6C. This new notification category supports the preconfigured notification type “General notification”.
SAP
Figure 147: Simplified Entry of Notifications
PLM400
Lesson: General Notification Processing
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 148: Internet Service Request
SAP Use
To make the Customizing settings for the business scenarios choose: Cross-Application Components - Notifications - Notification Processing on the Intranet - Define Scenarios. Pre-defined scenarios can be copied from the delivery system using transaction QISR_SM29 and the command file P46C_ISR.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
319
Only
Internal
The Easy Web Transaction for simplified notification processing is called up via the Web GUI and has the same functions as simplified notification processing in the SAP System.
Partner
When you create an Internet service request on the Intranet for a business scenario that requires the use of notification processing functions, the system calls up an Easy Web Transaction. In this transaction you can enter the data specific to the notification and save the notification for further processing.
SAP
The internal service request (ISR) is used to enter and process all types of inquiries or problem descriptions on the Intranet.
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe how notifications can be used • Explain the structure of a notification • Record and process notifications in the system
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
320
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain
Lesson: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain Lesson Overview Quality notifications are used to record and process internal quality problems, customer complaints, and vendor problems.
Only
Describe the possible uses of quality notification Explain how notifications are processed
Internal and external quality problems are documented using the corresponding quality notifications. Several people and departments can be involved in the processing of one notification.
SAP
SAP
Structure of Quality Notification and Notification Processing
Use
Business Example
• •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
Lesson Objectives
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 149: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain
You can use quality notifications in all areas of the logistics supply chain.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
321
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
PLM400
You can call-up the sales summary directly, when editing or displaying customer complaints. The sales summary contains information about existing notifications (service notifications and quality notifications). To process repairs, you can create a repair order for a customer from within a notification.
The current price and condition of the vendor Company-internal materials requirements statistics The total value of the vendor orders up to now Vendor evaluation (such as consideration of the GR inspection, vendor reprimands)
SAP
SAP
You can create a new notification directly from an existing notification, for example, for problems in production, such as complaints against the vendor. You can also trigger various follow-up procedures (such as stock transfer postings, quality inspections, return deliveries, debits or credit memo requests) from a notification. You can determine online which notification type is to be created and which items are to be copied into the new notification.
Use
Partner
• • • •
Internal
Only
You can call-up the buyer's negotiation sheet directly, when editing or displaying complaints against a vendor. The buyer's notification presents a summary of the important delivery and material data from the purchase info record. For example, it contains.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 150: Quality Notification Structure
322
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain
A quality notification is structured as follows: • • •
Header information (differs according to notification type) Tasks and activities Defect items (describe a problem or defect that has been recorded). These include:
Only
Tasks for defect items Description of causes Activities for defect items
Partner
SAP
Activity: Work that was carried out for a notification. The activity is defined using a code from the activity catalog and if necessary, explained by an additional text. Activities can be stored in the notification header, as well as in the individual notification items.
Use
Task: Work that is planned for a notification. The task is defined using a code from the task catalog and if necessary, explained by an additional text. You can define tasks for a notification as well as for individual notification items. The tasks undergo several status changes. You define a partner responsible for carrying out the task. The system can perform the work steps that are linked to the task as automatic follow-up actions and can trigger a Workflow.
SAP
By specifying a partner and a person responsible, the notification is exclusively assigned to the person or group of persons who are responsible for processing the notification.
Internal
– – –
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
323
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
PLM400
SAP Use
The required Customizing entries can be copied from client 000. These are follow-up functions, follow-up actions and basic data from the catalog of tasks and activities. Examples of follow-up functions: • • • •
324
Tighten/reset quality level Send reports Request 8D report Generate notifications from existing notifications
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
For each follow-up function, you can define rules in Customizing that allow you to work through the action box in a process-oriented sequence. These rules mean that the follow-up functions can be categorized as follows: executable, already executed, not currently allowed
You can also use a follow-up function to trigger a Workflow task.
Partner
After the follow-up function has been implemented successfully, a task or an activity is created.
Internal
The follow-up function is executed directly after selection or when saving the notification.
SAP
The action box contains follow-up functions that have been predefined in Customizing for each notification type and that can be executed immediately, using a pushbutton in the notification.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 151: Action Box
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain
SAP Use Internal
When notifications are processed, an action log is written that stores information relating to the processor and the type of processing. You can archive notifications. The notification system is linked closely to the catalogs (task catalog, activity catalog).
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
325
Only
•
System status: The system status is set when you carry out a particular function for the quality notification. The system status informs you that a business transaction has been performed for the notification. The system statuses for quality notifications are preset in the SAP system and cannot be changed. User status: User statuses allow you to further restrict functions that are allowed by system statuses. User statuses are defined in a status profile (Customizing) by the system administration. Provided that you have authorization, you can assign and delete user statuses.
Partner
•
SAP
The sequence for processing notifications is the same for all notification types. Whenever you perform a notification function that is subject to status management, the SAP system automatically assigns the corresponding status to the notification. The current system status shows you the processing phase that the notification has reached and the steps that still have to be implemented. Usually, the notification must have a certain status before it can be further processed. If the correct status is missing, a system message appears to inform you. A notification can display the following status types:
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 152: Notification Processing (Sequence)
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 153: General Worklists
SAP Use
Worklist for notifications, transaction IQS8 Worklist for tasks, transaction IQS9
These new worklists offer the following advantages:
•
They are cross-application worklists. All notifications appear in this list - quality notifications, maintenance notifications, service notifications and general notifications. They are user-specific worklists. You can create a worklist for a particular user. This means that all notifications and tasks that are assigned to this particular user are selected.
On the entry screen for reports, you can find tab pages for a “personalized worklist” and for “general selection”. From release 4.6C, there will also be new transactions for the processing of tasks in a notification. By choosing Office → Notification → Task (IQS12), you can view all of the relevant data for task processing and for the corresponding notification in clear and structured screen areas.
326
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Partner
• •
SAP
From release 4.6C, there are two new worklists available for the processing of notifications and tasks.
Lesson: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain
Internal
Figure 154: Quality Notifications on the Internet
SAP Use
Only
Internal
A special transaction enables you to create notifications on the Internet.
Partner
In the standard SAP system, you can create notifications for notification origin Q1 (customer complaints) on the Internet.
SAP
The customer can use the Internet to access the vendor's system and create a quality notification, if a problem has been identified. This ensures that the problem is processed promptly. The contact person at the customer's describes the problem using codes that can be selected from an object-dependent list and adds explanatory text, if necessary. The prerequisite for this is that the contact person has a "contact person number", as well as a password and the corresponding authorization for the vendor's system.
Use
Partner
Only
PLM400
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
327
PLM400
328
2005/Q2
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain
Exercise 16: Quality Notifications Exercise Objectives
Only
Business Example
Partner
Task 1:
Use
You are responsible for processing complaints against the vendor and customer complaints in your company. You start suitable tasks based on the subject matter. You want to document the complete processing process in the system so that you can use the data for statistics.
Internal
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the worklist for notifications to process outstanding notifications for certain materials and partners • Enter tasks and activities for notifications • Explain the general uses of the action box
Notifications Worklist
SAP
SAP
1.
Select all outstanding notifications that exist for your material T-BQ3##.
Use
Hint: If you have not created any notifications for your materials, you must create a quality notification before you start doing the task. If you have to create a new notification, use the following data: Notification Type: Q2, Material: T-BQ3##, Quantity: 10 PC,Vendor: 1000, Coordinator: PLM400-## Since your vendor for material T-BQ3## has often delivered faulty goods, you want to tighten the goods receipt inspection for the material. Process an outstanding notification for the material and enter this task.
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
329
Only
Internal
If you did not do task 5, you can also edit outstanding notifications for material T-FQ1##.
Partner
Hint: The quality notifcation for material T-BQ3## was already created in task 5 of the exercise about QM in Procurement, in the lesson Quality Management in Procurement.
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
PLM400
Use a suitable code for entering the task. Since you are responsible for executing the task, you enter your user (PLM400-##) as the person responsible for the task. Save your notification.
Task 2: Task Worklist
Only
1.
Activities for the Notification Use the task worklist to select all the notifications for which you are responsible.
Partner
2.
Completion of Tasks
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
Hint: You can use the action box in the notification to start activities immediately from the notification. For example, you can execute a transfer posting to blocked stock and then create a return delivery to the vendor.
SAP
SAP
Complete your outstanding tasks for the notification. Save your notification.
Use
You have recently tightened the goods receipt inspection for material T-BQ3##. Enter this also as an activity for the notification. You have sent a special complaint against the vendor as another activity. Use the corresponding codes for entering these activities.
Internal
If you use the task worklist, you can select all the tasks, for example, for which you are responsible.
330
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain
Solution 16: Quality Notifications Task 1: Notifications Worklist 1.
Select all outstanding notifications that exist for your material T-BQ3##.
Only
Since your vendor for material T-BQ3## has often delivered faulty goods, you want to tighten the goods receipt inspection for the material. Process an outstanding notification for the material and enter this task.
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
Use a suitable code for entering the task. Since you are responsible for executing the task, you enter your user (PLM400-##) as the person responsible for the task.
SAP
SAP
Hint: If you have not created any notifications for your materials, you must create a quality notification before you start doing the task. If you have to create a new notification, use the following data: Notification Type: Q2, Material: T-BQ3##, Quantity: 10 PC,Vendor: 1000, Coordinator: PLM400-##
Use
Partner
If you did not do task 5, you can also edit outstanding notifications for material T-FQ1##.
Internal
Hint: The quality notifcation for material T-BQ3## was already created in task 5 of the exercise about QM in Procurement, in the lesson Quality Management in Procurement.
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
331
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
PLM400
Save your notification. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Notification → Worklist → Notification → Change Data (QM10) The screen for selecting notifications appears. Enter the following data:
Field name or data type
Values
Material
T-BQ3##
Exit the selection screen by choosing the F8 function key or the pushbutton Execute.
Select your task and release it by choosing the pushbutton Release. Save your notification.
Task Worklist If you use the task worklist, you can select all the tasks, for example, for which you are responsible. 1.
Activities for the Notification Use the task worklist to select all the notifications for which you are responsible.
Continued on next page
332
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Task 2:
Partner
Use
Hint: In the quality notification, both the notification header and the task have a status. You can release and complete tasks individually.
SAP
SAP
Enter the desired tasks for the notification on the tab page Tasks. Use the corresponding code. You are responsible for executing this task. Enter your user name PLM400-## in the field Responsible.
Use
Partner
The notifications that correspond to the selection conditions are displayed in a notification list. You can switch from this list to processing for the notification by double clicking on the notification number.
Internal
Only
Screen area Additional restrictions
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain
You have recently tightened the goods receipt inspection for material T-BQ3##. Enter this also as an activity for the notification. You have sent a special complaint against the vendor as another activity. Use the corresponding codes for entering these activities. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Notification → Worklist → Task → Change Data (QM12)
Internal
Only
The selection screen for the tasks in a notification appears. Enter the following data:
Field name or data type
Values
User resp.
PLM400-##
Start the selection by choosing the F8 function key.
SAP Use
Hint: The main differences between an activity and task are that the activity does not have a status and no partners can be assigned. The activity can be documented. 2.
Completion of Tasks
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
333
Only
Internal
Choose the Notification pushbutton and on the Activities tab page, record the activity for the notification. Use a suitable code in the field Activity code.
Partner
The system displays a list of notifications in which you are responsible for a task. After you have selected the notification, you can switch to processing by choosing the pushbutton Task or Notification.
SAP
Caution: The system uses the notification status for the selection. You can choose the notification status in the upper area of the selection screen. You can also use a selection profile created in Customizing.
Use
Partner
Screen area Partner for tasks
Unit 10: Functions in Detail - Quality Notifications
PLM400
Complete your outstanding tasks for the notification. Save your notification. Hint: You can use the action box in the notification to start activities immediately from the notification. For example, you can execute a transfer posting to blocked stock and then create a return delivery to the vendor. After you have documented the activity in the notification, you can complete the task in the notification. Choose the tab page Tasks and select your task. You complete the task by choosing the pushbutton Complete.
Use
Partner
Save the notification.
Internal
Only
a)
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
334
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Notifications in the Logistics Supply Chain
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the possible uses of quality notification • Explain how notifications are processed
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
335
Unit Summary
PLM400
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe how notifications can be used • Explain the structure of a notification • Record and process notifications in the system • Describe the possible uses of quality notification • Explain how notifications are processed
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
336
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
The general notification can be used to describe problems in production. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Only
Malfunction reports for measuring and inspection devices can be recorded using maintenance notifications. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
3.
True False
A general notification cannot be recorded using the Internet.
Use
Partner
□ □
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True False
The action box of the quality notification can be used to trigger tasks for the notification.
SAP
SAP
□ □ 4.
Internal
2.
True False
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Use Internal
5.
True False
SAP Workflow is always required for the processing of quality notifications. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
6.
True False
Only
□ □
During the defect analysis, tasks can be defined for the defect items in the quality notification. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
2005/Q2
True False
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
□ □
337
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
The general notification can be used to describe problems in production. Answer: True
2.
Malfunction reports for measuring and inspection devices can be recorded using maintenance notifications.
Partner
Answer: True On the basis of the maintenance notification, a maintenance order for the repair of the device can be created.
Use
3.
A general notification cannot be recorded using the Internet. Answer: False
SAP
Answer: True
5.
SAP Workflow is always required for the processing of quality notifications.
Only
Internal
The action box is structured according to entries in Customizing for the notification type. It can contain tasks and activities.
Answer: False SAP Workflow simplifies notification processing. It is not, however, a prerequisite.
338
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
Use
The action box of the quality notification can be used to trigger tasks for the notification.
SAP
You can use the service QISR to create notifications on the Internet. 4.
Internal
Only
Problems can be recorded by simply entering them in a notification. At a later point in time, a general notification can be changed to a quality notification.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
6.
During the defect analysis, tasks can be defined for the defect items in the quality notification. Answer: True In a notification, tasks can be defined for both the header of the notification and the individual items.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
339
Unit Summary
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
340
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 11 Unit Overview
Partner
Quality control encompasses a multitude of preventive, controlling and corrective activities that originate in specifications in quality planning and in evaluations of quality inspections and quality notifications. In this unit, you will see several examples of evaluations based on original documents and using the information system.
Use
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP Use
Partner
Unit Contents Lesson: Dynamic Modification and Statistical Process Control............... 342 Lesson: Quality Scores and Costs ............................................... 349 Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management ................................... 356 Exercise 17: Quality Control .................................................. 367
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
341
Only
Internal
Explain the uses of dynamic modification Plan and use quality control charts Explain the purpose of the quality score for the inspection lot Describe the effect of quality on the vendor evaluation Explain quality-related costs Explain the different evaluation options. Perform evaluations for the inspection results and in the info system
SAP
• • • • • • •
Internal
Only
Functions in Detail - Quality Control
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
Lesson: Dynamic Modification and Statistical Process Control Lesson Overview
Internal
Only
You want to adapt the sample size of future inspections in accordance with the results of the current inspection. For certain inspection characteristics, you will need an quality control chart.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the uses of dynamic modification Plan and use quality control charts
Business Example
SAP
SAP
You work with dynamic modification to reduce the expense of inspections. After completion of the inspection, you decide whether or not inspections are to be performed in the future and, if so, what the sample size should be. You need to use a control chart for some inspection characteristics.
Use
Partner
• •
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
342
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Dynamic Modification and Statistical Process Control
Dynamic Modification of the Inspection Scope
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 155: Quality Control Functions
SAP Use Internal
Quality score: Standardized statistical value for evaluating the quality of an inspection lot. The statistical value always has a specific reference criterion (such as a material or the material/vendor combination.) Vendor evaluation: Program that provides the basis for selecting and controlling sources of supply. The user can define and weight (in order of importance) the main criteria that are used to evaluate a vendor (such as reliability of delivery, price, quality and service). The system uses this weighting to determine a score (number of points) for the vendor. The user defines the highest score that can be achieved.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
343
Only
Statistical process control: Allows you to monitor, regulate and improve processes. The most important tool for statistical process control is the control chart.
Partner
The valuation of the inspection lot or the individual inspection characteristics controls the inspection stage change; these alternatives are known as dynamic modification by lot and dynamic modification by characteristic.
SAP
Dynamic modification of the inspection scope: Function that controls the inspection scope (inspection characteristics and sample sizes) in a sequence of inspection lots, to achieve a predefined quality goal with a high degree of accuracy. In the SAP system, the inspection stages for inspection characteristics and the next inspection lot are determined by dynamic modification rules, based on the inspection results for the previous inspection lot. These inspection stages are then written to a quality level.
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
Quality costs: Costs that are incurred in your company during the planning and quality assurance of products and activities, based on predefined quality requirements. Examples of these include defect prevention costs, appraisal costs and nonconformity costs.
SAP Use Internal
Dynamic modification rule: Master data record that contains the definition of the inspection stages and the conditions for these changes. Stage changes take place depending on the inspection results for the inspection lots (lot-based dynamic modification) and inspection characteristics (characteristic-based dynamic modification), that is depending on whether they are accepted or rejected.
344
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
The system can update the information on whether the inspection lot was accepted or rejected when the inspection lot is created or when the usage decision is made. The inspection lot must have been accepted for a dynamic modification at lot creation. If the usage decision leads to the inspection lot being rejected, the quality level is changed again. This change, however, does not influence inspection lots that have been created in the meantime.
Partner
Depending on the level of dynamic modification, the system determines the next inspection stage for each characteristic in a task list that has a dynamic modification rule assigned (dynamic modification at characteristic level), or for all characteristics in a task list (dynamic modification at lot level), or independently of a task list for a specific inspection type (dynamic modification at inspection type level). You define the dynamic modification rule in the task list header for dynamic modification at lot level, and in the inspection setup in the material master for dynamic modification at inspection type level.
SAP
One function of quality control is dynamic modification of the inspection scope and the inspection frequency. The decision to inspect and the sample size are based on the results of previous, completed inspections.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 156: Dynamic Modification of the Inspection Scope (at UD):
PLM400
Lesson: Dynamic Modification and Statistical Process Control
Quality level: Data record in the SAP system that defines the inspection stages for future inspections.
Statistical Process Control (SPC)
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 157: Statistical Process Control (SPC)
Statistical process control (SPC) allows you to monitor, control and improve processes.
SAP Use
Only
Internal
Partner
Quality control chart: Graphical tool to help you identify the systematic variance of a quality characteristic from a target value against the background of unavoidable, coincidental fluctuations in characteristic values (interference).
SAP
In the QM component, you can maintain control charts for qualitative and quantitative characteristics. You make the appropriate settings in Customizing.
Figure 158: Intervening in the Process
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
345
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
If you run control charts, you can configure the system so it will automatically create a quality notification if an action limit is exceeded. You can then use the notification to process the problem further.
Use
In the SPC criteria, you specify the combination of objects (for example, material, material/vendor, and so on), for which you want to run and update the control chart.
You can also assign a control chart directly to the master inspection characteristic or to the combination master inspection characteristic/material, master inspection characteristic/equipment or master inspection characteristic/functional location. In Customizing, you can define whether a new control chart is to be assigned for each inspection point. This allows you to assign different control charts to the inspection points in an inspection lot. The control chart is displayed as a graphic on the characteristic detail screen and is integrated in the characteristic overview of the results recording function. The values that have been entered are displayed "online" in this graphic.
346
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
The control chart type specifies the category of control chart to be run (for example, Shewhart chart, mean value chart).
Partner
The SPC criterion for the control chart is defined in the task list at characteristic level. The control chart type is defined in the sampling procedure that is assigned to the inspection characteristic.
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 159: Control Charts and SPC Criteria
PLM400
Lesson: Dynamic Modification and Statistical Process Control
SAP Use
The testing of the Western Electric Rules is to be performed immediately. In this case, all control charts corresponding to the selection criteria will be checked. You want to receive a list of control charts. You can then choose one control chart from the list to perform a check on.
Violations of the Western Electric Rules are displayed in a list along with the chart number, track, and sample number. From this list, you can branch to the inspection results to display detailed information and to view the control chart.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
347
Only
•
•
Partner
On a selection screen you can decide whether:
Internal
As of Release 4.6C, you can test a variety of stability criteria in the worklists for the quality control charts. These criteria are also known as Western Electric Rules.
SAP
Apart from showing where control limits have been exceeded, control charts can indicate that a process may be running out of control on the basis of unusual patterns. Runs or trends are examples of this. The Western Electric Rules are the criteria used to detect such patterns.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 160: Western Electric Rules
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the uses of dynamic modification • Plan and use quality control charts
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
348
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Scores and Costs
Lesson: Quality Scores and Costs Lesson Overview You can record and charge for the activities performed during a quality inspection. When the inspection lot is completed, the quality score is updated. This quality score affects the vendor evaluation.
Only
Internal
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the purpose of the quality score for the inspection lot Describe the effect of quality on the vendor evaluation Explain quality-related costs
Business Example
SAP
SAP
For the inspection processes at goods receipt, you require a confirmation of the services rendered after results recording. After the inspection is completed, the quality score is updated when the usage decision is made. This allows you to identify relevant tendencies in future evaluations.
Use
Partner
• • •
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
349
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
Quality Score and Vendor Evaluation
SAP Internal
Quality score based on the share of scrap in the inspection lot Quality score based on the maximum share of scrap for the characteristics Quality score based on the weighted share of scrap for the characteristics QKZ from the usage decision code
You can use your own function modules to supplement the calculation procedures that are available in the system. Quality score: Standardized statistical value for evaluating the quality of inspection lots.
350
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
• • • •
Partner
You can define the procedure for calculating the quality score in Customizing and store this procedure in the inspection setup in the QM view of the material master. For example, the following calculation procedures are available:
Once the usage decision has been made, the system determines the quality score for the inspection lot.
SAP
Use
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 161: Quality Score for Inspection Lots
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Scores and Costs
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 162: Vendor evaluation
Use
The vendor evaluation in procurement guarantees an objective evaluation of the vendor, since all vendors are assessed according to the same criteria.
SAP Use Internal
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
351
Only
Sub criterion: Component of a main criterion in the vendor evaluation system. For example, the subcriteria goods receipt lots, complaints against the vendor and audit together form the main criterion quality (this means that the score for the main criterion is calculated from the scores for these three subcriteria). You can define and weight the subcriteria in Customizing.
Partner
Main criterion: Provides the basis for the total vendor score in the vendor evaluation system. The user can define various main criteria for the evaluation of a vendor (for example, price, quality, delivery and service). The user can divide the main criteria into subcriteria and weight these criteria.
SAP
Quality scores from QM are included in the assessment procedure and can be weighted in the vendor evaluation. You differentiate between main and subcriteria that are included in the vendor evaluation.
Only Partner
This data includes:
Quality-Related Costs
PLM400
The data from QM for the vendor evaluation that can contribute to a quality evaluation comes from different areas in the company.
Results from goods receipt inspections Results from the complaints (Q2-notifications, external cause) Audit results etc.
Use
• • • •
Internal
Figure 163: Subcriteria of the Main Criteria “Quality”
SAP
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 164: Quality-related costs
352
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Scores and Costs
An inspection usually generates appraisal and nonconformity costs that can be posted to a QM order for cost settlement in Controlling. This can be a general QM order that is assigned to the material for a specific inspection type or an individual QM order. Appraisal costs: Cover all personnel and machine costs that are incurred in inspections, inspection activities or internal business activities associated with these. The appraisal costs together with nonconformity costs and prevention costs make up the quality costs. Nonconformity costs: Quality-related costs that are caused by defects. These include costs for nonconforming products, rework, scrap, unplanned screening inspections, repeat inspections, guarantees, or product liability.
Use
Partner
In quality management, the defects are documented using the quality notifications created for the product. A QM order for the confirmation of the nonconformity costs can be created from the notification.
Internal
Only
The work can be confirmed when recording results or when making the usage decision.
SAP
SAP
The work performed and costs incurred during results recording or when the usage decision is made can be confirmed in a QM order in cost processing. The work involved in the defect analysis and the defect removal can be recorded in the QM order using direct activity allocation. The order type QN01 can be used for these nonconformity costs. Costs are charged to the relevant cost centers using the QM order.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
353
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 165: Cost Processing with QM Orders
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
QM contains several functions for displaying and evaluating the cost data that is associated with QM orders. You can display all the QM orders for an inspection type, as well as a detailed cost report for the individual QM orders.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
354
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Quality Scores and Costs
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the purpose of the quality score for the inspection lot • Describe the effect of quality on the vendor evaluation • Explain quality-related costs
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
355
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management Lesson Overview There are different ways to perform evaluations in QM. Depending on requirements, you can perform evaluations based on inspection results or based on quality notifications.
Only
Internal
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
• •
Explain the different evaluation options. Perform evaluations for the inspection results and in the info system
At the end of every month, the current quality management key figures are determined using the info system. For critical inspection characteristics, an inspection results history is also required.
Use
Standard Analyses in the Information System
SAP
SAP
Business Example
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 166: QM Information System (QMIS)
356
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management
Data analysis in the QM Information System (QMIS) is based on statistical data that is updated from inspection and notification processing to the corresponding information structures. In the standard system, the QM Information System contains 15 information structures. There are information structures relating to:
Only
Inspection lots Quality Notifications Problems/defects Inspection results
Data from inspection processing is updated in the QMIS when the usage decision is made. Data from notification processing is updated when the notification is saved.
• • • •
For the material For a material/vendor For a material/customer etc.
Use
Partner
In the information structures for inspection lots, the data is stored in summarized form in the following combinations:
SAP
You can set up information structures for notifications or problems/defects in a similar way.
SAP
Internal
• • • •
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 167: Standard Analyses in QMIS
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
357
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
•
For inspection lots:
•
– For the vendor – For the material – For a customer For notifications: – – –
Vendor-related defects Material-related defects Customer-related defects
You can compare the evaluations with the planning data and can export the data to other applications for further evaluations (for example, MS EXCEL ). In addition to the standard analyses, you can create your own flexible analyses, based on the existing structures.
Use
Partner
You can display evaluations from the QMIS in list or graphic form.
Internal
Only
You can evaluate the summarized data using standard analyses with selectable reference sizes:
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 168: Early Warning System
You use the Early Warning System to monitor statistics for characteristics that have been updated in the QM Information System.
358
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management
You can monitor this data on the basis of mathematical criteria such as: • • •
Threshold values Trends Target/actual comparisons
If specification limits are exceeded, you can have the system trigger automatic follow-up actions (for example, sending a mail to a person responsible).
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
• • • • •
Run-chart (linear graphic displaying values over a period of time; line can be drawn to indicate trends) Process capability indices (for example, cpk value) Histogram (display of values as a bar chart) List with single values (prerequisite: single results recording for inspection characteristics) List of mean values and standard deviations
To determine whether the specification limits will be exceeded, you can extend the trend line in the run of values until it intersects the upper specification limit (UT) or lower specification limit (LT). You then have an idea of when you can expect a violation of the limit.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
359
Only
Internal
The following output options are available for the evaluations:
Partner
Use
SAP
SAP
Figure 169: Using Statistics
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
In addition, you can use the QM-STI interface to transfer data to external statistical programs (that you are already using) for further processing. An export function allows you to transfer the prepared data to MS EXCEL.
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 170: SAP Open Information Warehouse
Use
The information systems that belong to the LIS have a modular structure and contain various methods for evaluating the data.
Internal
The Business Information Warehouse (BW) can use data from external systems as well as data from the R/3 System for evaluation purposes.
360
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
The LIS is part of the SAP Open Information Warehouse (OIW). The OIW combines the different information systems in the SAP system. You can gain an overview of the information structures in the SAP system using the OIW and can create corresponding evaluations.
Partner
The QM Information System is part of the Logistics Information System (LIS).
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management
Evaluations Using Database Tables
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 171: QuickViewer: Principle
SAP Use
Only
Internal
The created list can be saved and displayed again in the QuickViewer. The selection criteria can be stored for the saved list and can be called up at any time.
Partner
The QuickViewer includes a link, for example, to the EIS, ABC analysis, or ALV grid control. The list can also be edited further in external programs, such as Microsoft Word.
SAP
The QuickViewer can use, for example, a database table or a database view as a data source. A list can be created from the fields of the named data source. There are two modes available for this: the basis and the layout mode.
Use
The QuickViewer is a tool developed in 4.6A, which is used to create ad hoc reports. You start the QuickViewer by entering transaction SQV1.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
361
PLM400
Internal
Figure 172: Database Queries
SAP Query allows you to define reports without having to write programs. The data can be selected from any table in the SAP system.
SAP
The working environment for the end-user is defined in the user groups. The user groups contain users that work in the same application.
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
The InfoSet determines to which database tables or fields in these tables the query is referenced. InfoSets are usually based on table joins or logical databases. The InfoSets are assigned to the user groups.
SAP
Before you can define or change a query, your system administration must have defined the user groups and the Infosets.
Use
Partner
Only
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
362
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 173: Organization in the Query
SAP
The InfoSet determines to which database tables or fields in these tables the query is referenced. InfoSets are often based on logical databases.
Use
An InfoSet can be assigned to several user groups. An InfoSet can be assigned to several user groups. Queries are always created for a specific user group using a certain InfoSet. A user in a user group has access to all queries that are created in that user group.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
363
Only
Internal
The InfoSets are assigned to a user group, to which the users in this group have access.
Partner
Users may only create or start queries if they are assigned to at least one user group. A user can be assigned to several user groups. The users in one user group all have the same authorizations.
SAP
The administrative tasks in the query environment include the creation of InfoSets and user groups, and the assignment of the InfoSets to the user groups.
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
Business Information Warehouse
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
The SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW) is a data warehouse containing consolidated information from internal and external sources.
Use
The “Business Content” information models contain Queries, MS Excel Workbooks, InfoCubes, update rules and transfer rules, info objects and R/3 extraction programs.
• • • • •
SAP R/3 extractors (data selection in the R/3 System) Staging engine (data compression in BW) OLAP engine (data selection in BW) Administrator Workbench (BW administration) Business Explorer (Presentation)
Only
Internal
The following form an integral part of SAP BW:
Data extraction takes place periodically or “on-demand”. Other BW courses: BW305 (BW - Reporting & Analysis), BW310 (BW -Data Warehousing), BW315 (BW-Reporting Management), BW330 (BW - Modeling), BW340 (BW - Data Staging).
364
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
SAP BW is preconfigured with information models, reports and tools for extracting and loading data automatically.
SAP
SAP
Figure 174: SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW)
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 175: Workbook with Embedded Query
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 176: Workbook with MS Excel Graphic
The graphic shows a demo example. It is not covered by the normal SAP support.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
365
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
You need MS Excel/Visual Basic experience to change the contents of the graphic. Available content for notifications in the BW standard (InfoCubes).
Use
Partner
Only
Internal SAP
SAP
Figure 177: Comparison of Evaluation Options
Advantages and disadvantages of each evaluation option:
Use
Original documents:
•
Covers a large volume of data and the system performance can be affected in comprehensive evaluations. – All recorded data can be read and evaluated. If original documents have already been archived, they can be accessed using Archiving functions. QMIS
•
– Application-specific functions (that is, only QM-relevant data is evaluated) – Original documents can be displayed – Exception analyses can be performed SAP BW – – –
366
Cross-application functions (that is, data from different areas and systems can be evaluated) Tool for employees at management level BW evaluations are like reports and have a variable time-reference: month, week, quarter, and so on.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
–
Partner
•
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management
Exercise 17: Quality Control Exercise Objectives
Business Example
Use
Partner
At the end of the month, you require statistics from the results of quality inspections. To do this, you create material statistics with the results from inspections during production and vendor statistics with the results from goods receipt inspections. You want to graphically display the exact run of inspection results for certain materials during a one-month period.
Task 1: Material Analysis
SAP
Create a material analysis for material T-BQ3## or your materials T-*## in the Quality Management Information System (QMIS). Which information structure forms the basis for this material analysis?
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
Use
Which key figures are displayed in the material analysis? __________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
367
Only
Internal
Which characteristics can you call up for the material analysis?
Partner
________________________________________________________
SAP
1.
Internal
Only
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create standard analyses in quality management • Display and evaluate the period breakdown of inspection results in the results history
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
Task 2: Additional Data Processing and Graphics 1.
How else can you process data for the material analysis? __________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
Only
Task 3: 1.
You want to graphically display the run chart for inspection results from an inspection during production. Create a results history for the inspection characteristic Shaft length for material T-BQ5##. Hint: Use task list type N for the results history.
SAP
Task 4:
Use
1.
The run values for the inspection results for a master inspection characteristic are to be displayed as a graphic. Create a results history for the master inspection characteristic 9-105.
Only
Internal
Graphically display the run of single values for this master inspection characteristic.
Partner
Results history for master insp. characs
SAP
Graphically display the run of single values for this inspection characteristic.
Use
Partner
Inspection Results History
Internal
Create a graphic for the material analysis with 5 key figures of your choice.
368
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management
Solution 17: Quality Control Task 1: Material Analysis 1.
Create a material analysis for material T-BQ3## or your materials T-*## in the Quality Management Information System (QMIS). ________________________________________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
Use
Partner
Which characteristics can you call up for the material analysis?
Internal
Only
Which information structure forms the basis for this material analysis?
Which key figures are displayed in the material analysis?
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
369
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Control → Key Figures → Material → Inspection Lots → Overview (MCXA)
Field name or data type
Values
Material
T-BQ3## or T*## ## represents your group number, for example, 01
Month
Accept default values
Choose the F8 function key to make the selection. The basic list Material Analysis Overview: Lots appears.
SAP
Info structure: S069 – Material statistics
Use Internal
Characteristics:
Inspection Type
Material
Month
Plant
CharValue Q-Score
Skip rate
Rejection quota
Lead time
Only
The following key figures are displayed:
All lots
Continued on next page
370
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
By double clicking on the characteristic, you can expand the material analysis according to the specifications in the basic info structure:
SAP
Choose the pushbutton i (selection log) to call up the selection log for this material analysis.
Use
Partner
Enter the following data on the selection screen:
Internal
Only
PLM400
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management
Task 2: Additional Data Processing and Graphics 1.
How else can you process data for the material analysis? __________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
Only
a)
You can also process data in the following way: Material analysis → Export → Export to XXL... Material analysis → Send Material analysis → Print
SAP
SAP
You can display the graphic for the key figures of the analysis by choosing the pushbutton Graphics or the F5 function key. You can display a maximum of 6 key figures in a graphic.
Task 3: Inspection Results History
Use Internal
You want to graphically display the run chart for inspection results from an inspection during production. Create a results history for the inspection characteristic Shaft length for material T-BQ5##.
Partner
1.
Use
Partner
Material analysis → Export → Save as PC file...
Internal
Create a graphic for the material analysis with 5 key figures of your choice.
Hint: Use task list type N for the results history.
Only
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
371
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
Graphically display the run of single values for this inspection characteristic. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Control → Evaluations of Original Documents → Inspection Result → History for Inspection Characteristic (QGP1) Enter the following data on the selection screen:
Field name or data type
Values
Task list (type/group/counter)
N
Internal
Only
Screen area Task list selection
Field name or data type
Values
Material
T-BQ5##
Plant
1000
SAP Use
Select all inspection lots or all inspection points for an inspection lot, and switch to the run chart for the inspection characteristic by choosing the pushbutton Single values [run chart single values].
Task 4: Results history for master insp. characs 1.
The run values for the inspection results for a master inspection characteristic are to be displayed as a graphic. Create a results history for the master inspection characteristic 9-105. Continued on next page
372
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
All inspection lots or inspection points are displayed in the results history, which were inspected using the task list.
Partner
A hit list appears in which all the inspection characteristics for the basic task list are displayed. Select the inspection characteristic Shaft length and exit the list by choosing ENTER. You return to the original selection screen and can execute the selection by choosing the F8 function key.
SAP
Choose enter to exit the selection screen. Another selection screen for the task list appears. Exit this selection screen without making any entries by choosing enter.
Use
Partner
Screen area Inspection lot selection
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management
Graphically display the run of single values for this master inspection characteristic. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Control → Evaluations of Original Documents → Inspection Result → History for Master Inspection Characteristic (QS28) Enter the following data on the selection screen:
Partner
Field name or data type
Values
Plant
1000
Master inspection characteristic
9-105
Internal
Only
Screen area Master insp. charac. selection
Field name or data type
Values
Being created
Indicator should not be set
Released
Indicator set
Use
Choose the F8 function key to make the selection. The characteristic list is displayed and you can see the versions of the master inspection characteristic 9-105.
Use
The results history for the master inspection characteristic now appears, and you can see a listing of all inspection lots for which the master inspection characteristic 9-105 was recorded. In this listing, among other things, the mean values (xdiagonal) are shown. Choose Run-chart: Mean values to display the run chart for the mean values from the inspection.
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
373
Only
Internal
On another selection screen, you can restrict the selection for the results history. Retain the proposed data and exit the selection screen by choosing Execute selection or the F8 function key.
Partner
Choose Display results history.
SAP
SAP
Screen area Status
Unit 11: Functions in Detail - Quality Control
PLM400
Choose the Single values pushbutton to display the run chart for the single values. Hint: By choosing mean values.
, you can display the histogram of the
Single values pushbutton to display a list of all Choose the single values from the inspection.
Only
Use
Partner
Hint: You can change the way in which the lists for the mean values and the single values are displayed by defining suitable layouts.
Internal
Choose the Single values pushbutton to display the histogram of the single values.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
374
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Evaluations in Quality Management
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the different evaluation options. • Perform evaluations for the inspection results and in the info system
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
375
Unit Summary
PLM400
Unit Summary
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
You should now be able to: • Explain the uses of dynamic modification • Plan and use quality control charts • Explain the purpose of the quality score for the inspection lot • Describe the effect of quality on the vendor evaluation • Explain quality-related costs • Explain the different evaluation options. • Perform evaluations for the inspection results and in the info system
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
376
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
Dynamic modification is possible at inspection lot creation or when making the usage decision. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
2.
True False
If the action limits of a quality control chart are violated, the relevant inspection characteristic is rejected. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
3.
True False
Quality control charts cannot be used for master inspection characteristics.
Use
Partner
□ □
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
SAP
4.
True False
SAP
□ □
Internal
Only
□ □
The quality score is updated when the usage decision is made. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Use
True False
The quality score has an effect on the vendor evaluation. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □ 6.
True False
Activity confirmations for QM orders are only possible at results recording. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
2005/Q2
True False
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
377
Only
Internal
5.
Partner
□ □
Test Your Knowledge
7.
PLM400
Evaluations are performed with reference to inspection lots or with reference to quality notifications. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □ 8.
True False
The Early Warning System can be used to monitor critical key figures.
Only
□ □
Partner
9.
True False
A movement of the data to external systems for evaluation purposes is not possible. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True False
Use
□ □
Internal
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
378
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Answers 1.
Dynamic modification is possible at inspection lot creation or when making the usage decision. Answer: True
Only
If the action limits of a quality control chart are violated, the relevant inspection characteristic is rejected. Answer: True The quality control chart can be used to valuate the inspection characteristic and subsequently ensures the acceptance or rejection of the characteristic. Quality control charts cannot be used for master inspection characteristics. Answer: False
Use
4.
The quality score is updated when the usage decision is made.
The procedure for the calculation of the quality score is defined in the inspection type in the material. The score is updated when the usage decision is made. 5.
The quality score has an effect on the vendor evaluation. Answer: True In addition to the quality score, quality notifications can also have an effect on the vendor evaluation.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
379
Only
Internal
Answer: True
Partner
The SPC criteria define how the control chart is used. For example, a control chart can be created for the combination characteristic/material or for the master inspection characteristic.
SAP
SAP
3.
Use
Partner
2.
Internal
Depending on the settings in the dynamic modification rule, dynamic modification takes place at either at inspection lot creation or in the usage decision.
Test Your Knowledge
6.
PLM400
Activity confirmations for QM orders are only possible at results recording. Answer: False Activities can also be recorded in the QM order when making the usage decision.
7.
Evaluations are performed with reference to inspection lots or with reference to quality notifications.
Only
Internal
Answer: True Different InfoStructures are available for the standard analyses. The Early Warning System can be used to monitor critical key figures. Answer: True Using the Early Warning System, the key figures on the InfoStructures can be monitored periodically. A movement of the data to external systems for evaluation purposes is not possible. Answer: False
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
The data can be moved to external statistical programs using the statistics interface QM-STI.
SAP
SAP
9.
Use
Partner
8.
380
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 12 Only
Unit Overview
Use
Partner
You use test equipment management to monitor the test equipment you use in inspections. The required master data, as well as the planning and processing of a calibration inspection is covered in this unit.
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP
SAP
• •
Describe the planning of the calibration inspection Perform the calibration inspection
Only
Internal
Lesson: Overview of Test Equipment Management............................ 382 Exercise 18: Test Equipment Management ................................. 389
Partner
Unit Contents
Use
Internal
Functions in Detail - Test Equipment Management
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
381
Unit 12: Functions in Detail - Test Equipment Management
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Test Equipment Management Lesson Overview The test equipment used should be inspected at regular intervals. An overview of the planning and execution of this inspection is given here.
Only
Describe the planning of the calibration inspection Perform the calibration inspection
In your company, the measuring devices are inspected at regular intervals. To do this, master records are created for the test equipment and the test equipment is inspected according to the inspection specifications.
SAP
SAP
Planning a Calibration Inspection
Use
Business Example
• •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
Lesson Objectives
You use the test equipment management component to monitor the test equipment you use in inspections. Test equipment is included in the inspection plan or task list using the functions for production resources/tools (PRTs).
382
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 178: Test Equipment Management Functions
Lesson: Overview of Test Equipment Management
QM is integrated with plant maintenance for managing test equipment. The Plant Maintenance component must be licensed in your company, for you to use the test equipment management functions. The Plant Maintenance functions include:
SAP
Managing master data Monitoring maintenance cycles Editing maintenance plans and strategies Calibrating
SAP
• • • •
Use
Inspection characteristics are created Inspection lots are created Results are recorded The usage decision is made A results history is written for each item of test equipment
You can track the test equipment. This integration provides improved functions for the standard maintenance inspection in plant maintenance.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
383
Only
Internal
Partner
In QM, you process calibration inspections. This means: • • • • •
Use
Partner
Figure 179: Quality Management - Plant Maintenance Integration
Internal
Only
PLM400
Unit 12: Functions in Detail - Test Equipment Management
PLM400
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 180: Master Data for Test Equipment Management
SAP Use
Material Document Equipment Production Resources/Tools
Partner
• • • •
and assign it to task lists at operation level.
Only
Internal
SAP
You can manage test equipment as:
Use
Within the mySAP PLM Asset Lifecycle Management solution, test equipment is managed in an equipment master record (for example, single measurement device) or a functional location (for example, measurement system that includes several single measurement devices).
384
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Test Equipment Management
SAP
• •
2005/Q2
Inspection results are to be entered Tolerance limits and target values are to be given
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Only
Internal
The automatic creation and processing of an inspection lot can be included in plant maintenance processes, if for maintenance or calibration:
Partner
The maintenance plan contains one or several maintenance items, in which you define the maintenance objects (such as equipment) and the related equipment task list. The maintenance order is created for the due maintenance date. The inspection lot for the calibration inspection is automatically created when the maintenance order is released.
SAP
The characteristics to be inspected are linked analogously in the PM task list or in the equipment task list to the characteristics in the inspection plan. The planned characteristics must be master inspection characteristics, if you require the measurement documents to be updated.
Use
You define maintenance cycles and, if required, maintenance strategies for equipment.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 181: Planning a Calibration Inspection
385
Unit 12: Functions in Detail - Test Equipment Management
PLM400
Processing a Calibration Inspection
SAP Use
The inspection results history allows you to select and evaluate inspection results for equipment or functional locations. You can then display the run of measured values graphically, which allows you to anticipate when tolerances are likely to be exceeded.
386
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Once the usage decision has been made, the system can trigger follow-up actions to change the PRT status of the test equipment.
Partner
You record results for the characteristics planned in the equipment task list or in the maintenance task list, valuate the characteristics and complete the inspection lot by making the usage decision.
SAP
You process the inspection lot in QM that was created by the planning activities and release of the maintenance order in plant maintenance. The items of equipment assigned in the maintenance item are copied into the inspection lot as objects to be inspected.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 182: Processing a Calibration Inspection
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Test Equipment Management
Using the results history, you can analyze past calibration results and predict future development.
SAP
Control charts can also be created for the equipment or for the functional location.
SAP
The results history can be called in results recording, in the usage decision, and as a separate transaction.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 183: Results history for Equipment/functional loc.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 184: Follow-Up Actions from Usage Decision
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
387
Unit 12: Functions in Detail - Test Equipment Management
PLM400
Update equipment status: You can use a follow-up action, for example, after an unsuccessful inspection, to block the test equipment from being used until the problem has been corrected. Adjust cycle modification factor: You can use a follow-up action to increase or reduce the inspection interval for the test equipment, depending on the result of the inspection.
Only
Use
Partner
Technically complete PM order: In respect to the calibration inspection an inspection lot is generated for a calibration order (PM order). When you make the usage decision for the inspection lot, this order can be technically completed automatically in the background as a subsequent function to the UD.
Internal
Update measurement documents: You can update measurement documents, containing the results of the calibration inspection for each item of equipment. For this update to take place, the planned characteristics must be master inspection characteristics that are assigned to a class characteristic.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
388
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Test Equipment Management
Exercise 18: Test Equipment Management Exercise Objectives
Only Partner SAP
You can use maintenance planning to enter the dates and scope of the planned maintenance and calibration activities for equipment (for example, test equipment). You can ensure that your equipment is always calibrated punctually, and therefore, functions at its best.
SAP
1.
Partner
Use
You are responsible for the calibration of test equipment used in your company. The multimeter that is used should be calibrated every 12 months in your company. You want to calibrate several pieces of similar test equipment using a calibration order.
Use
Business Example
Internal
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Explain the connection between plant maintenance and quality management with reference to test equipment management, and plan and perform a calibration inspection • Change the PRT status for the inspected test equipment during a calibration inspection
Task 1: Maintenance Plan for the Calibration Inspection
Displaying the Maintenance Plan
Hint: Use the field-related input help to choose your maintenance plan. Make the selection by entering the maintenance plan text PLM400-##. Maintenance plan: ___________________ 2.
Display the Maintenance Task List The single operations for the calibration inspection are defined in the maintenance task list. The inspection characteristics are linked to the operations for this maintenance task list. During the calibration inspection, measurement results are entered for the planned inspection characteristics for each piece of equipment. Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
389
Only
Internal
A maintenance plan already exists for the calibration of the multimeter. Display this maintenance plan and note its number.
Unit 12: Functions in Detail - Test Equipment Management
PLM400
Display the related maintenance task list for your maintenance plan (task ist type A, General task list), and note the description for the inspection operations and the corresponding inspection characteristics. Inspection Operation in Maintenance Task List
Inspection Characteristic in Operation
No.
No.
Short text for inspection characteristic
Maintenance Plan Object List You can calibrate several pieces of equipment using a maintenance plan. These pieces of equipment for the maintenance plan item are assigned using the object list. Which pieces of equipment are linked to your maintenance plan?
4.
Equipment Description
SAP
SAP
Equipment
Scheduling the Maintenance Plan
Use
Schedule your maintenance plan manually for today’s date.
Partner
By scheduling the maintenance plan, maintenance call objects (for example, maintenance orders) are created for the defined cycles. Scheduling generally occurs automatically. However, you can also schedule the maintenance plan manually at any time.
Internal
Use
Partner
3.
Internal
Only
Operation description
Only
Continued on next page
390
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Test Equipment Management
Task 2: Results Recording for Equipment and Inspection Completion with the Usage Decision An inspection lot was created for the calibration inspection because of the released maintenance order. This inspection lot only contains the individual objects for the maintenance plan.
Hint: Use transaction QE51N to access results recording and use the Equipment / functional loc. tab page to select your inspection lot.
Use
Partner
Record inspection results for the individual objects (equipment). Valuate the equipment and complete the inspection lot with a suitable usage decision.
Internal
Only
1.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
391
Unit 12: Functions in Detail - Test Equipment Management
PLM400
Solution 18: Test Equipment Management Task 1: Maintenance Plan for the Calibration Inspection
Only
1.
Displaying the Maintenance Plan
Hint: Use the field-related input help to choose your maintenance plan. Make the selection by entering the maintenance plan text PLM400-##. Maintenance plan: ___________________ Logistics → Quality Management → Test Equipment Management → Calibration Planning → Maintenance Planning → Maintenance Plan → Display (IP03)
Use Internal
2.
Display the Maintenance Task List The single operations for the calibration inspection are defined in the maintenance task list. The inspection characteristics are linked to the operations for this maintenance task list. During the calibration inspection, measurement results are entered for the planned inspection characteristics for each piece of equipment. Continued on next page
392
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Maintenance plan: ___________________
Partner
The screen Display Maintenance Plan: Initial Screen appears. Use the F4 help in the field Maintenance plan to select your maintenance plan. The selection screen for the maintenance plan appears. Enter PLM400-## in the field MaintPlan text. Start the selection by choosing the F8 function key. The maintenance plan that corresponds to the selection criteria is displayed in the list of hits. Select the maintenance plan and choose the Select pushbutton. The number of the selected maintenance plan is copied to the field Maintenance plan on the initial screen. Choose enter to display the selected maintenance plan.
SAP
SAP
a)
Use
Partner
A maintenance plan already exists for the calibration of the multimeter. Display this maintenance plan and note its number.
Internal
You can use maintenance planning to enter the dates and scope of the planned maintenance and calibration activities for equipment (for example, test equipment). You can ensure that your equipment is always calibrated punctually, and therefore, functions at its best.
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Test Equipment Management
Display the related maintenance task list for your maintenance plan (task ist type A, General task list), and note the description for the inspection operations and the corresponding inspection characteristics. Inspection Operation in Maintenance Task List
Inspection Characteristic in Operation
No.
No.
Short text for inspection characteristic
The maintenance plan contains data for the maintenance plan header and for items. The item data also includes the reference object and data for the maintenance task list. The calibration inspection is performed according to the specifications in the maintenance task list.
SAP Use Internal
Inspection Characteristic in Operation
No.
Operation description
No.
Short text for inspection characteristic
0020
Measurement before calibration
10
Zero-point deviation
20
Display at end of scale
10
Display at end of scale
0040
Linearity inspection
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
393
Only
Inspection Operation in Maintenance Task List
Partner
Hint: In plant maintenance, there is the general maintenance task list, as well as the equipment task list. The general maintenance task list is not linked to a specific maintenance object (for example, test equipment). The general task list can be used as a model for creating equipment task lists.
SAP
Display the corresponding maintenance task list. Choose the pushbutton Display task list. The operation overview for the general task list appears. Whether inspection characteristics exist in operations depends on the operation control key. Select an operation, and switch to the characteristic overview for the general maintenance task list by choosing the pushbutton Insp. c.
Use
Partner
a)
Internal
Only
Operation description
Unit 12: Functions in Detail - Test Equipment Management
3.
PLM400
Maintenance Plan Object List You can calibrate several pieces of equipment using a maintenance plan. These pieces of equipment for the maintenance plan item are assigned using the object list. Which pieces of equipment are linked to your maintenance plan?
Use the tab page Object item list in the maintenance plan to display the assigned objects. Equipment
Equipment Description
T-MA##
Multimeter (V, A, ohm)
T-MD## (in the object list)
Multimeter (V, A, ohm), digital
SAP Use Internal
Scheduling the Maintenance Plan By scheduling the maintenance plan, maintenance call objects (for example, maintenance orders) are created for the defined cycles. Scheduling generally occurs automatically. However, you can also schedule the maintenance plan manually at any time.
Continued on next page
394
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
4.
Partner
An object list is a list of the objects (for example, an equipment, a functional location, a notification or a material) that were assigned to a maintenance notification, maintenance order, or maintenance item.
SAP
Hint: A reference object is a technical object (for example, an equipment, a functional location, an assembly or a combination of material and serial number) that is referred to in a service- or maintenance notification or a service-or maintenance order. The specification of a reference object makes it easier to perform the order account assignment as the data that is in the master record of the object is defaulted. In addition, the specification of a reference object has an effect on the proposal of components and routings when planning the order.
Use
Partner
a)
Equipment Description
Internal
Only
Equipment
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Test Equipment Management
Schedule your maintenance plan manually for today’s date. a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Test Equipment Management → Calibration Planning → Maintenance Planning → Scheduling (IP10) Exit the initial screen for scheduling the maintenance plan by choosing enter.
Only Partner
Task 2:
SAP
An inspection lot was created for the calibration inspection because of the released maintenance order. This inspection lot only contains the individual objects for the maintenance plan.
Use Internal
Hint: Use transaction QE51N to access results recording and use the Equipment / functional loc. tab page to select your inspection lot.
a)
Only
Record inspection results for the individual objects (equipment). Valuate the equipment and complete the inspection lot with a suitable usage decision. Logistics → Quality Management → Test Equipment Management → Calibration Inspection → Inspection Results for Equipment → Hierarchical Worklist (QE53) or Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording (QE51N)
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
1.
SAP
Results Recording for Equipment and Inspection Completion with the Usage Decision
Use
Hint: The created maintenance order is immediately released because of the system settings. An inspection lot of origin 14 (Plant Maintenance) is created when the order is released. On the basis of this inspection lot, inspection results are recorded for the calibration inspection of each object (test equipment).
Internal
Choose the pushbutton Manual call to schedule the maintenance plan. Enter the current date as the start date. The current data is entered by the system on the tab page Manual calls. Save the maintenance plan so that a maintenance call object (maintenance order) can be created.
395
Unit 12: Functions in Detail - Test Equipment Management
PLM400
Enter the following data on the initial screen of transaction QE53 in the screen area Inspection lot selection: Field name or data type
Values
Equipment
T-M*##
Only Partner Use Internal
Make a suitable usage decision and save your entries. If required, you can change the cycle modification factor for the maintenance plan and the PRT status for the equipment using the follow-up action for the UD code.
396
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Record results for the inspection characteristics and complete the inspection lot with the usage decision. Switch from the results recording worklist to the usage decision by clicking on the inspection lot number. You can display the valuation for single pieces of equipment on the tab page Equipment in the usage decision, and if necessary, navigate to the inspection results.
Partner
Hint: You can also still make a confirmation for the maintenance order when the equipment is valuated.
SAP
Exit the valuation screen by choosing enter.
Use
To work with transaction QE53, you need to know that you choose the pushbutton Hierarchy Tree Strg+F2 to explode the hierarchy tree. The single pieces of equipment are displayed with the corresponding inspection characteristics. You switch to the characteristic overview for results recording by clicking on the equipment. Record results for the inspection characteristics and save your entries. When you save the results, you valuate the equipment for the respective inspection operation.
SAP
Start the selection by choosing the F8 function key. The results recording worklist for equipment appears. Your current inspection lot and the inspection-relevant operations are displayed.
Internal
Hint: In transaction QE51N, enter the data specified above on the Equipment / functional loc. tab page.
PLM400
Lesson: Overview of Test Equipment Management
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the planning of the calibration inspection • Perform the calibration inspection
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
397
Unit Summary
PLM400
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the planning of the calibration inspection • Perform the calibration inspection
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
398
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
Test equipment can be created as equipment or as functional locations. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Only
For the calibration inspection, several measurement devices can be grouped together in a test equipment group. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
3.
True False
The results history for equipment displays the results of past calibration inspections.
Use
Partner
□ □
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
SAP
True False
SAP
□ □
Internal
2.
True False
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
399
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
Test equipment can be created as equipment or as functional locations. Answer: True
2.
For the calibration inspection, several measurement devices can be grouped together in a test equipment group.
Partner
Answer: True These measurement devices can then be calibrated at the same time. The results history for equipment displays the results of past calibration inspections.
Use
3.
Answer: True
SAP
Trends can also be identified in the results history, which may provide information for the next inspection.
SAP
Internal
Only
A single measurement device can be created as equipment. Complex measurement systems can be created as a functional location.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
400
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 13 Unit Overview
Partner
In this unit, you will learn about the entire stability study process. This process is divided into the initial test, stability planning, and the stability test. An example is used to show you a typical stability study process.
Use
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
SAP
Explain the process flow of a stability study Plan and execute a stability study Explain the objects used in a stability study Describe the activities involved in a stability study
SAP
• • • •
Use
Lesson: Stability Study Process Flow ............................................ 402 Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study............................................ 413 Exercise 19: Planning and Executing Stability Studies.................... 433
Partner
Unit Contents
Only
Internal
Internal
Only
Functions in Detail - Stability Study
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
401
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Lesson: Stability Study Process Flow Lesson Overview Stability studies are performed to examine how different conditions affect a product over a specified period of time. The process flow of a stability study is explained in this lesson.
Only
Internal
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the process flow of a stability study Plan and execute a stability study
Business Example The development of a new product must include research into the ideal composition of this product to ensure that the shelf life is as long as possible.
SAP
SAP
Stability Studies - Process Overview
Use
Partner
• •
Stability studies or shelf-life studies are performed in the chemical-, pharmaceutical-, and food industries to examine how different environmental conditions, such as temperature, moisture, and brightness, affect a product (for example, paints, lacquers, or medicines) or a batch over a specified period of time. These industry sectors are closely regulated. Various national and international regulatory agencies (for example, the Food & Drug Administration) and international guidelines (for example, the Good Manufacturing Practices) specify the scope and
402
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 185: Stability Study Functions
PLM400
Lesson: Stability Study Process Flow
the types of products for which stability studies must be conducted (for example, as a prerequisite to being introduced on the market or as a means of testing the product on a regular basis during its market life). Stability studies are also performed during the development processes of new products, for example, to determine the ideal composition of a product or the most suitable packaging for a product, thereby ensuring it will meet the minimum stability and shelf-life requirements for the intended storage conditions.
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
To determine the shelf-life of a product, for example, you create physical samples of the product and store them under controlled conditions (storage conditions) for the duration of the study. At specified intervals during the study, you remove these physical samples or parts of these samples from the various conditions and test them according to predefined inspection plans. You can then use the results of these tests which have accumulated over the course of the study, for example, to check and confirm whether the desired or guaranteed life expectancy of the product conforms to the predefined recommendations for storage.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 186: Stability Studies - Process Overview
The stability study process consists of three main phases (initial test, stability planning, stability test) and of several subordinate process steps, as shown in the graphic. The illustrated process steps show a typical process flow. The stability study is a solution that can be flexibly adapted to suit the requirements of different users and therefore other process variants are also possible.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
403
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Many of the process steps involved in a stability study are run using the follow-up functions in the action box of the quality notification or stability study. In the process description, all steps that are triggered by follow-up functions are marked with a asterisk (*). All process steps are documented using user statuses. These user statuses can either allow or prevent the execution of other process steps.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
In preparation for the receipt of physical samples, you create a sample record for the initial sample in the system. When you receive the physical sample in the laboratory, you confirm the initial sample. The confirmation must be executed before you can test the initial sample. If you are executing a stability study with reference to a material, you can assign a stability BOM to the stability study. This is an optional step. For the initial test, you manually create an inspection lot and select an inspection plan and the required inspection characteristics (flexible inspection specifications) for the test of the initial sample. Then you record results. Depending on the results of the initial test, you decide whether or not you wish to continue with the stability study. By performing the initial test, you can make sure that initial sample and subsequent
404
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
You create a stability study by creating a quality notification in the system.
Partner
Use
SAP
SAP
Figure 187: Stability Study - The Process
PLM400
Lesson: Stability Study Process Flow
stability samples (which may be created from a quantity of the initial sample) will meet your specific requirements for the stability study, before you proceed with the actual stability testing phase. You then test every stability sample under one storage condition. To do this, you use deadline monitoring functions to create inspection lots for the upcoming test dates. By planning a background job, you can also ensure that the system automatically creates these inspection lots.
Only
Use
Partner
Create and Carry Out a Stability Study
Internal
You complete each individual stability test by making the usage decision for the relevant inspection lot. You complete the actual stability study after you have completed all stability tests on all test dates. When you complete the stability study, you remove the stability samples from storage.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 188: Create Stability Study
You initiate the stability study by creating a quality notification (type QS or QR, depending on whether or not you are conducting a study with reference to a material). This documents that you intend to perform a stability study.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
405
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
You then perform the following additional activities in any desired sequence: • •
Use
Partner
Internal
Only
•
You create a physical-sample record for the initial sample to be delivered to your laboratory (create initial sample). * If you are executing a stability study with reference to a material, you can assign a stability BOM to the stability study. This step is optional and you can assign the BOM at any point after creating the stability study. * When you receive the physical sample in the laboratory, you confirm the initial sample. This step can also be performed at a later stage. However, you must confirm the receipt of the initial sample before you can test it. If a digital signature is required to confirm the physical-sample drawing, the system will prompt you accordingly when you confirm the initial sample. *
SAP
SAP
For the initial test, you manually create an inspection lot and select an inspection plan and the required inspection characteristics (flexible inspection specifications) for the test of the initial sample. By performing the initial test, you can make sure that initial sample and subsequent stability samples (which may be created from a quantity of the initial sample) will meet your specific requirements for the stability study, before you proceed with the actual stability testing phase.
406
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 189: Perform Initial Test
PLM400
Lesson: Stability Study Process Flow
You test the initial sample. Depending on the results of this initial test, you can decide whether or not to continue the stability study. During the initial test, you perform the following steps: • • •
You create an inspection lot for the initial sample. * You perform the initial test by testing the initial sample and recording the results. You complete the initial test by making the usage decision for the relevant inspection lot.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Internal
You create a testing schedule to plan the frequency and scope of the stability tests. * You create inspection plans for the stability study. You can use one inspection plan for each storage condition. In the process of creating each inspection plan, you assign the strategy to the inspection plan header and the packages in the strategy to the appropriate inspection operations.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
407
Only
You specify the storage conditions under which the stability samples will be stored. When you select and assign a storage condition to the stability study, the system automatically creates a physical-sample record for the stability sample to be stored and tested under the storage condition. *
Partner
Use
SAP
SAP
Figure 190: Plan stability tests
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
You create the testing schedule and save it. Once you create and save the testing schedule, the system automatically creates an item in the testing schedule for each storage condition specified in the stability study. You process the testing schedule to assign an inspection plan to each storage condition (item) in the schedule. If you do not assign an inspection plan to each storage condition in the testing schedule before you print the storage list, the system will not be able to calculate and print the storage quantities for the stability samples. *
Only Partner
You print the storage list for the stability samples. The system automatically calculates the required quantities for the stability samples. The storage list specifies the sample quantity that will be needed for each stability sample and the storage conditions under which each sample is to be stored. You draw the required stability samples from the material left over from the initial sample. You print the physical-sample labels, attach the labels to the respective stability samples, and place the samples into storage under the specified storage conditions.
Use
You define the start date for the stability study. On the basis of the start date you specified for the stability study, the system calculates all testing dates for the entire duration of the study. *
SAP
SAP
You maintain the storage data for the stability samples in the system. *
Internal
You complete the testing schedule to set a status in the stability study that confirms that the scheduling activities have been completed. *
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
408
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Stability Study Process Flow
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 191: Execute stability tests
SAP Use
You remove the stability samples from the storage conditions as indicated on the sample-drawing instruction and deliver them to the laboratories for testing. You select the respective inspection lot for the stability test and record the test results. You complete each stability test by making the usage decision for the inspection lot. After each test, you return the relevant sample to storage. You perform the stability tests for all remaining test dates in the same manner as described above, until you have performed all planned stability tests for the duration of the stability study.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
409
Only
Internal
You make sure the shop papers (for example, sample-drawing instruction) are available. The shop papers can be printed out automatically for each inspection lot when each lot is created.
Partner
You use the deadline monitoring functions to create inspection lots for the impending test dates. You can have the system do this automatically by means of a planned job. If required, you can change the test dates. You can, for example, create additional test dates, restart the scheduling process, or not consider certain test dates.
SAP
You perform the stability tests for the storage conditions on the scheduled dates. This process phase can vary in duration. It can take several weeks, months or years. During this phase, you proceed as follows:
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
You complete the stability study. You remove the stability samples from storage.
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 192: Complete Stability Test
Use
You do not have to complete the stability study as planned. You can:
•
410
Cancel the stability study at any time for one particular storage condition or for all storage conditions. * Deactivate the stability study - for selected storage conditions or for all storage conditions - for an indefinite period of time (if, for example, you wish to continue the study at a later date). If you have deactivated the stability study, you do not remove the stability samples from storage. You only remove the stability samples from storage after you have reactivated the stability study, performed all stability tests, and completed the stability study. *
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Partner
When you have executed all planned stability tests, you complete the stability study and remove the stability samples from storage. *
PLM400
Lesson: Stability Study Process Flow
When you complete the stability study: •
• •
The system sets the user status COMP (completed) in the stability study. This status cannot be revoked and it prevents any other user statuses from being set in the study. The system deactivates the testing schedule. The system locks all of the physical samples that belong to the study (initial sample and stability samples). If there are any outstanding inspection lots remaining, you must cancel these or make the usage decision for them.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
411
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the process flow of a stability study • Plan and execute a stability study
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
412
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study Lesson Overview Stability studies are performed to examine how different conditions affect a product over a specified period of time. The objects used in a stability study are explained in this lesson.
Only
Internal
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the objects used in a stability study Describe the activities involved in a stability study
Business Example The development of a new product must include research into the ideal composition of this product to ensure that the shelf life is as long as possible.
Partner
Figure 193: Stability Studies: Required Objects (1)
The stability study is represented in the system with the help of a quality notification. The quality notification is the business object that is used to process and manage all of the activities that relate to a stability study.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
413
Only
Internal
Use
SAP
SAP
Objects Required in the Stability Study
Use
Partner
• •
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
SAP
SAP
The testing schedule is the object for planning the scope and frequency of the stability tests. The testing schedule specifies what is to be tested (storage conditions), when the stability tests are to take place (testing dates), and how the tests are to be executed (which inspection plans).
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 194: Stability Studies: Required Objects (2)
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 195: Stability Studies: Required Objects (3)
414
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
All physical samples processed in a stability study are associated with exactly one physical-sample drawing number, which is created automatically by the system when you create the initial sample. This physical-sample drawing number applies to all of the physical samples that are created and processed over the entire course of a stability study, that is, the initial sample, and the stability samples (for the different storage conditions). Scheduling is used to determine the test dates.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
Use
The inspection lot for the sample is the central data record used for the processing and documentation of stability tests.
Only
Internal
Inspection lots are created when the scheduling objects are called either manually or automatically.
Partner
Figure 196: Stability Studies: Required Objects (4)
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
415
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
SAP Use
• • • • •
416
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Control all process steps flexibly in an integrated environment Use the infrastructure of the quality notification for the stability study. Quality notifications provide you with many tools, such as worklists, to help you process all follow-up functions and process steps needed in a stability study. Extend or adapt the process steps to make them suitable to the requirements of your company (Customizing). Easily trigger the individual process steps using the follow-up functions in the action box of the quality notification. Use the document flow to call up an overview of all objects in the study (as is recommended in GMP and FDA guidelines). Use the status of the stability study to monitor the progress. Create your own shop papers (Customizing) and print them. Use the SAP Business Workflow to support you activities.
Partner
• •
SAP
The stability study is represented in the system with the help of a quality notification. The notification types for stability studies are QS and QR. The quality notification is the business object that is used to process and manage all of the activities that relate to a stability study. You use the standard functions for creating and processing quality notifications to create and process stability studies. During the various process phases of the stability study, you can:
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 197: Stability Studies: New Quality Notification Types
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
The physical samples created and processed in a stability study are identified by means of the following records:
Use
Stability study (quality notification no.) Physical-sample drawing number Individual physical-sample records
Internal
All physical-sample records for the initial sample and stability samples reference the same physical-sample drawing number. The physical sample drawing in turn also references the associated stability study (quality notification number).
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
417
Only
All physical samples processed in a stability study are associated with exactly one physical-sample drawing number, which is created automatically by the system when you create the initial sample. This physical-sample drawing number applies to all of the physical samples that are created and processed over the entire course of a stability study, that is, the initial sample, and the stability samples (for the different storage conditions).
Partner
• • •
SAP
SAP
Figure 198: Physical-Sample Record for Storage Condition
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Figure 199: Testing Schedule (1)
SAP
For every physical sample that is assigned to a storage condition, you must maintain the following data for the testing schedule item: The inspection type (inspection lot origin 16) that is to be used to create the inspection lots for the storage condition.The inspection plan that is to be used to test the storage condition. The intervals from the strategy that you have assigned to the operations in the inspection plan determine on which dates an operation is to be tested.
Partner
Use
SAP Only
Internal
A storage condition is a climatic condition or a general storage condition under which an substance or product is stored. Criteria for storage conditions may, for example, include temperature, humidity, brightness, atmospheric pressure, and so on. During a stability study, you examine what effects individual storage conditions will have on specific characteristics of a product over an extended period of time (for example, in terms of shelf life or potency). When you specify the storage conditions during the stability planning phase, you can only choose storage conditions that have previously been defined in Customizing.
Use
Partner
In preparing your system for the stability study, you must first identify which different storage conditions will be tested in your company and you must then define these storage conditions in Customizing for the Stability Study.
Internal
Only
Test Scheduling in the Stability Study
418
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
Use Internal
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
419
Only
The strategy specifies the rules for the chronological sequence of planned stability tests. It contains general scheduling information and can therefore be assigned to as many inspection plans for storage conditions and testing schedules as necessary. A strategy contains packages which specify the frequency with which the individual tests can be performed (for example, after 3, 6, 9, 12, 18 months, and so on). You use strategies to conduct stability studies. You can define one or more strategies, depending on the different testing frequencies that are used in your company for stability studies. A strategy contains a superset of possible testing frequencies that can be used in a stability study.
Partner
In addition, you must determine the different time bases and time intervals that you will need to conduct stability studies. You define these time bases and time intervals in the form of strategies with corresponding packages. Keep in mind that a strategy can contain a superset of all possible time intervals that may be needed. For example, you might define a strategy for a five year period which contains each single month as a package, even though you might only need a specific subset of packages for scheduling purposes in a given stability study.
SAP
SAP
To be able to conduct stability studies, you need to define storage conditions and scheduling strategies as basic data during the implementation phase of your project.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 200: Testing Schedule (2)
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
SAP Use Internal
Testing schedule items: The system automatically creates an item in the testing schedule for each storage condition in the stability study. This normally occurs automatically, when you create the testing schedule by means of a follow-up function in the stability study. The object entered for a testing schedule item is the physical
420
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
The testing schedule header primarily contains scheduling information from the maintenance strategy, which must be assigned to the testing schedule when you created it. This information includes the time-based testing frequencies and the various scheduling parameters. The assignment of the strategy to the header simply informs the system which intervals will be available for use in this particular testing schedule. You assign the individual intervals to the various storage conditions at the item level of the testing schedule.
Partner
Using the action box, you create one testing schedule (time-based strategy plan with a maintenance plan category that uses physical samples as reference objects and inspection lots as call objects for scheduling) for a stability study in which you intend to test the storage conditions in pre-defined intervals. This testing schedule is explicitly assigned to the stability study for which it is intended and cannot be assigned to any other study. The system then automatically creates a new item in the testing schedule for each storage condition specified in the stability study. In the testing schedule, you assign an inspection plan to each storage condition.
SAP
The testing schedule specifies what is to be tested (storage conditions), when the stability tests are to take place (testing dates), and how the tests are to be executed (which inspection plans).
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 201: Testing Schedule (3)
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
sample that is associated with the storage condition. If you specify additional storage conditions in the stability study after the testing schedule has been created, you must manually create the items for these additional storage conditions in the testing schedule.
SAP
SAP
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 202: Testing Schedule (4)
Use
Only
Internal
Inspection lots are created when the objects are called.
Partner
Scheduling is the basis for the creation of call objects, which are then manually or automatically called using a batch run.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
421
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 203: Scheduling (1)
SAP Use
Only
Internal
Partner
You can view and edit these dates using the functions for scheduling and deadline monitoring.
SAP
The calculation of the test dates (scheduling) for the testing schedule occurs automatically when you define the start date for the stability study using a follow-up function in the study. On the basis of this date, the system calculates all of the test dates for the entire duration of the study. These dates are calculated automatically by the system on the basis of the assigned packages and scheduling parameters in the testing schedule. The generated test dates initially receive the status Scheduled/Waiting. Using the functions for deadline monitoring, the system creates an inspection lot for each storage condition (or testing schedule item) as soon as a test date becomes due.
422
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 204: Scheduling (2)
SAP Use Internal
•
•
2005/Q2
Standard evaluations: Results history for physical samples. Evaluations for physical samples, notification evaluations, plant maintenance evaluations, inspection lot evaluations, QMIS Evaluations in stability studies: Scheduling overview as a list, scheduling overview as a graphic, stability history, packages in inspection plans
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
423
Only
To monitor the test dates and the inspection lots, you can display scheduling overviews in list or graphic form. This allows you to display a current or future worklist for stability tests in a specific stability study or for all stability studies:
Partner
Using the functions for automatic deadline monitoring, you can control the creation of inspection lots for the test dates. You start the deadline monitoring function in regular intervals by means of a planned report. This report monitors the due dates for the planned stability tests for a predefined time period you specify (for example, inspection lots for the next 30 days) and it creates inspection lots (for each storage condition) for all test dates that become due during the predefined time period (for example, during the course of the next 30 days).
SAP
The creation of call objects (inspection lots) for a specific date occurs at a later time, either on the planned date or at an earlier date based on a user-specified lead time generated by a periodically running batch job. For each storage condition to be tested on this date, the system creates an inspection lot with the physical sample for the storage condition and the exact inspection operations from the inspection plans that have been planned for this date.
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Activities in a Stability Study
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP Use
• •
424
The inspection type that is to be used for the creation of inspection lots for the storage condition The inspection plan that is to be used to test the storage condition
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
You do not require a material/task list assignment and you do not have to maintain the inspection type in the material master, because the system automatically creates an item for every storage condition in the testing schedule. The object entered for a testing schedule item is the physical sample that is associated with the storage condition. If you determine additional storage conditions for stability study after creating the testing schedule, you must manually create the items for these additional storage conditions in the testing schedule. For these testing schedule items, you must maintain the following data for every physical sample that is assigned to a storage condition:
Partner
The call object for scheduling in stability studies is the inspection lot. The inspection lot is also the central data record for the processing and documentation of stability studies. Inspection lots with the inspection lot origin 16 are used in stability studies.
Internal
If you manually create an inspection lot for the initial sample, you select an inspection plan for the initial test and the inspection characteristics that are to be inspected (flexible inspection specifications).
SAP
Figure 205: Stability Studies: Inspection Lot (1)
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 206: Stability Studies: Inspection Lot (2)
SAP Use Internal
• •
2005/Q2
Complete Initial Test Confirm Stability Inspection Lot Switch to Processing of Stability Study (for example, to complete or cancel the stability study using a follow-up function) Lock Stability Sample for Storage Condition Lock stability sample for storage condition if the inspection lot is the last inspection lot for the storage condition
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
425
Only
• • •
Partner
You define follow-up actions for the usage decision in Customizing. In the standard the following functions are available to define follow-up actions for the usage decision:
SAP
Depending on the strategy you have assigned in the testing schedule and in the header of the inspection plan, the system automatically determines the relevant inspection operations. The intervals from the strategy that you have assigned to the operations in the inspection plan determine on which dates an operation is to be tested. You can, for example, maintain an operation that must only be tested once after three months for a particular storage condition. The system determines the dates when a storage condition will be tested and the types of tests to be performed for a storage condition after you have assigned an inspection plan, in which testing frequencies have been maintained at operation level.
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Unplanned Activities (1) • • •
Determine additional storage conditions Create manual inspection lot for storage condition Change storage conditions
Only
• •
You want to perform an unplanned stability test for a storage condition. You want to perform an unplanned stability test for a storage condition on a date that lies between the scheduled test dates. You want to manually create an inspection lot. You want to change a storage condition for an existing stability study. You want to complete the stability study for a storage condition prematurely.
Use
Partner
• •
Unplanned Activities (2)
SAP
Determine additional storage conditions Create manual inspection lot for storage condition Change storage conditions Deactivate storage conditions
SAP
• • • •
Use
If inspection lots have already been created for the storage condition for future test dates that lie within in this inactive period, you must manually cancel these inspection lots. If the deadline monitoring function determines that inspection lots cannot be created for a certain test date because all stability samples scheduled to be tested on this date are locked, the test date still receives the status Called. You cannot, however, confirm and complete this test date using the functions for inspection lot processing, since no inspection lots exist for this test date. In this case, you must complete the test date manually in the testing schedule.
426
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
You want to discontinue the stability tests for a storage condition for an undetermined period of time, with the option of resuming testing at a later date (deactivate storage condition). The system locks the stability sample for this storage condition. This locked status prevents the deadline monitoring function from creating an inspection lot for the storage condition when a test date comes due.
Partner
Another scenario is as follows: •
Internal
Over the course of a stability study, you may need to perform certain activities or tasks that you cannot plan in advance, but which you perform as the need arises. Examples of such activities may include the following scenarios:
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
Unplanned Activities (3)
Only
Determine additional storage conditions Create manual inspection lot for storage condition Change storage conditions Deactivate storage conditions Activate storage condition Delete storage condition Deactivate (and reactivate) stability study Add additional test dates or tests to inspection plan for storage condition Test unplanned characteristics in results recording for a stability inspection lot
You want to continue the stability tests for a deactivated storage condition in a running stability study (activate storage condition). The system then unlocks the physical sample for this storage condition. If the test dates that were initially scheduled for this storage condition have already been called (that is, the dates for which inspection lots should have been created), inspection lots will not exist for this reactivated storage condition. This is because the physical sample was deactivated at the time that the inspection lot(s) should have been created.
Use
•
2005/Q2
If you no longer need a storage condition, you can delete the storage condition from the stability study. When you delete a storage condition, all references to this storage condition will be deleted from the stability study (no record of this storage condition will appear in the document flow). You want to plan additional inspection characteristics or test dates for a storage condition after the study has been started, scheduling has been performed, and calls with inspection lots have been created.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
427
Only
Internal
•
Partner
If you still want to test this storage condition for the test dates that were already called, you have one of two options: You can create a manual inspection lot for the storage condition or you can create a manual call in the testing schedule for each future test date and each date that has already been called in the testing schedule.
SAP
SAP
•
Use
Partner
Other possible scenarios include:
Internal
• • • • • • • • •
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 207: Status Management in the Stability Study (1)
SAP Use
Document the action that you have taken Indicate which process steps you can or cannot perform next
The following user statuses have been predefined in status profile QM_S_001 for the standard stability-study process: ACTV Stability study activated, SCDF Storage conditions defined, CRIS Create initial sample, STOR Stability samples stored, BOMA Bill of material assigned, CRTS Create testing schedule, ISCR Initial sample created, TSCR Testing schedule created, ISRL Initial sample released, TSCO Testing schedule completed, CRIL Create insp. lot for initial test, STRT Define start date for stability testing, ILCR Insp. lot for initial test created, COMP Stability study completed, COIL Complete lot for initial test, CANC Stability study cancelled, DFSC Define storage conditions, INAC Stability study inactive.
428
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
The overview diagram shows the logical sequence in which the user statutes are typically set during the course of a stability study. Certain user statuses can only be set if a preceding user status has been set (dependence shown by arrows), while other statuses can be set without any dependencies.
Partner
• •
SAP
All steps performed during the course of a stability study are tracked and documented by the system’s status management function. Whenever you perform a process step, the system automatically sets a corresponding user status in the header of the notification to:
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
If you need to modify the status management functions in the standard process to adapt the process to your specific needs, you can:
SAP
Create and add additional user statuses in the default status profile QM_S_001 Create your own, new status profile in Customizing and define new user statuses
SAP
• •
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 208: Status Management in the Stability Study (2)
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
429
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
SAP Use Internal
The notification type QT is supplied by SAP for trail-related stability studies. A trial-related stability study is always based on the planning building block. The planning building block speeds up the stability study process due to simplified follow-up functions in the study. The planning building block contains basic data
430
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Since the frequency-of-use of process steps is a critical factor in trial management, you can perform the processing steps for a stability study separately using the new functions. The basis for this is the planning building block (stability study building block) for stability studies, which you can process in Recipe Management (Recipe Management Workbench) or using transaction Maintain Planning Building Block (QST09).
Partner
You can now manage trial-related stability studies, that is, you can create stability studies directly from a trial.
SAP
As of SAP ERP Central Component 5.0, trial management is available in Recipe Management (transaction RMWB). You can use this to optimize the product development process, from the first trials and prototypes to industrial production. Trial Management supports the execution of different trials and allows you to link to the trial-related areas and objects, such as quality management, project management, or process orders.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 209: New features in the stability study for SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
(notification type, strategy, and so on), data for the initial sample (physical-sample type, storage location, physical-sample container, and so on), and data for the storage conditions (inspection type, physical-sample type, and so on).
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
431
PLM400
432
2005/Q2
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
Exercise 19: Planning and Executing Stability Studies Exercise Objectives
Only
You want to introduce a new painkiller to the market. In the context of the licensing procedure, you want to perform a stability study to test the shelf life and effectiveness of your new medication.
Task 1:
SAP
1.
Create a stability study with the name STAB-## for material T-STABI-##, batch Group-## in plant 1100. How do you proceed?
Use
1.
Create an initial sample. How do you proceed?
2.
Display the document flow. What documents exist for the stability study in the system?
3.
Can you create another initial sample for the existing stability study? Why?
4.
Change the initial sample. Specify the sample container 010000 (Test Tube) and the primary packaging Foil 01 (Clear PVC Film, Airtight). The sample quantity is to be 100 PC. The sample is to be stored in the refrigerator at 7 °C in the warehouse for comparative samples. In the short text you should mention that this is an initial sample. Save your data and then take a look at the document flow for the stability study. What can you see? Access your initial sample from the document flow. Where can you find the data that you entered for the initial sample? Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
433
Only
Internal
Process initial sample
Partner
Task 2:
SAP
Create Stability Study
Use
Partner
Business Example
Internal
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a stability study • Perform an initial test • Plan and execute stability tests • Complete stability studies
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
5.
PLM400
Confirm the initial sample. Can you execute this follow-up function more than once? How is the execution of this follow-up function documented in the stability study?
Task 3:
2.
Use the worklist for results recording to execute the initial test.
3.
Make a usage decision for the initial test that results in the stability study being executed. What effect does this have on the status of the stability study?
1.
In your stability study, you want to store and test 20 tablets for each storage condition. How do you proceed?
2.
Use the document flow to examine the effect of this change on the samples in the stability study.
Task 4: Maintain Storage Conditions
Use
1.
Create a testing schedule. How do you proceed?
2.
What is the name of the maintenance plan? Check this using the document flow.
3.
Edit the schedule for your stability study. What maintenance items does it contain? For each maintenance item, enter the plan that is to be used to test this maintenance item. Select your plan using your material T-STABI-##.
4.
Print the storage list. How do you proceed?
5.
You want to place the samples in storage at sample location QM0000000002 (Warehouse for Comparative Samples). What do you have to do?
6.
Complete the scheduling. What effect does this have on the status of the stability study? Continued on next page
434
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Perform Scheduling
Partner
Task 5:
SAP
4.
Use
Partner
Create an inspection lot for the initial test and assign the inspection specifications required for the test to this inspection lot. How do you proceed?
SAP
1.
Internal
Only
Perform Initial Test
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
7.
Start the stability study. Copy the date proposed for the interval start. What effect does this have on the status of the stability study?
Task 6: Schedule the stability study. For the manual call, select the package 03 (After 3 Months).
Only
2.
Record results for the inspection lots that have been created using the worklist for results recording. How many inspection lots are created? Why?
3.
Make the usage decision for these inspection lots. Use the UD code 0050 STABI (Complete FT: Complete Study for S.C.).
4.
Then display the results history for the storage conditions and for the characteristic. Where can you find this results history?
Use
Task 7:
Print the sample removal list. How do you proceed?
3.
Remove the stability samples from storage. How do you proceed?
4.
What objects exist for the stability study?
Only
Internal
Use
2.
Partner
Complete the stability study. How do you proceed?
SAP
SAP
Complete Stability Study 1.
Internal
1.
Partner
Execute stability tests
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
435
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Solution 19: Planning and Executing Stability Studies Task 1: Create Stability Study Create a stability study with the name STAB-## for material T-STABI-##, batch Group-## in plant 1100. How do you proceed? a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Stability Study → Create (QST01)
The screen Create Notification: StabilStudy with Mat appears. Enter material T-STABI-## and plant 1100 on the Reference tab. Confirm your entries by choosing ENTER.
SAP
Task 2:
Use
1.
Create an initial sample. How do you proceed? Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Stability Study → Change (QM02) In the Notification field, enter the name STAB-## and choose the Notification pushbutton. The screen Create Notification: StabilStudy with Mat appears. In the action box, choose the follow-up function Create Initial Sample and on the screen that appears, choose the pushbutton Create Initial Sample, Save/Change Notification (F7).
Continued on next page
436
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
a)
Partner
Process initial sample
SAP
Since the material T-STABI-## is managed in batches, you can now enter the group-## batch in the Batch field or select it by choosing F4. Save your data.
Use
Partner
Use the F4 input help to select the notification type QS. In the Notification field, enter the name STAB-## and choose the Notification pushbutton.
Internal
Only
1.
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
2.
Display the document flow. What documents exist for the stability study in the system? a)
Only
Can you create another initial sample for the existing stability study? Why?
Change the initial sample. Specify the sample container 010000 (Test Tube) and the primary packaging Foil 01 (Clear PVC Film, Airtight). The sample quantity is to be 100 PC. The sample is to be stored in the refrigerator at 7 °C in the warehouse for comparative samples. In the short text you should mention that this is an initial sample. Save your data and then take a look at the document flow for the stability study. What can you see?
SAP
SAP
4.
No, you cannot create another initial sample. This is because it was specified in Customizing that the follow-up function Create Initial Sample can only be executed once. You can tell that you cannot execute this follow-up function again, because it is now displayed in gray writing. Only follow-up functions in blue writing can be executed.
Use
Partner
a)
Internal
3.
Choose the Document Flow pushbutton or the Display Objects for the Study entry in the action box to display the document flow for the stability study. Two documents exist. One is the actual stability study (quality notification STAB-##) and the other is a physical sample in the number range 9 (this is the initial sample). Double-click on the physical sample to display the data record for the initial sample.
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
437
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Access your initial sample from the document flow. Where can you find the data that you entered for the initial sample? a)
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Change Initial Sample.
Values
Primary Packaging
Foil 01 (Clear PVC Film, Airtight)
Sample Container
010000 (Test Tube)
Sample Quantity
100 PC
Storage Condition
00000005 (Refrigerator 7°)
Sample Location
QM0000000002 (Warehouse for Comparative Samples))
Short text
Initial Sample
Use
Partner
Field name or data type
Choose the Change Initial Sample, Save/Change Notification (F7) pushbutton.
SAP Use
Use the green arrow to return to your stability study (F3 function key) .
a)
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Confirm Initial Sample and on the screen that appears choose Release Initial Sample, Save/Change Notification (F7). Enter a comment for the confirmation of the physical-sample drawing. The confirmation of the initial sample is documented as a task in the notification. The creation and changing of the initial sample were also documented as tasks in the notification. You can only confirm an initial sample once.
Continued on next page
438
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Confirm the initial sample. Can you execute this follow-up function more than once? How is the execution of this follow-up function documented in the stability study?
Partner
Double-click the physical sample to display the sample record for the initial sample. On the Sample Detail tab page, you can see the sample container and the sample quantity that you entered.
SAP
Choose the Document Flow pushbutton to display the document flow for the stability study. The short text you just entered is displayed for the physical sample.
5.
Internal
Only
On the screen that appears, enter the following data:
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
Task 3: Perform Initial Test 1.
Create an inspection lot for the initial test and assign the inspection specifications required for the test to this inspection lot. How do you proceed?
To display the inspection lot, choose the follow-up function Display Objects for Study and double-click on the inspection lot. Save the stability study. 2.
Use the worklist for results recording to execute the initial test. Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Stability Test → Test Results for Stability Study → Hierarchical Worklist (QE51N) or
Partner
Use
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording (QE51N)
Field name or data type
Values
Plant
1100
Insp. lot origin
16
Material
T-STABI-##
Batch
Group-##
Default Next Inspection Point
Indicator should not be set
Only
Internal
Enter the following data on the selection screen:
Choose the Execute (F8) pushbutton to select your inspection lot. Record results for the inspection characteristics, valuate the results, and save your data. Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
SAP
SAP
a)
Use
Choose the Create Inspection Lot pushbutton. In the flexible specification selection screen, select the inspection characteristics that you want to test in this stability study and copy these characteristics by choosing the Copy (F5) pushbutton.
Internal
Only
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Initial Test Inspection Lot. Use the F4 input help to select the inspection plan for your material T-STABI-## in the Group field.
Partner
a)
439
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
3.
Make a usage decision for the initial test that results in the stability study being executed. a)
4.
PLM400
Double-click the inspection lot number to access the transaction for the usage decision. Choose the UD code 0010 STABI (Complete IT: Study Will Be Executed.) and save your usage decision.
What effect does this have on the status of the stability study? a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Change (QM02)
Only
Task 4: Maintain Storage Conditions 1.
In your stability study, you want to store and test 20 tablets for each storage condition. How do you proceed?
SAP
Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Change (QM02) In the Notification field, enter the name STAB-## and choose the Notification pushbutton.
Use Internal
Quantity
00000001
20
00000002
20
00000003
20
00000004
20
00000005
20
Only
Stor.Cond.
Partner
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Specify Storage Conditions. On the screen that appears, enter the following data:
Select the storage conditions and choose the pushbutton Specify Storage Conditions, Save/Change Notification (F7).
Continued on next page
440
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
SAP
a)
Use
Partner
The completion of the initial test is documented by the user status COIL (Initial Test Completed).
Internal
In the Notification field, enter the name STAB-## and choose the Notification pushbutton.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
2.
Use the document flow to examine the effect of this change on the samples in the stability study. Choose the Document Flow pushbutton to display the document flow for the stability study. Double-click on the physical sample and choose the Phys. Samples pushbutton. An overview of the physical samples appears. In this overview, you can see the physical sample for the initial sample (first physical sample), as well as five other physical samples (these are the physical samples for the storage conditions you have just defined). Using the Physical Sample pushbutton, you can display the individual physical samples. In the Short Text field, the information about the storage condition is displayed. Go back into the stability study.
Perform Scheduling 1.
Create a testing schedule. How do you proceed?
Field name or data type
Values
Maintenance Strategy
QSTAB1
Scheduling Period
1 MON
Inspection Type
16
Choose the Create Testing Schedule, Save/Change Notification (F7) pushbutton. What is the name of the maintenance plan? Check this using the document flow. a)
Choose the Document Flow pushbutton to display the document flow for the stability study. The maintenance plan is called STAB-##. It was created for the material T-STABI-## and the batch Group-##. Go back into the stability study.
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
441
Only
Internal
2.
Partner
Use
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Create Testing Schedule. On the screen that appears, enter the following data:
SAP
SAP
a)
Use
Partner
Task 5:
Internal
Only
a)
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
3.
Edit the schedule for your stability study. What maintenance items does it contain? For each maintenance item, enter the plan that is to be used to test this maintenance item. Select your plan using your material T-STABI-##.
Print the storage list. How do you proceed? Choose Notification → Print → Notification. Select the storage list and choose the Print Preview pushbutton to display the list before you print it. To print the storage list choose the Print/Fax pushbutton.
You want to place the samples in storage at sample location QM0000000002 (Warehouse for Comparative Samples). What do you have to do? a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Change (QM02).
SAP
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Store Stability Samples.
Use
Complete the scheduling. What effect does this have on the status of the stability study? a)
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Complete Test Scheduling and confirm the security popup that appears. The completion of the scheduling is documented by the user status TSCO (Testing Schedule Completed).
Continued on next page
442
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
6.
Partner
Use the F4 input help to enter the sample location QM0000000002 (Warehouse for Comparative Samples) for the stability samples to be placed in storage. Then choose the pushbutton Store Stability Sample, Save/Change Notification (F7).
SAP
In the Notification field, enter the name STAB-## and choose the Notification pushbutton.
Use
Partner
a)
5.
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Change Testing Schedule and confirm the popup that appears. The testing schedule contains 5 maintenance items (one for each storage condition). Select the first item and choose the Item tab page and in the Inspection Plan screen area, enter the plan to be used. Using the Next Item arrow at the top of the page, you can navigate to the other maintenance items. Use the green arrow to return to the stability study and confirm the security popup to save your changes to the testing schedule.
Internal
Only
a)
4.
PLM400
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
7.
Start the stability study. Copy the date proposed for the interval start. What effect does this have on the status of the stability study? a)
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Define Start Date of Study. Copy the proposed start date and choose the pushbutton Define Start Date of Cycle, Save/Change Notification (F7). The start of the stability study is documented with the user status STRT (Define Start Date of Study).
Execute stability tests 1.
Schedule the stability study. For the manual call, select the package 03 (After 3 Months). Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Stability Planning → Testing Schedule → Scheduling (IP10) → In the Maintenance Plan field, enter the name of your maintenance plan STAB-## and confirm by choosing ENTER.
SAP
SAP
Select the scheduled call and choose the Manual Call pushbutton. Confirm the proposed start date for the manual call. Select the package 03 (After 3 Months) and then save your data.
Use
Partner
a)
Internal
Only
Task 6:
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Continued on next page
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
443
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
2.
PLM400
Record results for the inspection lots that have been created using the worklist for results recording. How many inspection lots are created? Why? a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Stability Test → Test Results for Stability Study → Hierarchical Worklist (QE51N) or Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording (QE51N)
Only Partner
Field name or data type
Values
Plant
1100
Insp. lot origin
16
Material
T-STABI-##
Batch
Group-##
Lot Created On
Date at least 3 months in the future
Default Next Inspection Point
Indicator should not be set
Use
Make the usage decision for these inspection lots. Use the UD code 0050 STABI (Complete FT: Complete Study for S.C.).
4.
Double-click the inspection lot number to access the transaction for the usage decision. Choose the UD code 0050 STABI (Complete FT: Complete Study for S.C. and save your usage decision.
Then display the results history for the storage conditions and for the characteristic. Where can you find this results history? a)
Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Change (QM02). In the action box, choose the follow-up function Display Stability History. There is a tab page for every storage condition, where you can view the results recorded for the inspection characteristics.
Continued on next page
444
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
a)
Partner
3.
SAP
Choose the Execute (F8) pushbutton to select the inspection lots created due to scheduling. 5 inspection lots were created (one for each storage location). Record results for the inspection characteristics, valuate the results, and save your data.
Use
SAP
Internal
Enter the following data on the selection screen:
PLM400
Lesson: Objects in the Stability Study
Task 7: Complete Stability Study 1.
Complete the stability study. How do you proceed? a)
To complete the stability study, you must skip any calls that are still pending. To do this, choose:
In the Maintenance Plan field, enter the name of your maintenance plan STAB-## and confirm by choosing ENTER. Select the scheduled call and choose the Skip Call pushbutton. Then save your data.
Partner
2.
Print the sample removal list. How do you proceed?
SAP
3.
Remove the stability samples from storage. How do you proceed?
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Display Objects for Study. The graphic that appears contains all objects that were part of this stability study.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
445
Only
Use Internal
What objects exist for the stability study? a)
2005/Q2
In the action box, choose the follow-up function Remove Stability Samples. Select the storage conditions to be removed from storage and choose the pushbutton Remove Stability Samples, Save/Change Notification (F7). This operation is documented as a task in the stability study.
Partner
a)
4.
Choose Notification → Print → Notification. Select the sample removal list and choose the Print Preview pushbutton to display the list before you print it. To print the sample removal list choose the Print/Fax pushbutton.
SAP
a)
Use
Choose Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Change (QM02). In the action box, choose the follow-up function Complete Stability Study and confirm the security popup. The completion of the stability study is documented by the user status COMP (Stability Study Completed).
Internal
Only
Logistics → Quality Management → Stability Study → Stability Planning → Testing Schedule → Scheduling (IP10) → .
Unit 13: Functions in Detail - Stability Study
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the objects used in a stability study • Describe the activities involved in a stability study
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
446
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Unit Summary
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the process flow of a stability study • Plan and execute a stability study • Explain the objects used in a stability study • Describe the activities involved in a stability study
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
447
Unit Summary
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
448
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
The initial test is the first part of a stability study. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Only
The initial test is executed in accordance with the fixed specifications in the inspection plan. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
3.
True False
No QM shop papers are used during a stability study.
Use
Partner
□ □
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True False
SAP
SAP
□ □ 4.
Internal
2.
True False
The stability study is represented in the system with the help of a quality notification. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Use Internal
5.
Partner
□ □
True False
The physical samples represent the different storage conditions. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
6.
True False
Only
□ □
A different inspection plan can be used for each storage condition. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
2005/Q2
True False
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
449
Test Your Knowledge
PLM400
Answers 1.
The initial test is the first part of a stability study. Answer: True
2.
The initial test is executed in accordance with the fixed specifications in the inspection plan.
Partner
Answer: False Flexible inspection specifications can be used for the inspection lot for the initial test.
Use
3.
No QM shop papers are used during a stability study.
The stability study is represented in the system with the help of a quality notification.
Partner
Use
You can create inspection instructions and sample-drawing instructions for the inspection lots that you need for the study. In addition, you can use storage lists and sample removal lists.
SAP
SAP
Answer: False
4.
Internal
Answer: True The action box of the notification is used to control the most important stability study processes.
Only
5.
The physical samples represent the different storage conditions. Answer: True For every storage condition, there is one physical sample for which an inspection lot is created during the course of the stability study.
450
Internal
Only
Depending on the inspection results for the inspection lot of the initial test, you decide whether or not the stability study is to be executed.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
6.
A different inspection plan can be used for each storage condition. Answer: True When planning the study, an inspection plan is assigned for each storage condition.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
451
Unit Summary
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
452
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 14 Unit Overview
Use
Partner
The mySAP Enterprise Portal solution gives you access to all relevant data over a service friendly interface. It also allows you to convert structured and unstructured knowledge into concrete knowledge. mySAP Enterprise Portal brings together information from SAP and non-SAP systems, data warehouses, and desktop documents, as well as Web content and services on a central, unified platform. This lesson provides an introduction to enterprise portals, and demonstrates the advantages of the SAP solution.
SAP
SAP
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
Use
Specify reasons for implementing enterprise portals Cite navigation and personalization options Describe the core functions of the mySAP Enterprise Portal solution
Internal
Unit Contents Lesson: Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution ............... 454
Partner
• • •
Internal
Only
Enterprise Portals
Only
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
453
Unit 14: Enterprise Portals
PLM400
Lesson: Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution Lesson Overview
Only Partner
This lesson provides an introduction to enterprise portals, and demonstrates the advantages of the SAP solution.
Lesson Objectives
SAP
Specify reasons for implementing enterprise portals Cite navigation and personalization options Describe the core functions of the mySAP Enterprise Portal solution
SAP
• • •
Use
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Business Example
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Use Internal
Only
As you often travel for business reasons, you would like an intuitive, serviceable interface that you can use to complete your work effectively from any Internet terminal (with Web browser) using single sign on.
Partner
You are a sales manager who needs access to various SAP and non-SAP systems for your daily work. Some of the information, applications, and services that you need are from external sources outside of your company. This may include customer information or travel information. You also need to collaborate regularly with other sales employees at different locations.
454
Internal
The mySAP Enterprise Portal solution gives you access to all relevant data over a service friendly interface. It also allows you to convert structured and unstructured knowledge into concrete knowledge. mySAP Enterprise Portal brings together information from SAP and non-SAP systems, data warehouses, and desktop documents, as well as Web content and services on a central, unified platform.
PLM400
Lesson: Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution
Motivation Behind Enterprise Portals In today's e-business world, companies often have extremely complex IT landscapes. This includes information, applications, and services. •
Only
•
Use
Partner
•
Internal
•
Traditionally, information stored in application systems such as CRM, ERP (SAP R/3 Enterprise) and Legacy applications has only been accessible within the context of the system in question. If this data is made available outside of the individual applications, the efficiency of the user is increased. An increasing amount of complex information makes it more and more difficult for users to find the data and reports in data warehouses that is needed to help them to make their decisions. The Web has become one of the most important sources of information for employees. One of today's challenges is to replace traditional methods of accessing and using Web information with the intelligent integrations of intranets and the Internet in other enterprise systems. Managing, maintaining, and searching for texts, e-mails, CAD drawings, and other unstructured data can be extremely time-consuming.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 210: The Challenge: Complex System Landscapes
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
455
Unit 14: Enterprise Portals
PLM400
Users need access to all these things in order to do their work. This is normally realized using special programs on the desktop that involve logging on several times. One of the main aims of an enterprise portal is facilitating and accelerating access to information, applications, and services. The target group does not have to be limited to employees of one particular company. You can use external portals to reach partners, customers, or other interested parties.
Features of the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
SAP has many years of experience as a portal provider. SAP Enterprise Portal is a new generation enterprise portal. This solution enables the following: • • • •
456
The integration of all kinds of company data and applications, as well as the opportunity to control heterogeneous IT landscapes The optimal use of open standards for securing existing investments The conversion of unstructured information into concrete knowledge, and cross-company collaboration The provision of enterprise portal content for users according to their particular role within the company
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 211: The Solution: mySAP Enterprise Portal
Lesson: Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution
Internal
Partner
Only
PLM400
Use
SAP Only
Internal
Some technical aspects of the software component SAP Enterprise Portal: The core functions are written in Java – a J2EE runtime environment is required, as provided by SAP with the SAP J2EE Engine. The architecture is completely open. SOAP, UDDI, JCA, JAAS, LDAP, X.509, XML, and ICE are supported. The portal has efficient security functions including the full support of directory services, digital certificates, and SSL (Secure Socket Layer) protocol. The portal is highly scalable and can therefore accommodate a large number of users. Mobile devices are also supported by the portal (gives independence of time and place).
Partner
The mySAP Enterprise Portal solution includes the software component SAP Enterprise Portal as well as predefined portal content. The first delivery (also known as “ramp-up” start) of SAP Enterprise Portal 5.0 took place in October 2001. SAP Enterprise Portal 6.0 was first delivered in November 2002.
Use
SAP
Figure 212: Gains from mySAP Enterprise Portal
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
457
Unit 14: Enterprise Portals
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 213: SAP Enterprise Portal and SAP NetWeaver
SAP
SAP
SAP Enterprise Portal is an important component of the integration and application platform SAP NetWeaver. It contains People Integration as well as Information Integration in the form of Knowledge Management (KM).
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
458
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution
User Interface: Navigation and Personalization Users typically access the portal using a Web browser. Users only need to log on once in this case, because single sign on takes care of logging on to other systems. In the standard delivery (which can easily be modified in line with customer requirements), the browser window is divided into the following three areas: •
The header area is the initial point of entry. It consists of the masthead and top-level navigation bar.
Users can access deeper levels in the hierarchy in the navigation panel, using detailed navigation. This is similar to the SAP Easy Access Menu in SAP systems.
Only
Depending on the context, other areas may be displayed in the navigation panel, providing Drag&Relate targets or related links. When users call up a particular portal hierarchy, the content area (the actual interface for working) changes appropriately. A page with several iViews or a whole-page iView appears.
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
Technically, an iView is a small program that calls up information from an information source and displays it in the content area of the portal. You can consider the portal to be a “personal toolbox” that contains all necessary tools (in the form of iViews).
SAP
SAP
•
Use
Partner
•
Internal
The masthead normally displays the company logo, the name of the current user, and links to functions such as personalization, help, or logging off. The top-level navigation bar consists of tabs that depict the first two levels of the portal hierarchy.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
459
Unit 14: Enterprise Portals
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
Figure 214: User Interface
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
460
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution
The portal gives users many opportunities for personalization: •
•
Only Partner Use
Only
Internal
Partner
While your competitors are busy programming their enterprise portals, you can already be working productively with mySAP Enterprise Portal. This is because mySAP Enterprise Portal uses business packages to deliver predefined portal content that allows you to fulfill task- and branch-specific requirements. Business packages contain numerous iViews that deliver transactions, reports, documents, and so on from the IT systems in your company. Business packages speed up the implementation of your enterprise portal, increase productivity, and lead to a faster return on investment.
SAP
Business Packages
Use
SAP
•
Internal
•
Administrators can use Portal Administration to define the content assigned to particular roles within a company. Belonging to a role in the portal also decides how this content is displayed on the front end of the user, and how the navigates within it. If permitted by the portal administration, users can place role-based content in the portal themselves. This includes setting the layout of individual pages and selecting and assigning iViews. When users log on, the portal analyzes the language setting made for the browser being used. However, users can override this value if they wish to do so. The Platform Availability Matrix (PAM) includes a list of supported Web browsers and languages. You can find the PAM for each release of SAP Enterprise Portal in the SAP Service Marketplace using the Quick Link /nw-ep (http://service.sap.com/nw-ep). Users can select a portal design that controls properties such as font size, color, and background images. SAP delivers several designs including one with optimal contrast for display using a projector. Portal administrators can use tools to determine the overall look&feel of the enterprise portal. This includes a user-friendly, role-based navigation structure as well as the usage of the corporate identity of the company in question.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
461
Unit 14: Enterprise Portals
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
Business packages are divided into the following three groups in order to meet the requirements of users, managers, and specialists as well as possible.
Use
•
462
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Business packages for users cover all tasks that all enterprise portal users can carry out regardless of their role in the company. They help beginners to become familiar with the enterprise portal environment as quickly as possible, thereby making users feel at ease with the portal. The content of these business packages includes e-mails, task lists, calendar, travel cost reclamation, managing benefits, employee self services, e-learning, and searching employee directories. Business packages for managers allow decision makers to carry out analyses efficiently in order to gain relevant information. They also provide tools that allow managers to plan and manager their staff and budget. Departmental heads, team managers and project leaders can thereby reduce the amount of time they spend on administrative issues so that they can concentrate on strategic tasks. Business packages for specialists target the needs of experts in accounting, sales, marketing, and production. They deliver strategic tools, analytical reports, and timely warnings that allow experts to react quickly and accordingly using the correct information. They allow experts to obtain consistent, precise, and up-to-date information from numerous sources.
Partner
•
SAP
Figure 215: Business Packages Deliver Predefined Portal Content
PLM400
Lesson: Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 216: www.iViewStudio.com: Portal Content and More
SAP Use Internal
PDK for Java: Development in Java with the SAP J2EE Engine PDK for WebSphere: Development in Java with IBM WebSphere PDK for .NET: Development in the Microsoft .NET framework
The PDK contains documentation, examples, and templates, as well as a text environment and wizards for creating iViews. It also provides developers with technical content, an area for FAQs, and a discussion forum.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
463
Only
• • •
Partner
One area is aimed at developers of portal content. The Portal Development Kit (PDK) is a tool for creating iViews. SAP provides the following variants as free downloads:
SAP
SAP operates the iViewStudio, a central marketplace for portal content, at www.iViewStudio.com. The content catalog contains information on the current choice of portal content. SAP provides this content, sorted into groups aimed at particular users, in the form of business packages. Registered users can download these packages from the iViewStudio and integrate them into SAP Enterprise Portal. Business packages allow you to build portals “out-of-the-box” without needing additional development. They consist of preconfigured portal contents targeting specific user profiles: Role-based functions and processes that are available to all users along the entire value chain. They cover a large amount of the content needed for a particular task.
Unit 14: Enterprise Portals
PLM400
SAP enables customers and partners to create their own interfaces by using open interfaces and providing tools. Partners can use the iViewStudio to make their content developments available to interested users.
Knowledge Management
Only
•
Use
Partner
•
Content Management: Supports the entire lifecycle of documents, for example Creation → Approval → Publication → Search for documents → Reading documents → Comments → Archiving documents. Retrieval & Classification (TREX): Full-text search and automatic classification of documents (for instance, in the form of a hierarchy such as End User Documentation → Employee Self Service → Vacation Request.)
Internal
Knowledge Management (KM) is a central component of SAP Enterprise Portal. An open architecture allows unstructured content from various sources to be gathered together and presented to users logically and clearly. The following areas belong to KM:
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 217: Integrated Knowledge Management
Users access document using a user-friendly, modifiable user interface. The physical location of documents is not relevant. Content Management uses a range of connectors (repository managers) that are responsible for connecting up the various data sources used. Supported products and protocols include SAP Knowledge Warehouse (SAP KW), SAP CRM (for example, for brochures), file servers, Web servers, WebDAV
464
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution
servers, XML documents, Groupware products such as Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes and document management products provided by third parties such as Documentum.
Collaboration
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
Collaboration is more important than ever in the current climate. Companies are more likely to have geographically distributed employees and close integration with partners at all levels. mySAP Enterprise Portal provides a comprehensive and flexible environment that users and teams can access according to their needs.
SAP
SAP
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 218: Tools for Effective Collaboration
Only
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
465
Unit 14: Enterprise Portals
PLM400
The following tools and services belong to the component Collaboration with SAP NetWeaver. This component builds on the Knowledge Management component of the portal. •
•
SAP
unification
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
Products tend to be more similar to one another these days. But is this also true for enterprise portals? Not at all, because whilst many enterprise portals simply display applications next to one another in a portal window, mySAP Enterprise Portal overcomes integration barriers and enables a central point of access to different applications.
SAP
•
Even collaboration products from third parties can be integrated seamlessly into SAP Enterprise Portal, either using groupware services (such as Microsoft Exchange or IBM Lotus Domino), or the Synchronous Collaboration Framework (SCF) (such as WebEx or Lotus Web Conferencing). The Collaboration Launch Pad allows users quick access to all Collaboration services. The launch pad can be called up from the portal masthead at any time.
Use
Partner
You can also use the Real-Time Collaboration services Instant Messaging (to exchange brief messages with other portal users) and Chat (to communicate with several other users online).
Internal
Only
•
You can use Collaboration Room to define virtual work areas for teams, work groups, or communities. Templates help you with this. All members of a project have access to selected content within their “room” regardless of time or location. Real-Time Collaboration provides services for interactive online meetings. Portal users can use Application Sharing to share individual iViews, entire applications, or their entire desktop with other portal users at remote locations. This enables remote presentations, software demos, and IT support for users or training.
466
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Lesson: Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution
Internal
Figure 219: Drag&Relate Across System Borders
Innovative integration and navigation functions bring users the following advantages:
•
Search times are decreased and repetitive steps are eliminated. For example, you do not have to search for the customer order number and enter the sales information again. Unification consists of a competitive, patented technology (Drag&Relate) that realizes the front end integration of heterogeneous backend applications.
Summary The mySAP Enterprise Portal solution offers a central point of entry to all applications, Business Intelligence functions, document, and Web services in a company. Users are central players. They can use information from different sources and collaborate with one another inside and outside the company. Each portal is organized so that an
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
467
Only
Internal
This process omits unnecessary steps: If you want to display a delivery status, you no longer have to call up a Web browser, enter the internet address of the carrier, log on to the Web site, and then enter the customer order data. You can now do all the above in one step.
Partner
Use
•
The virtual grouping of data and information stored in different systems, applications, and information sources allows activities to be carried out across system borders. Tasks can be carried out more quickly because objects are positioned according to “logical relationships”. Example: For more information about a customer order that has not yet been delivered, you can click on the customer order number and drag it onto the order component. Result: the sales order is displayed.
SAP
SAP
•
Use
Partner
Only
PLM400
Unit 14: Enterprise Portals
PLM400
optimal working environment for quickly realizing business opportunities and solving problems is created. This guarantees an extensive provision of predefined content, business packages, a fast implementation, and a higher return on investment than for comparable products. This makes the portal into a user-oriented platform for companies and their business partners.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
468
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Introduction to the mySAP Enterprise Portal Solution
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Specify reasons for implementing enterprise portals • Cite navigation and personalization options • Describe the core functions of the mySAP Enterprise Portal solution
Only
•
SAP
SAP
The Web pages mentioned provide current information on the entire mySAP Enterprise Portal solution. You need a user in order to access the SAP Service Marketplace (previously called an OSS or SAPNet user). The iViewStudio is available for general use. However, you need to be registered as a user in order to use some functions, such as downloading business packages.
Use
• •
•
Public information on the mySAP Enterprise Portal solution: http://www.sap.com/ep Information for customers and partners on the SAP Service Marketplace: http://service.sap.com/nw-ep Documentation in SAP Help Portal (under SAP NetWeaver): http://help.sap.com Business packages and content for developers and content partners: http://www.iViewStudio.com Training information on the mySAP Enterprise Portal solution: http://www.sap.com/education
Internal
•
Partner
Related Information
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
469
Unit Summary
PLM400
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Specify reasons for implementing enterprise portals • Cite navigation and personalization options • Describe the core functions of the mySAP Enterprise Portal solution
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
470
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Unit 15 Unit Overview
Partner
An example is used to give you an overview of the most important steps in a QM implementation project. You learn about the tools used and about QM Customizing.
Unit Objectives
SAP
Unit Contents
Only
Internal
Lesson: Planning and Project Preparation ...................................... 472 Lesson: Business Blueprint........................................................ 481 Lesson: Realization and Start of Productive Use............................... 487
Partner
Use
Explain the project planning for a QM implementation Describe the prerequisites for a QM implementation Model of core processes Determine general conditions for the project Describe how to adapt the system to suit your needs Explain the most important tools used during project realization
SAP
• • • • • •
Use
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
Internal
Only
Implementing QM
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
471
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Lesson: Planning and Project Preparation Lesson Overview An example is used to show the planning of a QM implementation in the goods receipt area of an enterprise. Project preparation and project planning is explained.
Only
Business Example
• •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
Lesson Objectives Explain the project planning for a QM implementation Describe the prerequisites for a QM implementation
QM consultant: Let's prepare your project based on the following information.
Use
Quality manager: What are our objectives for the implementation project? Project member: Which tools are available ?
SAP
Project Preparation
Use
• • • • •
472
Implementation of QM in the procurement processes of Bikes Inc. in the Walldorf plant (goods receipt inspections, complaints against vendors, statistics and vendor evaluation). “Just in time” manufacturing is the dominant production method. 80% of the supply relationships are supported by quality assurance agreements. Monthly quality evaluations must be available for vendor selection and for management review. Five users in goods receipt, two in purchasing, and one quality team member. The R/3 project in the logistics area (MM/PP/SD) has been in operation for two months. Productive operation is scheduled to start in four months.
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
Partner
Example: QM Project for Bikes Inc.
SAP
Project leader: What are the prerequisites for implementing SAP QM and which steps do we have to take?
PLM400
Lesson: Planning and Project Preparation
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 220: AcceleratedSAP: Planning the Implementation
SAP Use
Only
Internal
Partner
As an ASAP project runs through its 5 phases, the results of each phase are logged in documents. This is especially important in phase 2.
SAP
ASAP can be used as a standard method for the planning and execution of the implementation of a SAP system. The ASAP roadmap describes the process of such an implementation step-by-step.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
473
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
SAP
Phase 2 - Business Blueprint - The primary focus of Phase 2 is to understand the business goals of the enterprise and to determine the business requirements needed to support these goals.
Use Internal
Phase 5 - Go Live and Support - Transition from a project-oriented, pre-production environment to a successful and live production environment. The new ASAP Roadmap (available as of release 4.6A) helps integrate all existing ASAP Roadmaps into one “configurable” one. It is based on the products R/3, BW (Business Information Warehouse), APO (Advanced Planner & Optimizer), CRM (Customer Relationship Management encompassing Mobile Sales/Mobile Services) and B2B (Business to Business Procurement) and provides a single implementation solution within ASAP for all SAP software.
474
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Phase 4 - Final Preparation - The purpose of this phase is to complete testing, end-user training, system management and cutover activities. Critical open issues are resolved. When you have successfully completed this phase, you will be ready to run your business in your productive SAP system.
Partner
Phase 3 - Realization - The purpose of this phase is to implement all the business and process requirements as identified in the Business Blueprint. You configure the system step-by-step in the work packages Baseline and Final Configuration.
SAP
Phase 1 - Project Preparation - The primary focus of Phase 1 is getting the project started, identifying team members and developing a high-level plan.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 221: Accelerated SAP Implementation Roadmap
PLM400
Lesson: Planning and Project Preparation
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 222: Phase Project Preparation
SAP
SAP
Work packages in phase 1 (Project Preparation) Create project plan Define project sequence
Use
Partner
Project kick-off Plan technical requirements Quality inspection for the Project Preparation phase
Only
Internal
You can transfer directly to the issues database from these individual packages.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
475
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 223: Project scope for QM: Bikes Inc.
SAP
This slide illustrates the project scope for the procurement area at Bikes Inc.
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
Organizational Units and Processes
SAP
You can determine the basic scope of the project for a QM project with the help of the matrix shown above.
Figure 224: Project Scope (Organizational Units)
476
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Planning and Project Preparation
The way in which the business structure (logistics) is to be represented by the SAP organizational units must be defined for the entire project. The vendor evaluation takes place, for example, from the standpoint of the purchasing organization.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
Figure 225: Organizational Units in QM (Client)
The QM data that is maintained at client level (for all plants) includes: Material specification
Partner
Use
Catalogs, codes Dynamic modification data Certificate profiles General: Forms (such as inspection instructions) [delivered in client 000 with the standard system} QM processes/procedures that are created at client level include: Complaints processing using quality notifications Evaluations in the Logistics Information System (QMIS)
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
477
Only
Internal
Sample determination data
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 226: Organizational Units in QM (Plant)
Use
The QM data that is maintained at plant level includes: Inspection plans, reference operation sets
SAP
SAP
Work centers Inspection methods inspection characteristics
Partner
Use
QM processes/procedures that are created at plant level include: Inspection lot processing
Only
Internal
Vendor release
478
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Planning and Project Preparation
Project Preparation Phase: Results •
Team
•
– 2*QM (1*at 100%), 1*IT (50%), 1 consultant if required (25%) – QM Manager (approx. 12 employee days) Project Scope (Basic Requirements)
•
Use of inspection lot processing in GR without inspection plan, use of quality notification for processing complaints against a vendor, document management (Q-assurance agreements) and SAP mail, use of QMIS, SAP Query Estimated Time Scale
Partner
Receipt of project concept X+ 3 weeks (30% = 21 employee days) Receipt of prototype X+6 weeks Completion of integration test X+12 weeks (53% = 37 days) Overall time scale X+14 weeks (17% = 12 employee days)
Use
– – – –
Internal
Only
–
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
479
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the project planning for a QM implementation • Describe the prerequisites for a QM implementation
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
480
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Business Blueprint
Lesson: Business Blueprint Lesson Overview This lesson deals with the creation of the blueprint for the project and the definition of the core processes.
Only
Model of core processes Determine general conditions for the project
The core processes for the implementation project “QM at Goods Receipt” are to be defined. The departments affected must be consulted.
Business Blueprint Phase
Use
Business Example
• •
Internal
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Partner
Lesson Objectives
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 227: Business Blueprint Phase
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
481
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Work packages in phase 2 (Business Blueprint): • • •
Only
•
• •
SAP
– –
Material master data * Vendor/material release Purchase order processing * Information exchange for complaints
SAP
•
All requirements can be documented as projects via the Q&A database; requirements for evaluations and reports have to be defined. Find out which QM master data is required and which already exists in the old system and which interfaces have to be implemented to transfer the data from older systems. Available interfaces for purchasing (to be agreed with all parties) are:
Use
Partner
When creating a project concept, the following must be considered:
Internal
•
Create the business concept for the user Project management (rough planning: when should the implementation phases be completed?) Define QM project team (1 QM expert, 1 power user, consultant, QM Manager [part-time], IT specialist). Estimated number of employees in Bikes Inc.: 500 employees Organize and implement training of project team (training to include standard training, in-house training, and workshop). Develop system scope; display organization structure; define business processes quality checks for the phase Business Blueprint
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
482
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Business Blueprint
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 228: Core Processes - Procurement: Bikes Inc.
SAP
SAP
This graphic illustrates the information flow in QM in procurement at Bikes Inc. This representation of core processes can be refined according to your needs (for example, if certain master data has not been included).
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
483
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal SAP
SAP
Figure 229: Bikes Inc. Project: Overall Structure
•
Business Blueprint for QM Project
• •
– Example of Blueprint: Bikes Inc. (QM project) Example processes in the system Review implemented and project released
The target processes are prepared in graphic form and can be demonstrated in the system with documented examples. The interfaces for procurement processes have been agreed upon and documented by each specific area. The maintenance and use of the QM master data (inspection setup in material master, quality info records, dynamic modification, and catalogs) has been defined. Enhancements for the current example project are: follow-up actions for tasks in the form of a mail to buyer.
484
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
You can use the ASAP reporting function to help create the project concept.
Partner
Use
Results for the Business Blueprint phase
PLM400
Lesson: Business Blueprint
Once the business blueprint (project concept) is reviewed (according to the ASAP Implementation guide - Roadmap) and accepted, the project scope has a binding status, that provides the basis for the realization phase.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
485
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Model of core processes • Determine general conditions for the project
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
486
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Realization and Start of Productive Use
Lesson: Realization and Start of Productive Use Lesson Overview An example of a QM implementation at goods receipt is used to illustrate some important steps in the realization process. Useful tools are also briefly named and explained.
Only
Internal
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe how to adapt the system to suit your needs Explain the most important tools used during project realization
Business Example Several things have to be changed in the system so that the required processes can run. As many processes as possible should remain in the standard to avoid modifications.
SAP
SAP
Realization Phase
Use
Partner
• •
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 230: Realization Phase
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
487
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
In this phase, you implement the business and process requirements defined in the Business Blueprint. The goal in this phase is to implement the system, perform a comprehensive test and release the system for the productive start. Tasks in the Realization phase:
•
•
SAP
SAP
•
Use
Partner
•
Defining QM master data such as catalogs, quality information records and quality assurance agreements (for example, document type Q01: External or internal number allocation, contents of descriptive text, document status, laboratory/office, original file type and file archive location, link to quality information record). Customizing based on the generated view of the IMG. For the QM basic Customizing settings, you can copy the settings delivered with the standard system from client 000. Be aware of the text in the SAP reference IMG related to this under Quality Management → Basic Settings → Set up clients.. Refining processes; this means that special cases or processes are to be considered along with the 80% cases (core processes). In the case of Bikes Inc., this means inspection lot processing with task lists. Implement enhancements (such as modifying forms for complaints against vendors or certificates). Plan the data transfer, for example, using CATTs. The following data should be transferred for Bikes Inc.: Material master using a program (within the logistics project), QM inspection settings using report program for mass activation, quality information records using the report program for mass processing, quality assurance agreements using batch-input program
Internal
Only
•
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 231: Realization Phase: Enhancements and System Adjustment
488
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Realization and Start of Productive Use
A prerequisite for modifying the SAP standard system is the analysis of suitable modification methods. You can make the following types of modifications to the SAP system, to meet the customer's requirements:
•
• •
Work packages in phase 3 (Realization):
SAP
Training of project team members; system administration; detailed configuration and final confirmation; development of conversion programs, interface programs and system enhancements; creation of report programs and forms; definition of authorization concept; integration testing and quality inspection.
SAP
•
Use
Partner
•
Customizing Enhancements to the SAP standards (do not need modification after Release update) You can get a list of all User-Exits for QM using the transaction SMOD. Use the F4 search help with the entry *Q*. The transaction BAPI gives you an overview of all BAPIs. In quality management, BAPIs are available for quality planning, quality inspections and quality notifications. You can find all quality management BAdIs in Customizing under Quality Management → Environment → Tools → Business Add-Ins.. Modifications to the SAP standard system (must be modified after each release update!!) User developments (only to be considered as a last resort)
Internal
Only
• •
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 232: Realization Phase: Activities - Example
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
489
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Preparation and Start of Productive Use
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
Figure 233: Final Preparation Phase
Work packages in phase 4 (Final Preparation):
• •
•
490
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
•
User training (users are trained by a power user in a special training client using the generated documentation). The process documentation is available in various forms. For example, as text descriptions, process flow diagrams, printed documents and screen sequences (Lotus ScreenCam). System management (Customizing settings are transported from the test or development system into the productive clients using the correction and transport systems). Detailed planning of data transfer and support. Data transfer from the legacy system to the productive system (cutover). The cutover activities are defined in the ASAP cutover plan and include setting up and initializing the productive system, shutting down the legacy systems and transferring the data to the new system. (The transfer of data prepared in the Realization phase occurs automatically using a report program or manually. The method you choose depends on the volume of data and existing legacy data.) Quality inspection (the tests should be carried out sequentially according to the test types listed above. You can use the test workbench to prepare and perform the tests. Test cases, results and activities are documented so they can be reproduced).
Partner
Use
•
PLM400
Lesson: Realization and Start of Productive Use
SAP
SAP
The diagram above shows which master data is created manually or automatically and the creation sequence.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 234: Structuring Master Data (Bikes Inc.)
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 235: Go Live and Support
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
491
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Work packages in phase 5 (Go Live and Support): • •
Production support Completion of project
Tasks in the Go Live and Support phase: • •
Problem solving (for example, improving performance) Providing support:
Only
• •
Tools for the Implementation
Use
Partner
•
Technical and expert contact persons must be available to answer user questions – Documentation must be completed Reporting and evaluation requirements are fulfilled by flexible analyses and SAP Queries. Reorganization allows you to archive documents. Consideration of additional processes (such as inspections during production or internal problem processing etc.)
Internal
–
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 236: Using the Implementation Tools
492
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Lesson: Realization and Start of Productive Use
You should calculate the time available for implementing an R/3 System project with ASAP as follows: • • • • •
Phase 1 (Project Preparation) 12% Phase 2 (Business Blueprint) 15% Phase 3 (Realization) 46% Phase 4 (Final Preparation) 19% Phase 5 (Go Live and Support) 8%
Only
Project management Project documentation Customizing Development Testing
Use
Partner
• • • • •
Internal
The tools mentioned in the example are used in the individual project phases for:
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 237: IMG: Tasks
The IMG contains all Customizing activities you need to implement application components. You can create Customizing projects in a SAP system, to help structure and manage an implementation project. You can also create and save cross-project documentation. You can create an IMG for each project.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
493
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
On the basis of a project IMG, you can work on Customizing transactions, project documentation, cross-project documentation, and information on project management.
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 238: Customer-Specific Configuration of IMG
SAP Use
For a better structure, views can be created for the project IMGs. You can use the views in conjunction with the project IMG to process Customizing activities, project and cross-project documentation and information relevant to project management. From release 4.6, you can create project views using an IMG link from the Q&A DB in ASAP. This function transfers the project scope that was determined in the Question & Answer Database (Q&A DB) into the R/3 system. The views that were generated using the IMG link contain Customizing activities for the processes that were put in the scope in the Q&A DB. To use the IMG link, a Customizing project must be created in the R/3 system.
494
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Internal
For the realization, the scope of the reference IMG can be subdivided into different projects and these, in turn, can have project IMGs assigned to them. You can use the project IMG to process Customizing activities, project and cross-project documentation and information relevant to project management.
Partner
The structure of the IMG and the tools for IMG management (such as resource management and the interface to Microsoft Project) help the project team to process the Customizing activities in a systematic sequence.
SAP
The IMG is a checklist of Customizing activities a company should perform to implement a SAP system. The structure of the IMG is hierarchical.
PLM400
Lesson: Realization and Start of Productive Use
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 239: Accelerated Industry Solutions: Process
SAP Use Internal
Industry-specific business solutions are integrated as business components in the business framework. Implementation in the system can also be a ready-to-work solution. The main feature of such a solution is the delivery of a combination of software and hardware required to install a SAP system.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
495
Only
Industry-specific Customizing involves integrating default Customizing parameters for a specific industry in the IMG. SAP has documented this process in the IMG. You can use the Computer Aided Test Tool (CATT), which is integrated in the system, to transfer industry-specific master data structures to the system. Test programs (CATTs), named after the above tool, are provided for the industry-specific business cases defined by SAP. This collection of tools is known as Preconfigured Industry Systems.
Partner
Model-based presentations of industry-specific business processes help you to analyze the business processes you have selected. Event-driven process chains (EPCs) are available for several industries (for example, the automotive and pharmaceutical industries) and are integrated in the SAP Reference Structure. A structure is available for each industry in the ASAP Question & Answer database, and helps you to produce an industry-specific Business Blueprint (Phase 2 of the ASAP Roadmap).
SAP
System documentation and the ASAP Question & Answer database contain industry-specific information and are the ideal places to start looking for information.
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
Figure 240: Global ASAP
SAP Use Internal
• • • •
496
Global Program Set-Up Global Business Blueprint Global Realization Global Maintenance & Support
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
The Global ASAP Roadmap consists of four phases:
Partner
A global implementation strategy involves defining a pre-configured corporate system or global template. The global template is the sum of all enterprise-specific configuration and Customizing settings, and models that are included in one SAP system and provide a reference for live systems at the global and local levels (individual companies and plants). This implementation approach is also referred to as the global template rollout of the SAP system.
SAP
SAP has developed Global ASAP as the standard implementation methodology for the global implementation of SAP software. The basic concept of Global ASAP is to map all activities that do not take place at local level onto a special structure called the Global Roadmap. This roadmap is structured according to the Accelerated SAP principle and includes How-to's, accelerators, modeling methods, and tools. The Global Roadmap is linked to each roadmap for projects at local level.
PLM400
Lesson: Realization and Start of Productive Use
• •
KISS (keep it small and simple) Remember the following:
•
– Act and make decisions rather than hesitate and wait – Learn from your mistakes, instead of trying not to make any – If you do not know how to proceed, search for the missing information QM service, consulting, and development are happy to support you
Product information: http://www.sap.com/plm Product documentation: http://help.sap.com
Partner
For customers and partners: http://service.sap.com/qm (password may be required) Information about courses: http://www.sap.com/education/
Internal
Only
And Finally......
Use
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
497
Unit 15: Implementing QM
PLM400
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe how to adapt the system to suit your needs • Explain the most important tools used during project realization
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
498
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Unit Summary
Unit Summary
Only
Use
Partner
Internal
You should now be able to: • Explain the project planning for a QM implementation • Describe the prerequisites for a QM implementation • Model of core processes • Determine general conditions for the project • Describe how to adapt the system to suit your needs • Explain the most important tools used during project realization
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
499
Unit Summary
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
500
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge 1.
Processes and QM basic data at client level must be discussed. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
Only
Processes and QM basic data at plant level must be discussed.
Internal
2.
True False
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Partner
□ □ 3.
True False
The expectations related to the QM project should be determined. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
SAP
True False
Sample processes are only put together in the implementation phase.
SAP
4.
Use
□ □
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Use
5.
True False
Partner
□ □
The core processes are structured. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
6.
True False
Only
Internal
□ □
The structure of the whole project is defined. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
2005/Q2
True False
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
501
Test Your Knowledge
7.
PLM400
System adjustments must be performed in Customizing. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □ 8.
True False
A training concept for the end-users must be constructed. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
Only
9.
True False
Internal
□ □
Archiving must be prepared and set up. □ □
True False
Use
Partner
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
502
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Test Your Knowledge
Answers 1.
Processes and QM basic data at client level must be discussed. Answer: True Compatibility within the project across all plants is required.
Only
Processes and QM basic data at plant level must be discussed.
Internal
2.
Answer: True
Partner
Standardization of the processes is desirable. 3.
The expectations related to the QM project should be determined.
Use
Answer: True If necessary, the current status should be documented.
SAP
Sample processes are only put together in the implementation phase. Answer: False
Use
5.
The core processes are structured.
Internal
Answer: True You must clarify what departments are affected by the implementation.
Only
6.
The structure of the whole project is defined. Answer: True The most important functions and the required master data are defined.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Partner
In the “Business Blueprint” project phase, you should already construct and test some sample processes.
SAP
4.
503
Test Your Knowledge
7.
PLM400
System adjustments must be performed in Customizing. Answer: True It is important to ensure that the Customizing changes are recorded (transport order) and documented.
8.
A training concept for the end-users must be constructed.
Only
Internal
Answer: True Examples from IDES can be used to train end-users.
Partner
9.
Archiving must be prepared and set up. Answer: True
Use
Concepts for archiving should be created.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
504
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Course Summary
Course Summary You should now be able to: • • • •
Understand business processes from a QM standpoint Understand QM integration Give an overview of QM functions List the basic conditions involved in implementing QM
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
505
Course Summary
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
506
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Appendix 1 Appendix
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP
Linking the QM component with other components in the SAP system allows the different quality management elements contained in the standards (QS9000, ISO9000) to be universally applied. With the revised version of ISO 9000 : 2000 an up-to-date set of standards is produced that, in the same way and independent of the size of the company, is suitable for Quality Management and quality assurance of services, hardware, software and bulk
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
507
Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 241: DIN EN ISO 9001: 2000 Quality Elements and SAP
Appendix 1: Appendix
PLM400
products. It mirrors the changes of the company for company services during the equalization of products and services and enables the display of dynamic operating procedures. The ISO 9000:2000 is made up of the following quality principles: Customer orientation; leadership; inclusion of the workforce; process-oriented approach; system-oriented approach; system-oriented management approach; constant improvement; subject-oriented approach for decision making; vendor relationships for use by both parties
Additional elements after VDA6: •
Financial observations, product security, company strategy
Partner
Additional Elements According to QS 9000: •
Acceptance procedure for parts from production, regular improvements, process capability
Internal
Only
•
Use
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 242: Roles in Quality Management
A role comprises a collection of business activities that a user works with in a company. At SAP, we distinguish between composite roles and single roles. Collective roles represent the tasks and areas of responsibility in QM. Single roles in
508
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
PLM400
Appendix 1: Appendix
QM contain company and functional information that is used to form the composite roles. The activities and authorizations that a user assigned to a composite role can execute are determined in the single roles. You access the functions for the single roles by means of user menus (role menus). Currently, QM delivers 46 roles. In QM, you can, for example, use the following composite roles:
Only Partner
Quality Manager Quality Planner Inspection Planner Quality Inspector Notification Processor Test Equipment Manager
Internal
• • • • • •
Use
You can find additional information about composite- and single roles using transaction PFCG. In this transaction select single roles using SAP_QM*.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
Figure 243: Courses for Quality Management
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
509
Appendix 1: Appendix
PLM400
Recommended Follow-up Courses
Only
PLM405 Quality Inspections PLM410 Quality Notifications PLM415 QM in Procurement PLM420 QM in Discrete Manufacturing PLM421 QM in the Process Industry PLM425 QM in Sales and Distribution/Quality Certificates
PLM405: Quality Inspections •
• •
SAP
PLM410: Quality Notifications
Use Internal
510
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
• • • •
Maintenance of QM catalogs (defects, causes and tasks) Creating defects and quality notifications Processing quality notifications Integrating quality notifications in the logistics supply chain (complaints against a vendor, internal problem notifications from production, processing customer complaints) Interaction of quality notifications and the SAP Business Workflow Cost recording for quality notifications Evaluation options Customizing quality notifications
Partner
• • • •
SAP
This course forms the basis for the detailed courses on QM functions in procurement, production and sales.
Use
Partner
•
QM-specific basic data (catalogs, master inspection characteristics, inspection methods, sampling procedures and dynamic modification rules) Inspection planning (inspection plans, material specification, engineering change management) Quality inspections (inspection lot creation, results recording, defects recording, usage decision) Standard evaluations of inspection results (Information System, results history, inspection reports)
Internal
• • • • • •
PLM400
Appendix 1: Appendix
PLM415: QM in Procurement • • •
Only
Internal
• • • • •
Inspection processing for various types of goods movements Integration of QM in purchase order processing Control options using the quality information record (such as releasing or blocking vendor) Vendor certificate processing Procurement documents and certificates in the Internet Inventory management with QM QM-related functions for manufacturer processing Warehouse Management and QM
SAP
Integration of QM in the production processes Use of SPC technology Inspection point processing with time or quantity reference Using statistical process control (SPC) Processing inspections for production versions and external processing Processing of partial lots and goods receipts from production Managing test equipment and integration in Plant Maintenance application component
SAP
• • • • • •
Use
Partner
PLM420: QM in Discrete Manufacturing
Course PLM421 is available for users from the process industry. PLM421: QM in the Process Industry
Internal
• •
Basics of the Classification System Basics of batch management Sample management Integration of QM in the production process (master recipe, process order, PI sheet) Basics of certificate processing QM-specific requirements in the process industry (digital signature, electronic batch record, batch determination)
This course is aimed at users from the process industry. Course examples are based on master recipes and process orders. Course PLM420 is available for users from discrete or repetitive manufacturing.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
511
Only
• • • •
Partner
Use
This course is aimed at users from discrete or repetitive manufacturing. Course examples are based on routings and production orders.
Appendix 1: Appendix
PLM400
PLM425: QM in Sales and Distribution/Quality Certificates • • •
Only
Quality certificates are the focal point of the course.
Supplementary Information: Hints • •
SAP
•
Use
Only
Internal
Partner
•
SAP
• •
When repeating the exercises, use IDES data, or your own data. You can find more information on the QM application component on our Internet QM homepage. You can also find information on our courses on the Internet. For more information on the content of the QM application component, see our online documentation. For supplementary information on implementing the QM application component, see our IMG documentation. You can find details of new QM functions in the Release Notes.
Use
Partner
Course BC460 provides additional information on using SAPscript to create forms, while courses PLM140 and PLM143 deal specifically with the variant configuration.
Internal
• •
Integration of QM in Sales and Distribution Planning and creating quality certificates for finished products, including materials from the production chain Inspection processing for a delivery including inspection specifications from batch determination Inspection specifications from the variant configuration Customer complaints and returns processing
512
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Glossary
Only
Only Partner SAP Use Internal
Partner
513
SAP
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Use
2005/Q2
Internal
Business Package Predefined portal content that SAP makes available at the address www.iViewStudio.com. client A client usually represents a company in an SAP system. This means that if an SAP system has several clients, then several companies can be represented and simultaneously active in that system. The client has a corresponding key field in the tables of the database for that SAP system. If you are logged on to a specific client, then you can only access data for that client. Clients therefore correspond to independent business entities. command field You can start applications directly by entering the transaction code in the command field. Content Area Work area of the portal browser window, in which a page with multiple iViews or a whole-page iView is displayed. Content Management Allows you to manage unstructured documents; is part of Knowledge Management (in the mySAP Enterprise Portal solution) Drag&Relate Linking of data from different applications in the portal browser window (For example: dragging an object “customer number” on to the action “display orders” immediately displays all of this customer's orders) F1 help You can use the F1 key to display an explanation of fields, menus, functions and system messages. The F1 help also displays technical information on the relevant field. F4 help The F4 help displays input help (possible values) for a field that is ready for input. favorite Favorites contain SAP system functions, or links to Internet content or files on the end user's front-end computer.
Glossary
PLM400
Only
Only Partner SAP Use Internal
Partner
2005/Q2
SAP
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Use
514
Internal
field group A field group comprises a set of related screen elements, for example, all checkboxes in one selection. iView Program that calls data from any information source and displays it in the content area of the portal. iViewStudio Central marketplace for Portal Content at the address www.iViewStudio.com mySAP Enterprise Portal SAP solution for enterprise portals Navigation Panel Area of the portal browser window, which allows you to call deeper hierarchy levels (detailed navigation), target objects for Drag&Relate operations, or links to related objects. PDK Portal Development Kit: Developer tool for creating iViews Retrieval & Classification (TREX) Powerful tool for searching and classifying documents; is part of Knowledge Management (in the mySAP Enterprise Portal solution) role A role is a collection of activities that a person performs to participate in one or more business scenarios in an organization. You access the transactions, reports, Web-based applications and other objects contained in roles through user menus. SAP Easy Access SAP Easy Access is the default initial screen in SAP systems. The left side of the screen contains a tree hierarchy of the menus available to you in the SAP system; you can use the right side of the screen to display a graphic, such as your company logo. SAP Enterprise Portal Software component of the mySAP Enterprise Portal solution SAP Logon When you call up the SAP Logon, it displays a list of SAP systems for which you can start the logon process. This list derives from entries in a file on the front-end computer: saplogon.ini. This file is normally preconfigured centrally and made available to end users. During logon, the SAP Logon program also enables logon load balancing using the resources available for the system selected.
PLM400
Glossary
Only Partner SAP
SAP Partner
Use
Use Only
Internal
Internal
SAP Note An SAP Note is text information on a specific topic, problem or system message that you may come across when working in the system. All SAP Notes are stored at SAP in an online database, and customers can call them up from there. An example question could be: “Which versions of Database XY are approved by SAP for use with my SAP system?” SAP system An SAP system is, for example, an SAP R/3 system, an SAP BW system, or an SAP CRM system. SAP systems are the central components of mySAP solutions within the framework of mySAP.com. transaction code A transaction code (also known as a TCode) is a sequence of characters that identifies a transaction in the SAP system. A transaction code may contain up to 20 characters and must always begin with a letter. Permitted characters are letters from A to Z, numbers from 0 to 9, and the underscore. To call a transaction, enter the transaction code in the command field and press Enter. unification Technology for linking information in the portal across application boundaries; basis for navigation using “Drag&Relate” user master record The user master record contains the definition of a particular user in the client. Some examples of fields are first name, last name, initial password, telephone number, and so on. The user master record is used to build up a user context (see entry for user context) when the user logs on to the system.
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
515
Glossary
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
516
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Index A
Only Partner SAP
C
Use Internal
Early Warning System, 88 Equipment Task List, 194 Event-Controlled Processes, 86 Expiration Date, 82 External Operations, 133 External Processing, 137
F F1 help, 21 F4 help, 22 favorites list, 12 FDA, 203 field group, 14 Flexible inspection specifications, 233 Flexible Specification Selection, 233
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
517
Only
2005/Q2
E
Partner
Catalogs, 197, 199 Certificate Processing, 104 Certificate Requirement, 100 Certificates, 83 Certification, 100 Characteristic mapping, 245 checkboxes, 7 client (in system), 3 Code Groups, 199 Codes, 199 Collaboration with SAP NetWeaver, 465 command field, 7, 14 Complaint Against Vendor, 81 Configuration, 231 Content Area, 459 Content Management, 464 Control Charts, 79
Deadline Monitoring, 82 Defaults/Own data, 6 Defects Recording, 136, 238 Detailed Navigation, 459 Digital Signature, 249 Drag&Relate, 466 Dynamic Modification, 103 Dynamic Modification Rules, 197
SAP
Batch Determination, 161, 232 Batch Valuation, 190 Batches, 137 BEx, 2 Business Package, 461
D
Use
B
Copy Inspection Results Function, 243 Customer Complaint, 161 Customer Complaints, 83 Customizing, 22 Customizing of local layout, 28, 38
Internal
ALE Application Link Enabling, 204 Alternative Units of Measure, 248 application help, 22 Application Log, 247 application toolbar, 7 Approval Procedure, 205
Index
PLM400
Follow-Up Actions, 247
O
G
online documentation, 16 Operation Confirmation, 136 Operations, 195
GMP, 203 Goods Receipt Inspection, 102 Goods Receipt Inspection Lot, 139
H
Only
I
Partner SAP Use Internal
N Navigation Panel, 459
518
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Only
Master Inspection Characteristics, 197, 201 Master Recipe, 133, 194 Material Specifications, 189 menu bar, 7 Mobile Results Recording, 243 multiple logons, 5 mySAP Enterprise Portal, 456
Partner
M
Keyboard Wedge, 251 Knowledge Management, 464
QM System, 80 QM-IDI Interface, 251 Quality Assurance Agreement, 188 Quality Assurance Agreements, 100 Quality Certificate, 57 Quality Certificates, 104 Quality Control, 59 Quality Data Interchange, 106 Quality Info Record Sales, 162, 186–187 Quality Info Record: Procurement, 186–187 Quality Inspection, 56 Quality Inspection Stock, 100, 103, 247 Quality Level, 198, 247 Quality Loop, 42 Quality Manual, 46
SAP
K
Q
Use
input history, 28 Inspection Characteristics, 195 Inspection Lot, 167, 223 Inspection Lot Origin, 225 Inspection Methods, 197, 201 Inspection Plan, 133, 194 Inspection Planning, 193 Inspection Points, 79, 133 Inspection Processing, 86 Inspection Results, 87 Inspection Types, 225 Invoice Block, 80 iView, 459 iViewStudio, 463
parameter ID, 21, 30 Partial Lots, 137, 163 PC Interface, 251 PDK, 463 Performance Assistant, 22 PM Task List, 194 Process Capability, 79 Process-Optimized Results Recording, 240 Product Lifecycle Management (PLM), 50 Production Resources/Tools, 200 Production Versions, 138 pushbutton, 7
Internal
Handling Unit, 106
P
PLM400
Index
Quality Notification, 58, 136 Quality Notifications, 83 Quality Planning, 55, 185 quick info, 29
R
Only Partner SAP Use Internal
V Variant configuration, 229 Vendor Evaluation, 80 Vendor Selection, 101
W Work Center, 202 Work Centers, 197
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
519
Only
Unification, 466 URL: SAP Help Portal, 24 Usage Decision, 87, 104, 247 user master record, 4 user menu, 12
Partner
2005/Q2
U
SAP
Sample Archiving, 274 Sample Management, 134 Sampling Procedure, 197 Sampling Procedures, 197 Sampling Scheme, 197 Sampling Schemes, 197 SAP BW, 2 SAP Easy Access, 5 SAP Enterprise Portal, 457 SAP GUI, 2 SAP Library, 16, 23 SAP Logon, 2 SAP menu, 12 SAP Note, 4 SAP Solution, 50 Scrap Quantity, 133 search_sap_menu, 15 search_user_menu, 15
tab, 7 Target Inspection Lot, 245 Task List Header, 195 Technical Delivery Terms, 99, 188 Technical Information, 22 Test Equipment, 197 Test Equipment Management, 60 title bar, 7 Top-Level Navigation, 459 transaction code, 7, 15 Transfer Log, 247
Use
S
T
Internal
radio buttons, 7 Rate Routing, 138, 194 rdisp/max_alt_modes, 4 Reference Operation Set, 194 Reference Operation Sets, 201 Release Status Type, 102 required entry, 22 Results, 87, 237 Results data origin, 245 Results Recording, 239 Results Transfer, 106 Retrieval & Classification (TREX), 464 Returns, 83 RMA Process, 166 role, 13 Routing, 133, 194
Selected Sets, 199 session, 4 Source Inspection, 102 Source Inspection Lot, 244 Stability Study, 61 standard toolbar, 7 Statistical Process Control, 79 Statistical Process Control (SPC), 135 status bar, 7, 30 Status Management, 226
Index
PLM400
Use
Partner
Only
Internal
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
520
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2005/Q2
Feedback Only
Use
Partner
Internal
SAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the accuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections or suggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in the course evaluation.
SAP
SAP Only
Internal
Use
Partner
2005/Q2
© 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
521
View more...
Comments
